Home

CNC 8035 - Installation manual

1. 353 C Summary of internal CNC variables ssseeeeneeeememens 355 D Summary of PLC commands E Summary of PLC inputs and outputs 365 F 2 digit BCD code output conversion table seeeeennee 371 G Koy CODES 373 H Logic outputs of key status cccecesscessccsesessecnesesceoeesseesseesessesssesesessesessseeseeesons 375 Key inhibiting codes J Machine parameter setting chart 379 K M functions setting chart ettet terne enne 385 L Leadscrew error compensation table 387 Gross compensation table 2 ere rie pe ita een 389 N L 391 FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x ABOUT THE PRODUCT Basic characteristics Software options Number of axes 3 2 sea Machining canned cycles Stand Stand 9 Before start up check that machine carrying this CNC meets the 89 392 CEE ruling FAGOR 2 8035 About the product FAGOR 8035 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY The manufacturer We declare Fagor Automation S Coop Barrio de San Andr s s n C P 20500 Mondrag n Guipuzcoa Spain We declare under our exclusive responsibility the conformity of the product Numerical Control Fagor
2. 248 9 2 2 Transferring the auxiliary miscellaneous M functions without the AUXEND signal 249 9 3 Displaying messages errors and 250 9 4 Access to the PLC from the CNC 9 5 Access to the PLC from a PC sssssssssseeeeeneen nennen 253 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS 10 1 General logic inputs ener nnne 10 2 JAXIS dOgIC I DUES ccc ct eec oes eee bai ec can Peis Cid Ceci hai e REX E Ene Rn ER rude ERE DEO 10 3 Spindle logic inputs nennen 10 4 Keyinhibiting logic inputs e 10 5 Logic inputs of the PLC channel 10 6 General logic outputs E 10 7 Logic outputs of the nnnm 10 8 Spindle logic outputs 290 10 9 Logic outputs of key status sssssssssseeeeennenneneeenen nennen nennen 292 ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES 11 1 Variables associated with tools 297 11 2 Variables associated with zero offsets 11 3 Variables associated with machine parameters 25 11 4 Variables associated with work 20 11 5 Variables associated with feedrates
3. 11 6 Variables associated with coordinates 11 7 Variables associated with electronic handwheels 11 8 Variables associated with feedback 11 9 Variables associated with the main spindle eese 11 10 Variables associated with local and global 314 11 11 Operating mode related variables 11 12 r cna e eta co HE name Pesto e Eyes ove AXES CONTROLLED FROM THE PLC 12 1 PLC execution eene nnn nennt ener 324 12 1 1 eene nnnnn nennen nennt sien rnn seen nnns etras 324 12 1 2 Blocks which can be executed from the PLC 326 12 1 3 Control of the PLC program from the 330 12 2 E o ERE SEDET IRIS 332 PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE 13 1 Definition of symbols 334 13 25 module sache ertt Dota etie rrr 336 13 3 MOGUICs PEE 337 A Technical specifications of the CNC esseeeeeeeneeneneeee 349 B
4. 1 50 1 968 It is up to the installer to make sure that the enclosure has forced ventilation or ventilation grooves in order to prevent the inside temperature to exceed the specified ambient temperature Between 5 and 502 C 41 and 122 FAGOR Relative humidity between 5 95 condensing When using a fan to better ventilate the enclosure a DC fan must be used since an CNC 8035 AC fan may generate electromagnetic interference resulting in distorted images being displayed by the CRT Brightness and contrast may be adjusted on monochrome monitors See the Operation manual chapter on Diagnosis section on Hardware configuration Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 1 1 1 Connectors 1 From versions V11 1x and V12 1x on there is anew axes board that includes the recognizance of 24V at the inputs and outputs This board will appear in Diagnosis gt Configuration gt Hardware with the name of Axes 3 This board is not compatible with previous software versions The connectors are located in the rear of the CNC 5 C qe 21 50 o o 7 o 4 24V A ov TUR e X9 X10 X11 X12 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 l A Power supply B Ground connection C To connect the USB hard disk Pen Drive D Operator panel FAGOR Z3 CNC 8035 COMPACT FLASH Slot for the local hard disk KeyCF
5. mmm im 01 CNC CONFIGURATION CNC structure FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 15 Connectors X10 X11 X12 Feedback inputs for the axes X10 For feedback connection of the first axis X11 For feedback connection of the second axis X12 For feedback connection of the third axis 15 pin high density SUB D type female connectors Pin Signal and function Feedback signals CNC structure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Voltage supply for the feedback system CNC CONFIGURATION Chassis Shield Admits differential TTL and 1Vpp sinusoidal feedback The cable shield must be connected to the metallic hood at each end Protection at the connectors It detects over currents or short circuits at the feedback of the handwheels spindle and probe and it issues the relevant error message FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 16 Slot CMPCT FLASH Compartment of the Key Compact Flash KeyCF card for CNC configuration The CMPCT FLASH slot is located on the left side of the CNC Slot CMPCT FLASH KeyCF card for CNC configuration gt This slot is used for the KeyCF that may be used to update the software versions among other operations The KeyCF supplied by Fagor with each CNC has an identification code corresponding to The card id all the c
6. A A See n ACCTIME2 P47 These parameters define the second set of gains and accelerations They must be PROGAIN2 P48 set like the parameters that define the first set DERGAIN2 P49 FFGAIN2 P50 ACCTIME P18 ACCTIME2 P47 PROGAIN2 P48 PROGAIN P23 DERGAIN P24 DERGAIN2 P49 FFGAIN P25 FFGAIN2 P50 To select the second set of gains and accelerations set g m p ACTGAIN2 P108 correctly or activate the CNC s general logic input ACTGAIN2 M5013 DRIBUSLE P63 The CNC considers this parameter when using a digital drive CAN Axis parameter DRIBUSID P56 other than 0 Even when the data exchange between the CNC and the drive is done via digital CAN bus one must define whether the feedback is also handled via bus or through the corresponding connector for the axis or spindle Value Meaning 0 The feedback is done via connector 1 The feedback is done via CAN First feedback motor feedback DRIBUSLE 0 The CNC controls the position loop The axis feedback is done via connector The command to the drive is sent out via CAN DRIBUSLE 1 The CNC controls the position loop The axis feedback is done via CAN First feedback motor feedback The command to the drive is sent out via CAN gt Spindle parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 103 Spindle parameters MACHINE PARA
7. ROLLOVER YES LIMIT 0 LIMIT 0 ROLLOVER NO LIMIT 350 ROLLOVER YES NO LIMIT 10 It counts between 0 and 360 G90 does not admit negative values G91 The sign indicates the turning direction It counts between 7999 9999 and 7999 9999 G90 and G91 as linear axis It counts between 0 and 3602 G90 does not admit negative values Always via the shortest path G91 The sign indicates the turning direction There are 2 loops one between 0 and 360 and the other between 0 and 360 It is possible to Switch from one to the other G90 and G91 as linear axis It can only move between 10 and 350 With G90 and G91 like when LIMIT 8000 An error message is issued if the target position is beyond the limits O O installation manual 5 1 2 Gantry axes Gantry axes are any two axes that due to the way the machine is built must move together in synchronism For example bridge type mills Only the movements of one of those axes must be programmed and it is called the main axis The other axis is referred to as slave axis In order to operate this way it is necessary to have the a m p GANTRY P2 corresponding to both axes set as follows Parameter GANTRY of the main axis set to 0 a Parameter GANTRY of the slave axis must indicate which axis is its master or main axis Also a m p MAXCOUPE P45 ofthe slave axis must indicate the maximum allowed differen
8. in degrees s in other words a parameter value of 20 means a jerk of 20000 degrees s This parameter only affects the spindle acceleration in open loop M3 M4 M5 Y Spindle parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 107 O installation manual MACHINE PARAMETERS Spindle parameters FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 108 The parameter value so maximum acceleration resulting from OPLACETI is reached in half the acceleration time up to 1 is calculated as follows JERKLIM 6000 1 OPLACETI 2 In this case the spindle will take twice as long to reach the MAXGEAR 1 speed than it would without jerk The JERKLIM value depends on the dynamics of the machine 4 5 Drive parameters N This option is available when the CNC uses digital servo drive system i e the drives are connected to the CNC via CAN CAN interface This option works fine for spindles with drive version SPD V7 01 or newer It also works fine for axes with drive version ACSD V1 01 or newer This option displays the tables of the drive parameters that are stored in the memkey card Card A and the sofkeys of the digital axes Press one of those softkeys for editing the drive parameters for that particular axis When selecting the drive parameters at the it will display the ones stored in each drive an
9. APPENDIX FAGOR 3 CNC 8035 Sorr M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x O installation manual FAGOR 3 CNC 8035 Sorr M V11 1x Sort T V12 1x O installation manual FAGOR 3 CNC 8035 Sorr M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x
10. T V12 1x 379 axis machine parameters APPENDIX Machine parameter setting chart FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 380 axis machine parameters APPENDIX Machine parameter setting chart ex FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 381 axis machine parameters APPENDIX Machine parameter setting chart FAGOR 3 CNC 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 382 Machine parameters for main spindle APPENDIX Machine parameter setting chart ex FAGOR 3 CNC 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 383 Machine parameters for serial line 1 PLC machine parameters APPENDIX Machine parameter setting chart P12 P34 P56 P78 P13 P35 P57 P79 P14 P36 P58 P80 P15 P37 P59 P81 P16 P38 P60 P82 P17 P39 P61 P83 P18 P40 P62 P84 P19 P41 P63 P85 P20 P42 P64 P86 P21 P43 P65 P87 FAGOR 2 8035 M V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 384 Associated subroutine
11. 373 Logic outputs of key 375 Key CodeS oessa aaa 377 Machine parameter setting chart 379 M functions setting 385 Leadscrew error compensation table 387 Cross compensation 389 Liz 391 FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 347 N N TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CNC The machine manufacturer must comply with the EN 60204 1 IEC 204 1 standard in terms of protection against electrical shock due to faulty contacts with external power supply Access to the inside of the unit is absolutely forbidden to non authorized personnel To avoid overheating the internal circuitry do not block the ventilation grooves and install a ventilation system that removes the hot air from the enclosure General characteristics 3 feedback inputs for the axes 3 analog outputs to control the axes 10 V 1 feedback input for the spindle encoder 1 analog output to control the spindle 10 V 2 feedback inputs for the electronic handwheels 2 inputs for digital probes TTL or 24 Vdc 0 0001mm or 0 00001 inch resolution
12. 567 Auxiliary M function to be executed the PLC channel MBCDP4 R568 Auxiliary M function to be executed in the PLC channel 5 569 Auxiliary M function to be executed the PLC channel MBCDP6 R570 Auxiliary M function to be executed in the PLC channel MBCDP7 R571 Auxiliary M function to be executed in the PLC channel SBCD R557 Spindle speed in BCD 2 or 8 digits TBCD R558 Indicates the magazine position of the tool to be placed in the spindle T2BCD R559 Magazine position pocket for the tool LOGIC OUTPUTS OF KEY STATUS KEYBD1 R560 Indicate whether a key of the operator panel is pressed KEYBD2 KEYBD3 KEYBD4 FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 369 O installation manual APPENDIX Summary of PLC inputs and outputs FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 2 DIGIT BCD CODE OUTPUT CONVERSION TABLE Programmed Programmed 5 B S BC Programmed S S 800 899 78 900 999 79 1000 1119 1120 1249 1250 1399 1400 1599 1600 1799 1800 1999 2000 2239 2240 2499 2500 2799 2800 3149 3150 3549 3550 3999 4000 4499 4500 4999 5000 5599 5600 6299 6300 7099 7100 7999 8000 8999 9000 9999 81 82 83 APPENDIX 2 digit BCD code output conversion table TI 91 92 93 mem 95 97 0 5 54 55 56 57 58 59 61 62 63 64 65 67 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 FAGOR 2
13. Bidirectional compensation of the leadscrew error is available from versions V7 11 mill and V8 11 lathe on When updated from a version that does not have bidirectional compensation it keeps the error values in the positive direction and it sets a zero error in the negative direction for all the points Tables When changing to a version that does not have bidirectional compensation it keeps the error values in the positive direction but it loses the error values in the negative direction Also the amount of error for the machine reference point must be zero MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 120 4 8 3 Cross compensation parameter table To enable this table set g m p MOVAXIS P32 COMPAXIS P33 NPCROSS P31 Parameter MOVAXIS indicates the axis that moves and COMPAXIS the axis affected by the movement of the movaxis to be compensated and NPCROSS indicates the number of points in the table CROSSED COMP TABLE ERROR POINT MODIFY IND NITIALIZE The table must indicate the amount of error to be compensated in specific positions of the moving axis The position is defined in home coordinates referred to machine reference zero Depending on g m p TYPCROSS P135 the CNC will take into account either the theoretical or real actual coordinates Possible values for the position and error fields Possible values Within 9
14. 11 thru 1512 O1 thru 0512 and M1 thru M2047 01 The next example shows how the PLC acts when operating with real and image values PLC Program M1 Assigns the value of 1 to mark M1 1 2 Assigns the value of 1 to 2 2 Assigns the value of M2 to O5 Assigns the value of M3 to output O5 1 1 2 2 5 As be observed the system is faster when operating with real resource values Operating with image values permits analyzing the same resource along the whole program with the same value regardless of its current instantaneous real value Operating with real values In the first scan when execution the instruction M1 M2 M1 has a real value of 1 set by the previous instruction The same is true for instructions M2 M3 and M3 05 That is why real values are used output O1 takes the value of 1 in the first scan Operating with image values The first cycle scan sets the real value of M1 1 but its image value will not be set to 1 until the end of the cycle In the 2nd cycle scan the image value of M1 is 1 and the real value of M2 is set to 1 but the image value of M2 will not be set to 1 until the end of the cycle In the 3rd cycle scan the image value of M2 is 1 and the real value of is set to 1 but the image value of will not be set to 1 until the en
15. 8035 Sort M V11 1x SOFT T V12 1x O installation manual CNC structure CNC CONFIGURATION FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x HEAT DISSIPATION The temperature of the enclosure for the central unit must not exceed 45 C 113 F while the unit is running To ensure that this temperature is not exceeded the enclosure must have enough surface to evacuate the heat generated inside and maintain the ambient conditions within the working temperature range Calculating the surface needed to dissipate the heat The expressions have been obtained for an enclosure whose walls are 2 mm thick and is made out of aluminum When using internal cooling the fan is located at 30 mm from the bottom To calculate the required total surface of the enclosure in order to dissipate the heat generated in it the following data must be taken into account lt A m Total surface required P W Total power dissipated by all the elements that generate heat inside the enclosure including the power supply and the fan if there is one Ta Ambient temperature outside the enclosure Ti C Temperature inside the enclosure At C Temperature difference Ti Ta Q m3 h Air flow provided by the fan if there is one Dissipating surface Only the top and rear of the enclosure are considered as convection heat dissipating s
16. Default value 0 This limit is activated using the mark SLIMITAC M5059 When this limit is canceled the CNC recovers the programmed speed This limit permits clearing the spindle speed temporarily via PLC e g when opening the doors etc Filter order The down ramp is dampened down the larger the number the greater the drop Possible values From 0 to 4 Default value 0 the filter is not applied When applying a filter it must be set with an order of 3 Before setting it to another value consult with Fagor Automation s technical service If the filter has been designed wrong it will not be applied The filters are not applied while moving with an electronic handwheel or a mechanical handwheel or while tracing It is recommended not to activate these filters on machines carrying out movements against a hard stop Y Spindle parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 105 Spindle parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 106 TYPE P68 Filter type Two types of filters may be used namely low passing or anti resonance To obtain a good machining quality all the axes and the spindle interpolating with each other should be defined with the same type of filter and with the same frequency For the spindle the filters are only applied in M19 and in rigid tapping where the spi
17. The operands may be Registers CNC PLC communication registers and numbers within 2147483647 or between 0 and FFFFFFFF The result of the operation may be stored in a register or in CNC PLC communication register Examples with R100 1234 and R101 100 2ADS R100 R101 R102 R102 1234 100 1334 SBS R100 R101 R103 R103 1234 100 1134 MLS R100 R101 R104 R104 1234 x 100 123400 2DVS R100 R101 R105 R105 1234 100 12 2MDS R100 R101 R106 R106 1234 MOD 100 34 ADS 1563 R101 R112 R112 1563 100 1663 2SBS R100 1010 R113 R113 1234 1010 224 MLS 1563 100 R114 R114 1563 x 100 156300 2DVS R100 1000 R115 R115 1234 1000 1 8765 1000 R116 R116 8765 MOD 1000 765 If a division by 0 is performed the DVS operation the CNC stops execution of the PLC program and it displays the corresponding error message 8 5 5 Logic action instructions AND OR XOR RR RL To perform logic operations AND OR and XOR between register contents or between a register content and a number The result is always stored in a register Its programming format is AND R1 559 R1 559 R1 559 OR XOR Registers R1 559 or numbers expressed in decimal hexadecimal or binary format can be defined as first or second operand The destination register indicates where the result of the operation will be deposited and will be defined by means of a register R1 559 Th
18. CNC PLC COMMUNICATION Auxiliary M S T functions FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 245 CNC PLC COMMUNICATION Auxiliary M S T functions FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 246 TBCD R558 T2BCD R559 The CNC tells the PLC by means of this 32 bit register the pocket number in the magazine where the selected tool is If the g m p RANDOMTC P25 has been set so it is not a random magazine the magazine pocket position coincides with the tool number This will be coded in BCD format 8 digits 123 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0010 0011 If no T has been programmed in the block the CNC will assign a value of F FFFFFFF to this register The T function will always be executed at the beginning of the block and the CNC will wait for the general logic input AUXEND to be activated to consider the execution completed This register is used when a special tool change has been made family code gt 200 or with machining centers with a non random tool magazine general machine parameter RANDOMTC P25 The CNC tells the PLC by means of the 32 bit register the position of the magazine empty pocket in which the tool which was on the spindle must be deposited This will be coded in BCD code 8 digits If a second T function is not required the CNC will assign a value FFFFFFFF to the register The second T function will be sent together with
19. Operation of the TEN input in this mode If once the timer is activated TEN 0 is selected the PLC stops timing and it is necessary to assign TEN 1 for this timing to continue FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 217 o Bo E 5 o tr o 4 a FAGOR 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 218 7 5 4 Signal limiting mode TG4 input In this operating mode the timer status is kept at a high logic level 1 from the moment when the TG4 inputis activated until the time indicated by the time constant has elapsed or until a down flank is produced at the TG4 input S Dee 212711 T LO L If the timer is initialized with values TEN 1 and TRS 0 the timer will be activated when a leading edge is produced at the TG4 input At that moment the timer status output T changes status T 1 and timing t starts from a value of 0 Once the time specified by the time constant has elapsed timing will be considered as having finished The time status output T changes status T 0 and the elapsed time will be kept as a timer time value T If before the time specified by the time constant has elapsed a trailing edge is produced in the trigger input TG4 the PLC will consider that the timing operation has concluded it will deactivate the
20. Avoid disturbances coming from the machine tool The machine tool must have decoupled all those elements capable of generating interference relay coils contactors motors etc DC relay coils Diode type 1N4000 AC relay coils RC connected as close to the coils as possible with approximate values of 220 1 W and C 0 2 pF 600 V AC motors RC connected between phases with values of R 300 6 W and C 0 47 uF 600 V Use the proper power supply Use an external regulated 24 Vdc power supply for the inputs and outputs Grounding of the power supply The zero volt point of the external power supply must be connected to the main ground point of the machine Analog inputs and outputs connection It is recommended to connect them using shielded cables and connecting their shields mesh to the corresponding pin O Ambient conditions The working temperature must be between 5 C and 40 C 41 F and 104 F The storage temperature must be between 25 C and 70 13 F and 158 F O Central unit enclosure 80551 CNC Guarantee the required gaps between the central unit and each wall of the enclosure Use a DC fan to improve enclosure ventilation O Power switch This power switch must be mounted in such a way that it is easily accessed and at a distance between 0 7 meters 27 5 inches and 1 7 meters 5 5ft off the floor Protections of the unit itself Central Unit It has a 4 A 250V e
21. 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x Do not open this unit Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may open this module Do not handle the connectors with the unit connected to mains Before doing it make sure that the unit is disconnected The machine manufacturer must comply with the EN 60204 1 204 1 standard in terms of protection against electrical shock due to faulty I O contacts with external power supply Hardware protections To know which is the axis board installed at the CNC refer to Diagnosis gt Configuration gt Hardware Board Hardware protections Axes2 board This Axes2 board includes the recognition of the 24V at the inputs and outputs The recognition of the 24 V is available from versions V9 1x mill model y and V10 1x lathe model on The Axes2 board is compatible with previous software versions it will not recognize the 24V at the inputs and outputs Signal adapters There are the following signal adapters SA TTL TTLD Adapter for Non differential TTL to differential TTL signals SA FS P Adapter for Fagor sinusoidal signals to Vpp signals meth CNC CONFIGURATION CNC structure FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x Technical characteristics of the feedback inputs Feedback inputs for the axes and spindle Power supply consumption of 5 V 1 A 250 mA per axis Work levels for differential square signal axes and spindle
22. 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 42 4 1 Parameters that may be modified from the OEM program or OEM subroutine Here is a list of the machine parameters that may be modified either from the oscilloscope or from an OEM program subroutine The variables associated with the machine parameters must be used to modify these parameters from an OEM program subroutine See 11 3 Variables associated with machine parameters on page 302 General machine parameters Parameter Number Update TLOOK P161 Beginning of program execution CODISET P147 Immediate Machine parameters of an axis Parameter Number Update BACKLASH P14 Immediate ACCTIME P18 Beginning of the next block INPOSW P19 Immediate MAXFLWE1 P21 Immediate MAXFLWE2 P22 Immediate PROGAIN P23 Immediate DERGAIN P24 Immediate FFGAIN P25 Immediate BAKANOUT P29 Immediate BAKTIME P30 Immediate REFDIREC P33 Immediate REFVALUE P36 Immediate MAXVOLT P37 Immediate GOOFEED P38 Beginning of the next block MAXFEED P42 Beginning of the next block JOGFEED 43 Beginning of the next block ACCTIME2 P59 Beginning of the next block PROGAIN2 P60 Immediate DERGAIN2 P61 Immediate FFGAIN2 P62 Immediate JERKLIM P67 Beginning of the next block FLIMIT P75 Beginning of the next block TORQDIST P78 Immediate PRELOAD P79 Immediate TPROGAIN P81 Immediate TINTTIME P82 Immediate TCOMPLIM P83 Immediate Spindle machine parameters Parameter Number Update
23. 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 242 CNC PLC COMMUNICATION The exchange of information between the CNC and the PLC allows The control of logic inputs and outputs from the CNC by means of an exchange of information between both systems which is done periodically and by means of specific PLC Marks and Registers The transfer from the CNC to the PLC of M S and T auxiliary functions Display screens which have been defined previously by the user as well as generating messages and errors in the CNC by means of specific PLC Marks Reading and writing internal CNC variables from the PLC Access to all PLC variables from any part program Monitoring on the CNC screen of PLC variables Access to all PLC variables from a computer via DNC through the RS 232 C serial line FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 243 CNC PLC COMMUNICATION Auxiliary M S T functions FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x T V12 1x 244 9 1 Auxiliary M S T functions MBCD1 R550 MBCD2 R551 MBCD3 R552 MBCD4 R553 MBCD5 R554 MBCD6 R555 MBCD7 R556 1 R565 MBCD2 R566 MBCD3 R567 MBCD4 R568 MBCDP5 R569 MBCD6 R570 MBCD7 R571 SBCD R557 MBCD resgisters correspond to the main channel whereas MBCDP registers are for the PLC channel The CNC tells the PLC by means of these 32 bit registers the miscellaneous M functions programmed in the blo
24. Axis logic inputs Spindle logic inputs Key inhibiting logic inputs Logic inputs of the PLC channel General logic outputs Axis logic outputs Spindle logic outputs Logic outputs of key status Logic inputs of the PLC channel FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 255 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS General logic inputs FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 256 10 1 General logic inputs These inputs must always be defined PLC program EMERGEN M5000 STOP M5001 FEEDHOL M5002 XFERINH M5003 EMERGEN M5000 There are to ways to cause an emergency at the CNC by activating the physical input Emergency stop pin 10 of connector X2 or the general logic input EMERGEN from the PLC When the PLC sets the EMERGEN input low OV the CNC stops the axes and the spindle and it displays the corresponding error message Also the CNC activates the EMERGENCY OUTPUT and ALARM signals to let the outside world and the PLC know that an emergency has occurred at the CNC The CNC does not allow executing programs and it aborts any attempt to move the axes or the spindle while the EMERGEN input is low OV When the PLC brings the EMERGEN input back high 24V the CNC deactivates the EMERGENCY OUTPUT ALARM signals to let the outside world and the PLC know that there is no longer an emergency at the CNC
25. Input 11 is the emergency input of the CNC and must be supplied with 24V Regardless of how it is treated by the PLC program this signal is processed directly by the CNC at all times Output is normally at 24V high logic level and it is set low OV whenever an ALARM or an ERROR occurs at the PLC output O1 FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x SOFT T V12 1x 333 131 Definition of symbols mnemonics It is a possible to associate a symbol name to any PLC resource It may have up to 8 characters so long as the name does not coincide with any of the reserved instructions It may not contain the following characters blank space equal sign parenthesis or comma or semi colon These symbols or names must always be defined at the beginning of the program Duplicate symbols are not allowed but one resource may have more than one symbol For better clarification the symbols used in this program are grouped by subjects Used in Basic and necessary programming DEF 1 11 External emergency input DEF I CONDI 170 Conditional mode The CNC interrupts part program execution when executing auxiliary function M01 DEF SERVO OK 171 The servo drives are O K DEF O EMERG O1 Emergency output It must be normally high PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE GO Definition of symbols mnemonics Used in Treatment of the axis travel limit switches DEF _ I LIMTX1 172 X axis positive overtravel li
26. Instruction P103 2 NBTOOL assigns the number of the tool currently being managed to parameter P103 Therefore P103 5 The message displayed by the CNC will be SELECT T5 AND PRESS CYCLE START Returns the program number being executed Should none be selected a value of 1 is returned It returns the label number of the last executed block It returns the status of functions GOO through G24 The status of each one of the functions will be given in the 25 least significant bits and it will be indicated by a 1 when active and a 0 when not active or when not available in the current software version ese om Toor ex CNCRD GGSA R110 M10 Loads register R110 with the status of functions GOO through G24 It returns the status of functions G25 through G49 The status of each one of the functions will be given in the 25 least significant bits and it will be indicated by a 1 when active and a 0 when not active or when not available in the current software version ees or ss s er ss It returns the status of functions G50 through G74 The status of each one of the functions will be given in the 25 least significant bits and it will be indicated by a 1 when active and a 0 when not active or when not available in the current software version renes sr ero ess es ss It returns the status of functions G75 through G99 The status of each one of the f
27. M4700 4955 Initializes PLC resources to low logic level 0 TG1 2 120000 Initializes the timer which controls the lubrication the machine ways on power up 3 This operation will be performed for 2 minutes 162 4 3600000 gt Initializes the timer which controls the amount of time the axes are moving before they iE are lubricated This lubrication lasts 5 minutes and it takes place after the axes have been moving for 1 hour END PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE GO FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 336 13 3 module PRG REA Basic and necessary programming En STOP Permission to execute the part program FEEDHOL Main module Permission to move the axes XFERINH Permission to execute the next block I EMERG AND rest of conditions EMERGEN PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE If the external emergency input is activated or any other emergency occurs the general logic input EMERGEN of the CNC When there is no emergency this signal must remain high ALARM AND CNCREADY O EMERG The emergency output O1 of the PLC O EMERG must be normally high If an alarm or emergency is detected at the ALARM ora problem was detected when powering the CNC up CNCREADY the emergency output O EMERG must be brought low I CONDI 015 When the operator selects the conditional mode I CONDI the CNC general logic
28. On axes with no distance coded feedback system The starts the movements of both axes in the direction indicated by a m p REFDIREC P33 of the main axis These movements will be performed at the feedrate indicated by a m p REFEED1 P34 for the main axis until the home switch for this axis is hit Then the home search will start on both axis at the feedrate indicated by a m p REFEED2 P35 of the main axis The CNC will wait until the marker pulse home of the slaved axis is found and then it will look for the marker pulse from the main axis If machine parameter IOTYPE S the home search procedure is the following The CNC starts the movements of both axes in the direction indicated by a m p REFDIREC P33 of the main axis These movements will be performed at the feedrate indicated by a m p REFEED1 P34 for the main axis until the home switch for this axis is hit It then moves back at REFEED2 until the home switch is released Once the contact has been released the CNC will wait until the marker pulse home of the slaved axis is found and then it will look for the marker pulse from the main axis This is done without changing the direction or the speed of the movement On axes with distance coded feedback system The CNC starts moving both axes in the direction indicated by a m p REFDIREC P33 for the main axis at the feedrate indicated by a m p REFEED2 P35 of the main axis The CNC will w
29. Once the cause of the error removed the CNC will execute all the new commands sent by the PLC To know from the PLC program whether any CNC error is active this information can be requested by accessing the internal CNC variable This variable indicates the error number being active at the CNC and if none is active it returns a 0 value An PLC execution channel AXES CONTROLLED FROM THE PLC FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 325 AXES CONTROLLED FROM THE PLC PLC execution channel FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 326 12 1 2 Blocks which can be executed from the PLC It is possible to execute blocks that contain G codes axis position values feedrates M functions and high level language programming Auxiliary functions S T and D cannot be programmed The ASCII block to be sent to the CNC by means of the action CNCEX to be executed in the PLC execution channel must be written in the CNC s own programming format Preparatory functions The preparatory functions which can be used in the PLC execution channel are the following G00 G01 G02 G03 G04 G04 K G05 G06 G07 G09 G16 G32 G50 G52 G53 G70 G71 G74 G75 G76 G90 G91 G92 G93 G94 G95 Rapid travers Linear interpolation Clockwise circular helical interpolation Counterclockwise circular helical interpolation Interrupt block preparation of the PLC channe
30. When executing an M function which has not been defined in the M table the programmed function will be executed at the beginning of the block and the CNC will wait for the AUXEND signal to continue the execution of the program 4 8 2 Leadscrew error compensation table The CNC provides a table for each one of the axes requiring leadscrew compensation The CNC will provide a table for each one of the axes having leadscrew compensation This type of compensation is selected by setting a m p LSCRWCOM P15 The number of elements of the table must be set by a m p NPOINTS P16 being possible to define up to 255 points per axis Different compensation values may be defined at each point for each moving direction 4 n X AXIS COMPENSATION OINT Tables MACHINE PARAMETERS lt gt lt o P o t o DX DK p i IKK KKK KKK DEDERE Each parameter of the table represents a point of the profile to compensate The following information is defined at each point The position occupied by the point in the profile position to compensate This position is defined by its coordinate referred to machine reference zero Possible values Within 99999 9999 mm or 3937 00787 inches The error of the leadscrew at that point when moving in the positive direction Possible values Within 99999 9999 mm or 3937 00787 inches The error of the leadscrew at that point when movi
31. assigns the value of local parameter P15 of nesting level 3 to register R100 ENCWR 0 15 M02 assigns the value of local parameter P15 of nesting level 2 to register R101 11 11 Operating mode related variables Read only variables related to the standard mode OPMODE It returns the code corresponding to the selected operating mode 0 Main menu h 10 Automatic execution 11 Single block execution 12 MDI in EXECUTION 13 Tool inspection 14 Repositioning 15 Block search executing G 16 Block search executing G M S T 20 Theoretical path simulation 21 G function simulation Operating mode related variables 22 G M S and T function simulation 23 Simulation with movement in the main plane 24 Simulation with rapid movement 25 Rapid simulation with S 0 ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES 30 Normal editing 31 User editing 32 TEACH IN editing 33 Interactive editor 40 Movement in continuous JOG 41 Movement in incremental JOG 42 Movement with electronic handwheel 43 HOME search in JOG 44 Position preset in JOG 45 Tool calibration 46 MDI in JOG 47 User JOG operation 50 Zero offset table 51 Tool offset table 52 Tool table FAGOR 53 Tool magazine table 54 Global parameter table 55 Local parameter table CNC 8035 56 User parameter table 57 OEM parameter table 60 Utilities SOF
32. 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 306 11 6 Variables associated with coordinates POS X C TPOS X C APOS X C ATPOS X C DPOS X C The values are given in the units set by g m p INCHES If INCHES 0 in ten thousandths of a millimeter 2999999999 If INCHES 1 in hundred thousandths of an inch 2393700787 If rotary axis in ten thousandths of a degree 999999999 Read only variables Accessing any of the variables POS X C TPOS X C APOS X C ATPOS X C DPOS X C or FLWE X C interrupts block preparation and the CNC waits for that command to be executed before resuming block preparation It returns the real tool base position value referred to machine reference zero home On limit less rotary axes this variable takes into account the value of the active zero offset The values of the variable are between the active zero offset and 360 ORG x 3609 If ORG 20 it displays between 20 and 380 displays between 340 and 209 If ORG 60 it displays between 60 and 300 displays between 420 and 60 At the lathe model CNC the coordinates of each axis are given as follows When read from the CNC they are given in radius or diameter depending on the active units system Check the DIAM variable to know the active units system When read from the PLC they are always given in radius It returns the theoretical position value real coordinate following error of the tool
33. 15 99999 IR 20 99999999 with 32 Eds its bits In these cases it is recommended to make the move increasing the number of bits by using if necessary registers or marks in intermediate steps Example 111 MOV 114 O16 108 If input 111 is 21 the PLC moves the logic states of the 8 inputs 114 plus the next 7 in BCD code to the 8 outputs O16 and the next 7 in binary code Action instruction PLC PROGRAMMING FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 237 Action instruction PLC PROGRAMMING FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 238 NGS ADS SBS MLS DVS MDS Complements the bits of a register It changes the state of each one of the 32 bits of a register Example 115 NGU R152 If input 115 is 1 the PLC changes the state of the 32 bits of register R152 R152 before 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 R152 after 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 Register sign change Example 116 NGS R89 If input 116 1 the PLC changes the sign of the contents of register R89 R89 before 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 R89 after 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1111 They may be used to carry out arithmetic operations such as addition ADS subtraction SBS multiplication MLS division DVS and module or remainder of a division MDS Its programming format is R1 559 R1 559 R1 559
34. 5 4 1 Counting speed limitation 5 4 2 PRESOIUTOM TE IEEE FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x T V12 1x FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 7 CHAPTER 8 5 5 Axis adjlistiment 5 5 1 Drive setting 5 5 2 Gain setting 5 5 3 Proportional gain setting nter titer rtr 5 5 4 Feed forward gain 5 5 5 Derivative AC forward gain setting 3 5 5 6 Leadscrew backlash compensation essere 5 5 7 Leadscrew error compensation 5 6 Reference f 5 6 1 Sarh m 5 6 2 Setting on systems without distance coded feedback T 5 6 3 Setting on systems with distance coded 5 6 4 Axis travel limits software limits 5 7 Unidirectional 5 8 Auxiliary M S T function transfer 5 8 1 Transferring S using the AUXEND 5 8 2 Transferring the auxiliary miscellaneous functions without the AUXEND signal 169 5 9 SOUS 5 9 1 Spindle types T 5 9 2 Spindle speed S contr
35. 66 ACTBAKAN P145 CODISET P147 COCYF1 P148 COCYF2 P149 COCYF3 P150 COCYFA P151 COCYFS P152 COCYF6 P153 COCYF7 P154 COCYZ P155 COCYPOS P156 COCYPROF P157 COCYGROO P158 COCYZPOS P159 Itis related to a m p BAKANOUT P29 and BAKTIME P30 additional analog pulse to recover the possible leadscrew backlash when reversing the movement This parameter has 16 bits counted from right to left bit 1514 131211109 8 76 54 3 2 1 0 mm m m m m m m m Each bit has a function or work mode associated with it By default all the bits will be assigned the value of 0 Assigning the value of 1 activates the corresponding function Bit Meaning Bit Meaning 0 Exponential backlash peak 8 1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 Apply the additional pulse with G2 G3 6 14 7 15 Default value in all the bits 0 Bit 0 Exponential backlash peak The additional command pulse used to make up for the possible leadscrew backlash in movement reversals may be rectangular or exponential This bit indicates whether itapplies a rectangular backlash peak bit 0 or an exponential backlash peak bit 1 gp qp ML If the duration of the rectangular pulse is adjusted for low speed it may be too high for high speed or not enough for low speed when adjusted for high speed In this cases it is recommended to use the exponential type that applies a strong pulse at the beginning and decr
36. CPUTIME P26 This parameter indicates the time the system CPU dedicates to the PLC Value Meaning 1 ms every 8 samplings 1 ms every 4 samplings 1 ms every 2 samplings 1 ms every sampling With LOOPTIME 4 5 or 6 2 ms every sampling With LOOPTIME 4 5 or 6 3 ms every sampling With LOOPTIME 5 or 6 4 ms every sampling With LOOPTIME 6 4 ms every sampling With LOOPTIME 6 Default value 0 NO oO 2 o nm o The sampling period is determined by the g m p LOOPTIME P72 Hence for a sampling period of 4 msec and a CPUTIME O the system CPU dedicates 1 millisecond every 8 samplings thus 32 milliseconds to the PLC The Status window of the PLC statistics screen indicates the time the system CPU dedicates to the PLC Refer to the operation manual pm M Y S M Same as with sinewave feedback number of axes and the user channel active the PLC demands calculation time from the system CPU The more time the CPU dedicates to the PLC the greater the sampling time will be g m p LOOPTIME P72 27 SRR700 P28 SRR739 P67 SWR800 P68 SWR819 P87 OCANSPE P88 IOCAGEN P89 IOCANID1 P90 IOCANID2 P91 IOCANID3 P92 IOCANID4 P93 ICAN1 P94 P95 2 P96 OCAN2 P97 P98 OCANS P99 4 100 P101 NUICAN1 P102 NUOCAN1 P103 NUICAN2 P104 NUOCAN2
37. Configuring the additive handwheel The parameter ADIMPG enables the additive handwheel and makes it possible to configure its operation Handwheel resolution and maximum feedrate The resolution of the additive handwheel depends on the setting of parameter ADIMPG P176 There are two options to set the resolution The resolution of the handwheel is set by parameter ADIMPRES P177 of the axis The handwheel resolution is set with the switch of the operator panel If the switch is not in the handwheel position it assumes a x1 factor Maximum feedrate allowed due to the additive handwheel is limited by parameter ADIFEED P84 Coordinates display Parameter DIPLCOF determines whether the CNC takes into consideration or not the additive zero offset when displaying the coordinates of the axes on the screen and when accessing the POS X C and TPOS X C variables CONCEPTS Movement with an electronic handwheel Ol FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 141 54 feedback system The various feedback inputs available at the CNC admit sinewave and squarewave differential signals from feedback systems The following axis machine parameters indicate the type of feedback system and the resolution utilized for each axis When using linear feedback devices PITCH P7 5 NPULSES 8 PE DIFFBACK P9 Be p 5 SINMAGNI P10 oO FBACKAL P11 Leadscrew pitch or that of the line
38. Emergency STOP gt 24V Other emergency STOP button buttons 0v Emergency from electrical cabinet gt Emergency output 5 Emergency STOP relay FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x SOFT T V12 1x O installation manual yndjno pue eui jo NOILO3NNOO YSMOd 3NIHOVIN 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x MACHINE PARAMETERS It is recommended to save the CNC machine parameters into the memkey card CARD A or in a peripheral or PC to avoid losing them On power up the CNC performs a system autotest and when this is over it displays the following screen e Report window The CNC allows the display of a previously defined screen instead of the Fagor logo Refer to the operation manual During the autotest if any error occurs its relevant message will be displayed in the report window The main menu for the various operating modes will appear at the bottom of the CRT These options will be selected using the softkeys F1 through F7 Since it is possible to have more than 7 options to choose from at one time use the softkey to display the rest of them Once the Machine Parameters operating mode has been selected the CNC shows the machine parameter tables that are saved in the memkey card CARD A FAGOR 8035 Sorr M
39. FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 275 The keys inhibited by register KEYDIS3 R502 depends on the CNC model available M or T model Inhibited key Inhibited key Register Register M model T model KEYDIS3 0 KEYDIS3 0 KEYDIS3 1 KEYDIS3 1 1 0 KEYDIS3 2 KEYDIS3 2 KEYDIS3 3 KEYDIS3 3 o Sg KEYDIS3 4 KEYDIS3 4 5 5 KEYDIS3 5 KEYDIS3 5 KEYDIS3 6 KEYDIS3 6 E KEYDIS3 7 KEYDIS3 7 2 2 KEYDIS3 8 KEYDIS3 8 3rd axis o 2 KEYDIS3 9 KEYDIS3 9 KEYDIS3 10 KEYDIS3 10 X 0 KEYDIS3 11 KEYDIS3 11 o 5 KEYDIS3 12 KEYDIS3 12 4th axis o KEYDIS3 13 override KEYDIS3 13 Spdl override B KEYDIS3 14 5 CW KEYDIS3 14 CW l KEYDIS3 START KEYDIS3 15 KEYDIS3 KEYDIS3 16 KEYDIS3 KEYDIS3 17 KEYDIS3 i KEYDIS3 18 Rapid feedrate KEYDIS3 KEYDIS3 19 Z KEYDIS3 KEYDIS3 KEYDIS3 KEYDIS3 KEYDIS3 KEYDIS3 Spdl stop KEYDIS3 KEYDIS3 KEYDIS3 24 KEYDIS3 3rd axis KEYDIS3 25 KEYDIS3 KEYDIS3 26 KEYDIS3 X KEYDIS3 27 KEYDIS3 KEYDIS3 28 KEYDIS3 4th axis KEYDIS3 29 Spdl override KEYDIS3 Spdl override KEYDIS3 Spdl CCW KEYDIS3 5 CCW KEYDIS3 STOP KEYDIS3 STOP e Bit 14 spdl CW corresponds to the key for starting the spindle clockwise e 30 5 CCW corresponds to the key for starting the spindle counterclockwise FAGOR 2 Bit 22 stop corresponds to the key for stopping the spindle CNC 8035 M V11 1x
40. Register Bit Handwheel x100 KEYBD4 Handwheel x10 Handwheel x1 Jog 10000 Jog 1000 Jog 100 Jog 10 Jog 1 Feedrate override 0 Feedrate override 2 Feedrate override 4 Feedrate override 10 Feedrate override 20 Feedrate override 30 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 Key pressed Feedrate override 60 Feedrate override 70 Feedrate override 80 Feedrate override 90 Feedrate override 100 Feedrate override 110 Feedrate override ACCESS TO THEINTERNALCNC VARIABLES The CNC has a number of internal variables that may be accessed from the user program from the PLC program or via DNC Depending on how they are used these variables may be read only or read write Reading and writing variables from the PLC The PLC provides two instructions actions which permit to read or modify the various internal variables of the CNC from the PLC Reading variables CNCRD command The CNCRD command allows reading the CNC s internal variables Its programming format is CNCRD Variable Register Mark This PLC action loads the contents of the indicated variable into the selected register If this instruction has been executed properly the PLC will assign a value of 0 to the indicated error detection mark and 1 if otherwise CNCRD FEED R150 M200 Itloads the value of the feedrate selected at the CNC when working in G94 into the P
41. When a program is in execution and the mark associated with an axis is activated it calculates the movement to be applied to that axis according to the resolution of the handwheel 10 3 Spindle logic inputs LIMIT S M5450 LIMIT S M5451 spindle The CNC uses this signal while searching home when the spindle changes to working in closed loop M19 The CNC only considers the signals for the currently selected spindle The PLC sets one of the signals high to tell the CNC that the spindle has overrun its range of travel in the positive or negative direction gt In this case the CNC stops axis feed and spindle rotation and displays the corresponding error on screen DECELS M5452 Main spindle The CNC uses this signal while searching home when the spindle changes to working in closed loop M19 The CNC only considers the signals for the currently selected spindle Spindle logic inputs The PLC sets this signal high to indicate to the CNC that the reference search switch is pressed When this signal is activated in the reference search mode the CNC decelerates the spindle changing the rapid approach speed indicated by the s m p REFEED1 P34 with the slow feedrate indicated by the s m p REFEED2 P35 After decelerating it accepts the following reference signal from the spindle feedback systems as being valid LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS SPDLEINH M5453 Main spindle The CNC considers th
42. 25 Handwheel associated with V Parameters MPG1 correspond to the first handwheel MPG2 to the second one and MPG3 to the third one The CNC uses the following order to know which one is the first second and third handwheel X Y Z U V W A B C The meaning of parameters MPG CHG MPG RES and MPG NPUL is similar to the meaning of parameters MPGCHG P80 MPGRES P81 and MPGNPUL P82 It indicates the configuration being used Possible values 250 Default value 0 Keyboard auto identification The keyboard has an auto identification system that updates this parameter automatically a a auto identification system of the keyboards is recognized from versions V9 11 and V10 11 on If an auto identifying keyboard is connected to a CNC that has an older software version the keyboard will beep In this case disable the auto identification hardware of the keyboard by setting the identification switch to zero Not being used Not being used Not being used P96 XDATA1 P97 XDATA2 P98 P99 XDATA4 P100 XDATAS P101 XDATA6 P102 XDATA7 P103 XDATA8 P104 XDATAQ P105 PRODEL P106 MAINOFFS P107 Not being used The CNC takes this parameter into account when probing functions G75 and G76 When the digital probe communicates with the CNC via infrared beams there could be some delay milliseconds from the time th
43. 3 If there is no PLC PRG in memory it looks for it in the memkey card CARD A If itis there it compiles it COMPILE and executes it RUN If it is not there it does nothing Later on No COMPILE Y when accessing the Jog mode Execution mode UN etc the CNC will issue the corresponding error message Once the program has been compiled it is not necessary to keep the source program PLC PRG in memory because the PLC always executes the executable program The PLC has 512 inputs and 512 outputs Some of them depending on the CNC configuration communicate with external devices There is an exchange of information between the CNC and the PLC which is done automatically and the system has a series of commands which allow the following to be done quickly and simply FAGOR The control of Logic CNC inputs outputs by means of an exchange of information between both systems CNC 8035 The transfer from the CNC to the PLC of M S and T auxiliary functions To display a screen previously defined by the user as well as generating messages and errors in the CNC Reading and writing internal CNC variables from the PLC Sorr M V11 1x Access to all PLC variables from any part program SOFT T V12 1x Monitoring on the CNC screen of PLC variables Access to all PLC variables from a computer via DNC and through the RS 232 C serial line 195 PLC Resources INTRODUCTION TO THE PLC FAG
44. 9 keys O O installation manual Options It shows a screen where one can select to display either all the parameters and variables or just the ones than can be modified Press the Modify Option softkey to change it and ENTER to validate it This option is common to all the axes gt Drive parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x SOFT T V12 1x 111 Serial line parameters FAGOR 2 8035 M V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 112 4 6 Serial line parameters BAUDRATE NBITSCHR P1 PARITY P2 STOPBITS P3 PROTOCOL P4 PWONDNC P5 Indicates the communication speed in baud between the CNC and the peripherals It is given in baud and it is selected with the following code Value Meaning Value Meaning 0 110 baud 7 9 600 baud 1 150 baud 8 19 200 baud 2 300 baud 9 38 400 baud 3 600 baud 10 57 600 baud 4 1 200 baud 11 115 200 baud 5 2 400 baud 12 Reserved 6 4 800 baud Default value 11 115200 baud Indicates the number of data bits per transmitted character Value Meaning 0 Uses the 7 least significant bits of an 8 bit character It is used when transmitting ASCII characters standard 1 Uses all 8 bits of the transmitting character Used when transmitting special characters whose codes are greater than 127 Default value 1 Indicates the type of parity check used Va
45. CNCRD CNCRD Variable R1 559 M1 4955 Read internal CNC variables CNCWR CNCWR R1 559 Variable M1 5957 Write internal CNC variables PAR PAR R1 559 1 5957 Parity of register 1 512 1 512 1 512 1 512 1 5957 1 5957 1 256 1 256 1 256 1 256 1 559 1 559 SUMMARY OF PLC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS GENERAL LOGIC INPUTS EMERGEN STOP FEEDHOL XFERINH CYSTART SBLOCK MANRAPID OVRCAN LATCHM ACTGAIN2 RESETIN AUXEND TIMERON TREJECT PANELOFF PLCABORT PLCREADY INT1 INT2 INT3 INT4 BLKSKIP1 BLKSKIP2 BLKSKIP3 15 ACTLM2 HNLINARC MASTRHND EXRAPID FLIMITAC SLIMITAC BLOABOR M5000 M5001 M5002 M5003 M5007 M5008 M5009 M5010 M5011 5013 5015 5016 5017 M5018 M5019 M5022 M5023 M5024 M5025 M5026 M5027 M5028 M5029 M5030 M5031 M5051 M5052 M5053 M5054 M5057 M5058 M5059 M5060 Stops the axes and the spindle Displays the error Stops execution of the part program maintaining spindle rotation Stops axis feed momentarily maintaining spindle rotation Prevents the next block from being executed but finishes the one being executed Starts program execution The CNC changes to single block execution mode Selects rapid travel for all the movements that are executed in JOG mode Selects feedrate override at 100 The axes will move from the moment the corresponding JOG key is pressed until the STOP key is pressed Indicates that the CNC as
46. Example I EMERG AND rest of conditions EMERGEN If the external emergency input is activated or any other emergency occurs the general logic input EMERGEN of the CNC When there is no emergency this signal must remain high STOP M5001 FEEDHOL M5002 XFERINH M5003 CYSTART M5007 When the PLC sets this signal low the CNC stops the part program and maintains spindle rotation In order to continue executing the program as well as setting this signal at a high logic level the general logic input CYSTART must be activated The treatment which this STOP signal receives is similar to that given to the STOP key on the CNC front panel keeping all the keys enabled even when the STOP signal is at low logic level 0 Example STOP There is always permission to execute the part program When the PLC sets this signal low the CNC stops the axes maintaining spindle rotation When the signal returns to the high logic level the movement of the axes continues If the FEEDHOL signal is activated OV in a block without motion the CNC will continue the execution of the program until detecting a block with motion Example FEEDHOL There is always permission to move the axes If the PLC sets this signal low the CNC prevents the following block from starting but finishes the one it is executing When the signal returns to high logic level the CNC continues to execute the program Example XFER
47. In all other cases the active zero offset will be maintained and the CNC will display the position value with respect to the zero offset or part zero active before the home search On axes with no distance coded feedback system The will move all selected axes which have a home switch and in the direction indicated by a m p REFDIREC P33 for each axis This movement will be carried out at the feedrate established by a m p REFEED1 P34 for each axis until the home switch is hit Once all the axes have reached their respective home switches the machine reference search marker pulse will be performed moving the selected axes one by one and in the selected sequence This second movement will be carried out atthe feedrate established by a m p REFEED2 P35 for each axis until the marker pulse is found If machine parameter IOTYPE P52 3 the home search procedure is the following The CNC will move all selected axes which have a home switch and in the direction indicated by a m p REFDIREC P33 for each axis This movement will be carried out at the feedrate established by a m p REFEED1 P34 for each axis until the home switch is hit Once all the axes have reached their respective home switches the axes move back one ata time in the selected order and at REFEED2 until the switch is released Once it has released it it will recognize the first reference mark found without changing either its moving dire
48. It is given in D A converter units and it admits integer values between 0 and 32767 which corresponds to an analog voltage of 10V Default value 0 not applied Additional analog voltage BAKANOUT Every time the movement is inverted the CNC will apply to that axis the velocity command corresponding to the movement plus the additional velocity command pulse set in this parameter This additional analog voltage will be applied for a period of time indicated in the a m p BAKTIME P30 It indicates the duration of the additional velocity command pulse to make up for backlash in movement reversals Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 Indicates whether or not this axis has a home switch for machine reference search Value Meaning NO It has no home switch YES It has a home switch Default value YES It indicates the type of flank of the 10 signal that is used for home search Value Meaning sign Positive flank leading edge change from to 5V sign Negative flank trailing edge change from 5V to OV Default value sign Indicates the direction of the home search in this axis Value Meaning sign Positive direction sign Negative direction Default value sign Indicates the axis feedrate when searching home until it hits the home switch Possible values Between 0 0001 and 199999 9999 degrees min or mm min Between 0 00001 inches min and
49. MAXGEAR1 P2 Beginning of the next block MAXGEAR2 P3 Beginning of the next block MAXGEAR3 P4 Beginning of the next block MAXGEAR4 P5 Beginning of the next block ACCTIME P18 Beginning of the next block INPOSW P19 Immediate gt PROGAIN P23 Immediate DERGAIN P24 Immediate FFGAIN P25 Immediate subroutine REFDIREC P33 Immediate REFVALUE P36 Immediate MAXVOLT1 P37 Immediate MAXVOLT2 P38 Immediate MACHINE PARAMETERS Parameters that may be modified from the OEM program or OEM MAXVOLT3 P39 Immediate MAXVOLT4 P40 Immediate OPLACETI P45 Immediate ACCTIME2 P47 Beginning of the next block PROGAIN2 P48 Immediate DERGAIN2 P49 Immediate FFGAIN2 P50 Immediate SLIMIT P66 Immediate JERKLIM P80 Beginning of the next block A modification in the MAXGEAR 1 4 parameters sets the square corner mode even if a round corner has been programmed FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 43 4 2 General machine parameters AXIS1 PO They permit associating axes handwheels spindles or live tools with each feedback AXIS2 P1 input and analog output according to the following code AXISS3 P2 AXISA P3 Value Meaning Value Meaning AXIS5 P4 0 Free not associated 12 Handwheel with axis AXIS6 P5 selector button AXIS7 P6 4 AXIS8 P7 X axis 13 14 2 21 Handwheel associated o la with lu z 4 U axis 22 Handwheel associated 2 a with Y 5 V axis 23
50. T V12 1x 276 Register KEYDIS4 disables the positions the feedrate override switch feedrate 96 Inhibited key selector KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 Inhibited key Register Bit Handwheel x100 KEYDIS4 Handwheel x10 Handwheel x1 Jog 10000 Jog 1000 Jog 100 Jog 10 Jog 1 Feedrate override 096 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 Feedrate override 60 Feedrate override 70 Feedrate override 80 Feedrate override 90 Feedrate override 100 Feedrate override 110 Feedrate override 2 Feedrate override 4 Feedrate override 10 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 Feedrate override Key inhibiting logic inputs Feedrate override 20 Feedrate override 30 KEYDIS4 KEYDIS4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Should one of the inhibited positions of the feedrate override switch be selected the CNC will take the value corresponding to the nearest uninhibited position below it If all of them are inhibited the lowest will be taken 0 For example if only positions 110 and 120 of the switch are allowed and position 50 is selected the CNC will take a value of 0 FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 277 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Logic inputs of the PLC chann
51. the axes LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 289 10 8 Spindle logic outputs ENABLES M5950 spindle This signal is used when working with the spindle in closed loop M19 The CNC only considers the signals for the currently selected spindle The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC to allow the spindle to move DIRS M5951 Main spindle This signal is used when working with the spindle in closed loop M19 The CNC only considers the signals for the currently selected spindle The CNC uses this signal to tell the PLC in which direction the spindle is moving If the signal is at a high logic level this indicates that the spindle moves in a negative direction If the signal is low this indicates that the spindle moves in a positive direction Spindle logic outputs REFPOINS M5952 Main spindle This signal is used when working with the spindle in closed loop M19 The CNC only considers the signals for the currently selected spindle LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the spindle reference point search has already been made This is set low when the CNC is powered up after executing the SHIFT RESET sequence or a feedback alarm occurs due to loss of count and every time a change is made from closed loop M19 to open loop DRSTAFS M5953 DRSTASS M5954 Main spindle The CNC uses t
52. 512 inputs 512 outputs 2047 user marks 256 32 bit registers 256 32 bit counters 256 32 bit timers 5V probe input Typical value 0 25 mA Vin 5V High threshold logic level 1 from 42 4 up Low threshold logic level 0 VIL Below 0 9 Vdc Maximum nominal voltage Vimax 15 Vcc 24V probe input Typical value 0 30 mA Vin 24V High threshold logic level 1 VIH from 12 5 Vdc up Low threshold logic level 0 VIL Below 4 Vdc Maximum nominal voltage Vimax 35 Vcc Digital inputs Nominal voltage 24 Vdc Maximum nominal voltage 30 Vdc Minimum nominal voltage 18 Vdc High threshold logic level 1 VIH from 18 Vdc up Low threshold logic level 0 VIL Under 5 Vdc or not connected Typical consumption of each input 5 mA Maximum consumption of each input 7 mA Protection by means of galvanic isolation by optocouplers Protection against reverse connection up to 30 Vdc Digital outputs Nominal supply voltage 24 Vdc Maximum nominal voltage 30 Vdc Minimum nominal voltage 18 Vdc Output voltage Vout Supply voltage Vdc 3 V Maximum output current 100 mA Protection by means of galvanic isolation by optocouplers Shortcircuit protection Place external recovery diodes Analog outputs for axes and spindle Command voltage within 10 V 16 bit solution Minimum impedance of the connected connector 10 Shielded cable should be used Ambient conditions R
53. 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 371 O installation manual APPENDIX 2 digit BCD code output conversion table FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x O O installation manual KEY CODES Alphanumeric operator panel M T models 65 66 67 68 69 70 0 71 72 73 74 75 76 It 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 APPENDIX Key codes 89 90 91 32 z 120 121 122 65454 65456 65460 a 38 64512 22 22 64817 22 65458 65455 524 p 65522 65524 027 61446 013 61447 61452 61443 65523 ia esa 65520 FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x SOFT T V12 1x O installation manual APPENDIX Key codes FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x LOGIC OUTPUTS KEY STATUS Alphanumeric operator panel M T models B6 R563 B5 R563 B4 R563 B3 R563 B2 R563 B1 R563 B8 R562 B9 R562 Bo R562 R562 B14 R561 B10 B25 R562 R562 23 B24 R562 R562 B26 R562 B2 R562 B7 R561 B3 R562 B6 R
54. CDW inputs it being necessary to assign CEN 1 for the counter to take notice of these inputs 23 Counters PLC RESOURCES FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 223 O installation manual Counters PLC RESOURCES FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x PLC PROGRAMMING The PLC program is structured by modules and it may consist of Main module PRG Periodic execution module PE First cycle module CY1 Every time the PLC program starts running the CNC will execute first if it has been defined the First Cycle module CY1 Then it will execute the Main Program module PRG continuously until the PLC program is stopped The periodic execution modules PE will be executed every so often with the frequency established for each of them This time period starts counting from the time the CY1 cycle is ended The execution of a periodic module temporarily interrupts the execution of the main module When defining the PLC program both the processing of the main module PRG and the periodic modules PE must be taken into consideration The main module PRG will be processed cyclically See 6 2 PLC program execution on page 197 The periodic module is optional and it is executed every so often as indicated by the directing instruction defining the module It is used to process certain critical inputs and outputs which cannot be properly evaluated with
55. Default value 0 If set to 0 FO may be programmed and the motion blocks will be executed at the maximum feedrate allowed If set to 0 it is not possible to program FO or execute motion blocks with FO active Cartesian axis associated with the incline axis Value Meaning Value Meaning 0 None 5 V axis 1 X axis 6 W axis 2 Y axis 7 A axis 3 Z axis 8 B axis 4 U axis 9 C axis Default value 0 none With the angular transformation of an incline axis it is possible to make movements along an axis that is not perpendicular to anoher In order to program it in the Cartesian system Z X activate the incline axis transformation to convert the movements to the non perpendicular real axes Z X X H X 60 ANGAXNA X p ORTAXNA 2 ANGANTR 60 PN 2 OFFANGAX The axes defined in parameters ANGAXNA and ORTAXNA must exist and must be linear Those axes may have Gantry axes associated with them While searching home the movements are carried out on the incline axes of the machine PLC mark MACHMOVE determines how the manual movements with handwheels or with the keyboard will be carried out The incline plane is activated from the part program function G46 If the incline plane is active the displayed coordinates will be those of the Cartesian system Otherwise it will display the coordinates of the real axes ORTAXNA P172 Axis perpendicular to the Cartesian axis as
56. M FUNCTIONS SETTING CHART Associated subroutine Setting bits APPENDIX M functions setting chart AN m FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 385 O installation manual APPENDIX M functions setting chart FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x LEADSCREW ERROR COMPENSATION TABLE Axis Axis Position i Position Error Axis APPENDIX Leadscrew error compensation table re FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 387 O installation manual APPENDIX Leadscrew error compensation table FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x CROSS COMPENSATION TABLE MOVAXIS Axis to be compensated COMPAXIS Moving axis P33 Error a lt Q9 5 2 t c 2 o 9 O E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 389 O installation manual APPENDIX Cross compensation table FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x N MAINTENANCE Cleaning The dirt accumulated in the unit could act as a layer that hampers the dissipation of the heat generated by the internal electronic circuitry with the risk of overheating and damaging the CNC Also accumulated dirt To clean the operator panel and the monitor s front panel
57. MSGFILE P131 FLWEDIFA P132 RETRACAC P133 G15SUB P134 TYPCROSS P135 Number of the program that contains the OEM texts in several languages By default the sets this parameter to 0 there is no program If programmed with a value of 0 the texts defined by the OEM are in a single language and stored in several programs PLCMSG Texts for PLC messages PLCERR Texts for PLC errors The MSGFILE program may be in user memory or in the memkey card If it is in both places it takes the one in user memory Not being used It indicates whether retracing is allowed or not Value Meaning 0 It is not permitted 1 It is permitted The withdrawal stops at the M functions 2 It is permitted The withdrawal does not stop at the M functions Default value 0 If RETRACAC 2 only the MO is executed the rest of the M functions are not sent out to the PLC it neither executes them nor interrupts the withdrawal The CYCLE START key must be pressed after executing MO Retracing is activated and deactivated with the RETRACE M5051 signal If while executing a part program the PLC sets this signal high the CNC interrupts the execution of the program and starts executing backwards what has executed so far When the PLC sets the RETRACE signal back low and retracing is canceled The CNC starts executing forward what was done backwards and it will go on to execute the part of the program that was not mac
58. Monitor set has a three prong male Phoenix connector with a 7 62 mm pitch Use an independent external power supply with the following specifications Nominal voltage 20 V minimum 30 V maximum Ripple 4 Nominal current 2A Current peak on power up 8A The central unit has a protection against overvoltage that activates at 36 V FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 27 MACHINE AND POWER CONNECTION FAGOR 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 28 The supply current has the following shape on power up Machine connection The machine tool must have decoupled all those elements capable of generating interference relay coils contactors motors etc DC relay coils Diode type 1N4000 AC relay coils RC connected as close as possible to the coils Their approximate values should be 220 0 1W 0 2 pF 600 V AC motors RC connected between phases with values R3000 6W 0 47 uF 600 V Ground connection It is imperative to carry out a proper ground connection in order to achieve Protection of anybody against electrical shocks caused by a malfunction Protection of the electronic equipment against interference generated by the proper machine or by other electronic equipment near by which could cause erratic equipment behavior Thus it is essential to connect all metallic parts to a point and it to ground in order to achieve
59. New tool radius compensation methods Axis parameters that may be modified from OEM subroutine program REFVALUE REFDIREC FLIMIT Spindle parameters that may be modified from OEM subroutine program REFVALUE REFDIREC SLIMIT Variables DNCSTA DNC communication status TIMEG Status of the timer count programmed with G4 HANDSE Handwheel s axis selector button pressed ANAI n Value of the analog inputs APOS X C Real coordinates of the tool base referred to part zero ATPOS X C Theoretical coordinates of the tool base referred to part zero INST PRG Retracing function If RETRACAC 2 the retrace function does not stop at the M functions The RETRACAC parameter is initialized with SHIFT RESET The number of blocks being retraced has been increased to 75 When activating tool radius compensation in the first motion block even if there is no movement of the plane axes INST Manual intervention with additive handwheel INST OPT G46 Maintain G46 when the home search does not involve any axis of the angular transformation INST PRG MEXEC Execute a modal part program PRG Up to 319 G functions now available PRG The simulations without axis movement ignore the G4 OPT Maintain the feedrate selected in simulation Software V9 12 OPT February 2005 List of features Manual Look ahead INST PRG Software V09 13 List of features Hirth
60. PLCCNTL M5465 high to let the CNC know that from this moment on the PLC is the one setting the analog voltage for the spindle 2 From this instant on the CNC outputs the spindle analog voltage indicated by the PLC at CNC logic input SANALOG R504 If the PLC changes the value of the SANALOG input the CNC will update the analog voltage accordingly 3 Once the operation has concluded the CNC must recover the control of the spindle back from the PLC To do this CNC logic input PLCCNTL M5465 must be set low again Once the requested gear change is completed the PLC must set the corresponding logic input GEAR1 M5458 GEAR2 M5459 GEAR3 M5460 or GEAR4 M5461 high Finally the PLC will reactivate CNC general logic input AUXEND M5016 indicating to the CNC that it has finished executing the auxiliary function Automatic gear change when working with M19 Every time M19 is programmed it is recommended that the corresponding spindle gear be selected If no gear is already selected the CNC proceeds as follows It converts the speed indicated in degrees per minute ats m p REFEED1 P34 into rpm It selects the spingle gear corresponding to those rpm The spindle gear cannot be changed when operating in M19 The gear must be selected beforehand 5 9 4 Spindle in closed loop In order for the spindle to operate in closed loop by means of spindle orientation M19 the following conditions mu
61. Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 If assigned a value smaller than the real one the machine will vibrate and if assigned a value greater than the real one the machining slows down The value of this parameter may be calculated as follows 1 Execute in G91 and G51 0 1 a program made up of lots of blocks at least 1000 with very short moves for example X0 1 YO 1 20 1 2 Measure the program execution time making sure that the machine does not vibrate Divide the execution time by the number of blocks executed and assigned the resulting value in microseconds to this parameter 3 To optimize the parameter decrease the calculated value and execute the same program until the machine starts vibrating To avoid damaging the machine it is recommended to start the execution with the feedrate override switch low and increase its value gradually 4 We recommend the use of the oscilloscope function and verify that the internal variable VLOOKR remains constant which means that there is no vibration From the oscilloscope it is possible to change the value of parameter TLOOK but the new value is only assumed when executing function G51 from the program Not being used Not being used Y MACHINE PARAMETERS General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 67 4 General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8
62. Protection ground for safety FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x SOFT T V12 1x Digital inputs and outputs MACHINE AND POWER CONNECTION FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 30 3 14 Digital inputs and outputs N Digital outputs The CNC system offers a number of optocoupled digital PLC outputs which can be used to activate relays deacons etc The electrical characteristics of these outputs are Nominal voltage value 24 Maximum voltage value 30 V Minimum voltage value 18 V Output voltage 2 V less than the supply voltage Maximum output current 100 mA All outputs are protected by means of Galvanic isolation by optocouplers The CNC has protection against short circuits overvoltage of the external power supply over 33 Vdc and against reverse connection of the power supply up to 30 Digital inputs The digital PLC inputs offered by the CNC system are used to read external devices etc The electrical characteristics of these inputs are Nominal voltage value 24 Vdc Maximum voltage value 30 Vdc Minimum voltage value 18 High threshold voltage logic level 1 from 18 V up Low threshold voltage logic level 0 Under 5 V Typical consumption for each input 5 mA Maximum consumption for each input 7 mA All inputs are protected by means of Galvanic isolation by optocouplers Protection against reversal of power supply
63. REFPOINS INPOS3 for the Z axis Mnemonics using the axis name The mnemonics of the signals refer to the axis name Mnemonics with axis names offer the advantage that if an axis is eliminated the PLC program will still be consistent with the rest of the axes FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 287 ENABLE1 M5600 ENABLE2 M5650 ENABLES3 M5700 The CNC sets these signals at a high logic level to tell the PLC to allow the corresponding axis to move DIR1 M5601 DIR2 M5651 DIR3 M5701 The CNC uses these signals to tell the PLC in which direction the axes move If the signal is high this indicates that the corresponding axis moves in a negative direction If the signal is low this indicates that the corresponding axis moves in a positive direction REFPOIN1 M5602 REFPOIN2 M5652 REFPOIN3 M5702 The CNC sets these signals high to tell the PLC that the machine reference search has been made already The CNC forces a home search on an axis by setting its mark low The marks are set low in the following instances Logic outputs of the axes On power up e After executing the sequence SHIFT RESET When the feedback is direct through the axes board and a feedback alarm occurs LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS When modifying certain machine parameters for example number of axes In all these cases a home search must be carried out so the signal is set back high
64. Shield CNC 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 13 Connector 8 For connecting the outputs for the velocity command of the axes 9 pin normal density SUB D type female connector Pin Signal and function Chassis Shield Cons 1 Velocity command output for the first axis Cons 2 Velocity command output for the second axis Cons Velocity command output for the third axis Cons 4 Not being used Analog voltage reference signals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 The cable shield must be connected to the metallic hood at each end CNC structure The axis nomenclature is set when setting machine parameters 1 PO to AXIS4 P3 CNC CONFIGURATION FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 14 Connector X9 Digital inputs 165 to 188 It is a 37 pin normal density SUB D type male connector Connect the OV of the power supply used for these inputs to pins 18 and 19 for OV of the connector All shields must only be connected to ground at the CNC end through pin 37 of the connector leaving the other end free The wires of the shielded cables cannot be unshielded for more than 75mm about 3 inches Signal and function 165 167 External power supply External power supply ci nx zx cu o Ola nr on jol ON amp m m m O gt 0 o jo 2 0 80 5 0 30 20 o 0000000000000000000
65. Sorr T V12 1x PROBE CONNECTION The CNC has two probe inputs of 5Vdc and 24Vdc at connector X3 Depending on the type of connection applied the g m p PRBPULSE P39 must be set indicating whether it operates with the leading edge or trailing edge of the signal which the probe provides Probe with normally open contact output Active high with an up flank APPENDIX Probe connection Active low with a down flank tj The active flank depends on the interface FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 353 O installation manual APPENDIX Probe connection FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x SUMMARY OF INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES The symbol indicates that the variable can be read The W symbol indicates that the variable can be modified Variables associated with tools Variable CNC PLC DNC section 11 1 C TOOL R R R Number of the active tool Number of active tool offset NXTOOL Number of the next requested tool waiting for MO6 NXTOD Number of the next tool s offset S TMZPn n tool s position in the tool magazine TLFDn n tool s offset number 5 2 TLFFn n tool s family code 5 TLFNn Nominal life assigned to tool n B TLFRn Real life value of tool n TMZTn Contents of tool magazine position n 2 Tool radius being used by the CNC to do the calcul
66. The corresponding CNC logic input GEAR1 GEAR2 must be activated to confirm the gear change Lubrication of the machine ways In this example the machine axes are lubricated in the following instances On machine power up For 2 minutes When requesting a manual lubrication For 5 minutes After the axes have been moving for 1 hour For 5 minutes Afteran axis has travelled a specific distance since last lubricated For 4 minutes Lubrication on machine power up This operation will be performed for 2 minutes Whenever the machine is powered up the PLC program starts running Therefore the first cycle module CY1 must activate timer T2 in the mono stable mode for 2 minutes 120000 milliseconds TG1 2 120000 Manual lubrication This operation will last 5 minutes and it will be performed at operator s request DFU I LUBING TG1 3 300000 Whenever the operator requests the lubricating lubing operation T3 must be activated in the mono stable mode for 5 minutes 300000 milliseconds Lubrication every hour of axis motion This operation takes place when the axes of the machine have been moving for an accumulated time period of 1 hour They will be lubricated for 5 minutes Timer T4 is used to keep track of the axis accumulated moving time and T5 to time the 5 minute lubrication period The first cycle module CY1 must activate timer T4 in the delayed activation mode with a time constant of 1 hour 3600
67. Value Meaning 0 10 V analog output 1 2 digit BCD coded S output 2 8 digit BCD coded S output Default value 0 Indicates the display format for the spindle Value Meaning 0 In 4 digits 1 In 5 digits 2 In 4 3 format 3 In 5 3 format 4 It is not displayed Default value 0 They indicate the maximum spindle speed assigned to each gear When using an automatic gear change these values will be used to make the change MAXGEAR1 for gear 1 M41 MAXGEAR2 for gear 2 M42 MAXGEAR3 for gear 3 M43 MAXGEAR4 for gear 4 M44 Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 rpm Default value For MAXGEAR 1 P2 1000 rpm For 2 2000 rpm For MAXGEARS P4 3000 rpm For 4 P5 4000 rpm When not using all 4 gears use the lower ones and set the unused ones to the same value as the highest one used Indicates whether the gear change is generated automatically or not by the CNC activating the M functions M41 M42 M43 and M44 Value Meaning NO There is no automatic gear change YES There is automatic gear change Default value NO Indicates the sign of the spindle analog for MO3 and M04 Value Meaning sign Positive analog sign Negative analog Default value For POLARMS P7 sign For POLARM4 P8 sign Ifthe same value is assigned to both parameters the CNC will output a single polarity to 10V signal with the indicated si
68. a soft cloth should be used soaked in de ionized water and home non abrasive dishwasher soap liquid never powder or with 75 alcohol Do not use air at high pressure to clean the unit because it could cause grease to accumulate which in turn may cause electrostatic discharges The plastics used on the front panel of the units are resistant to Grease and mineral oil Bases and bleach Dissolved detergents Alcohol m X e Na Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any material or physical damage derived from the violation of these basic safety requirements To check the fuses first unplug the unit from mains If the CNC does not turn on when flipping the power switch check that the fuses are the right ones and they are in good condition Avoid solvents The action of solvents such as chlorine hydrocarbons benzole esters and ether may damage the plastics used to make the front panel of the unit Do not open this unit Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may open this unit Do not handle the connectors with the unit connected to mains Before manipulating the connectors inputs outputs feedback etc make sure that the unit is not connected to AC power APPENDIX Maintenance FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 391 O installation manual
69. and the CNC will wait for the general logic input AUXEND to the activated to consider the execution completed 9 2 Auxiliary T function transfer Every time a block is executed in the CNC information is passed to the PLC about the M S and T functions which are active M function The CNC analyzes the M functions programmed in the block and in accordance with how these are defined will send these to the PLC before and or after the movement To do this it uses variables MBCD1 to MBCD7 R550 to R556 and activates the general logic output MSTROBE to indicate to the PLC that it must execute them Depending on how these functions are defined on the table the CNC must wait or not for the general input AUXEND to be activated to consider the execution completed S function CNC PLC COMMUNICATION Auxiliary M S T function transfer O S function has been programmed and the spindle has BCD input the CNC will send this value to the variable SBCD R557 and will activate the general logic output SSTROBE to indicate to the PLC that it must be executed This transmission is made at the beginning of the block execution and the CNC will wait for the general input AUXEND to be activated to consider the execution completed T function The CNC will indicate via the variable TBCD R558 the T function which has been programmed in the block and activates the general logic output TS
70. gt It defines the derivative of the acceleration It may be used to limit the acceleration changes to smooth the machine movements on small speed increments or decrements and with FFGAIN values close to 100 The CNC ignores this parameter when moving with electronic handwheels mechanical handwheels look ahead threading G33 and rigid tapping The smaller the value assigned to JERKLIM the smoother the machine s response but the acc dec time will be longer When increasing the value of JERKLIM it decreases the acc dec time but the machine response worsens Possible values Between 0 and 99999 9999 m s Default value 0 Recommended values gt Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 89 4 Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sort M V11 1x T V12 1x 90 IOCODI P68 IOCODI2 P69 ORDER P70 In millimeters JERKLIM 82 GOOFEED ACCTIME 2 In inches JERKLIM 2082 GOOFEED ACCTIME 2 Use parameter ACCTIME2 when adjusting the second set of parameters Ifthe stability ofthe machine is affected by the values mentioned earlier the JERKLIM value should be lowered to half as much The CNC takes this parameter into account when a m p IOTYPE P52 has been set with a value other than 0 Parameter IOCODD1 P68 indicates the gap between 2 fixed distance coded 105 and parameter IOCODD2 P69 indica
71. it activates the general logic output MSTROBE to tell the PLC to go ahead with their execution Should any of them need the AUXEND activated the CNC will wait for this signal to be activated before going on to executing the rest of the block If none of them need the AUXEND signal activated the CNC will maintain the MSTROBE signal activated for a period of time set by the general machine parameter MINAENDW P30 This output stays active for the time indicated by g m p MINAENDW P30 2 The programmed axis move will be executed 3 It sends out to the PLC the 3 M functions programmed to be executed after the move It sets logic outputs 1 61 MBCD2 62 63 and it activates the general logic output MSTROBE to the PLC to go ahead with their execution Should any of them need the AUXEND activated the CNC will wait for this signal to be activated before going on to executing the rest of the block If none of them need the AUXEND signal activated the CNC will maintain the MSTROBE signal activated for a period of time set by the general machine parameter MINAENDW P30 This output stays active for the time indicated by g m p MINAENDW P30 Example 2 Execution of a motionless block containing 7 M functions 4 of which are executed before the axes move M51 M52 M53 M54 and 3 afterwards M61 M62 M63 1 It sends out to the PLC the 4 M functions program
72. the CNC selects rapid feed for all the movements executed in JOG mode When the signal returns to a low logic level the movements executed in JOG mode are made at the previously selected feedrate The treatment which this signal receives is similar to that given to the rapid feedrate key on the control panel The EXRAPID M5057 signal is similar but for movements in jog mode If the PLC sets this signal at a high logic level the CNC selects 10096 feedrate override irrespective of whether this is selected by the PLC DNC program or by the front panel switch While the OVERCAN signal is activated logic 1 the CNC will apply in each mode 100 of the feedrate corresponding to that mode This allows the type of JOG key operation to be selected in JOG mode If the PLC sets this signal low the axes will only move while the corresponding JOG key is pressed If the PLC sets this signal at a high logic level the axes will move from the moment the corresponding JOG key is pressed until the STOP key or other JOG key is pressed In this case the movement will be transferred to that indicated by the new key The axes and the spindle can have 2 sets of gains and accelerations By default the first set is always assumed The one indicated by the a m p and s m p ACCTIME P18 PROGAIN P23 DERGAIN P24 and FFGAIN P25 g m p ACTGAIN2 P108 indicates with which functions or in which mode the second setis applied the one set
73. the same This parameter allows a certain calculation tolerance by establishing the maximum difference between these two radii Possible values Between 0 0001 and 99999 9999 millimeters Between 0 00001 and 3937 00787 inches Default value 0 01 mm Indicates whether the CNC assumes or not as the new polar coordinate origin the center of the last G02 or G03 programmed Value Meaning YES It assumes the arc center NO It is not affected by G02 and G03 Default value NO It indicates the delay between motion blocks when operating in G7 square corner This dwell can be very useful when some devices have to activated after the execution of each block Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 there is no delay Indicates the number of tools in the tool magazine On the other hand the CNC adjusts the length of the tool table to that value Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 255 Default value 100 Indicates the number of pockets in the tool magazine On the other hand the CNC adjusts the length of the tool magazine table to that value Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 255 Default value 100 for the M model Default value 0 for the T model Y MACHINE PARAMETERS General machine parameters FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 47 General machine parameters FAGOR 2 80
74. with A with B 29 Handwheel associated with C 9 PAXIS12 Define which connector is each handwheel associated with Values 1 through 8 must be assigned to these parameters depending on the connector that the handwheel is associated with When detecting any incompatibility on power up it will issue the messages Feedback busy or Feedback not available It is related to a m p BACKLASH P14 leadscrew backlash compensation due to change of direction This parameter has 16 bits counted from right to left bit 1514131211109 8 765 43 21 0 E H NH H NH NH NH H NH H NH NH H NH NM HN Each bit has a function or work mode associated with it By default all the bits will be assigned the value of 0 Assigning the value of 1 activates the corresponding function Bit Meaning Bit 8 9 10 11 12 18 G2 G3 14 15 Meaning NO fF WN Default value in all the bits 0 Bit 13 Backlash compensation on arcs G2 G3 This bit indicates whether the compensation is applied only on circular paths G2 G3 bit 1 or in any other type of movement bit 0 Y MACHINE PARAMETERS General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 65 General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 M V11 1x Sort T V12 1x
75. 0 pitch Sinusoidal signal linear encoder linearencoder multiplying pitch factor This parameter is to be used only when the feedback signals are sinusoidal or differential double ended Indicates whether the feedback alarm for this axis will be ON or OFF Value Meaning OFF No feedback alarm desired it is canceled ON Feedback alarm is being used Default value ON It indicates the maximum time that the axis may stay without properly responding to the CNC s command Depending on the command for an axis the CNC calculates the number of feedback pulses that it must receive for each sample period The axis will be considered that it is working fine when the number of pulses received is between 5096 and 20096 of the calculated number If at any time the number of feedback pulses received is out of this range the CNC will keep checking that axis until it detects that the number of pulses received has come back to normal But if more time elapses than the one indicated in this parameter without the axis coming back to normal the CNC will issue the relevant error message Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 it is not checked Indicates the counting direction If correct leave it as is but to change it select YES if it was set to NO and viceversa When changing this parameter also change a m p LOOPCHG P26 Possible values YES Default value NO gt Axis p
76. 000 milliseconds TG2 4 3600000 ENABLE1 OR ENABLE2 OR ENABLES 4 T4 only times when any of the axis is moving En Main module PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 341 PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE GO Main module FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 342 T4 TG1 5 300000 After having timed 1 hour T5 must be activated in the mono stable mode for 5 minutes 300000 milliseconds T5 TRS 4 TG2 4 3600000 Resets the axis motion timer T4 to zero Lubrication when an axis has traveled a specific distance since the last time it was lubricated PLC machine parameters USER12 P14 USER13 P15 and USER14 P16 are used to indicate the distance each axis must travel before it gets lubricated CNCRD MPLC12 R31 M302 CNCRD MPLC13 R32 M302 CNCRD MPLC14 R33 M302 Assigns to registers R31 R32 and R33 the values of PLC machine parameters USER12 P14 USER13 P15 and USER14 P16 CNCRD DISTX R41 M302 CNCRD DISTY R42 M302 CNCRD DISTZ R43 M302 Assigns to registers R41 R42 and R43 the distance each axis has travelled CPS R41 GT R31 OR CPS R42 GT R32 OR CPS R43 GT R33 If the distance traveled by any axis exceeds the one set by machine parameter z TG1 6 240000 2202 timer must be activated the mono stable mode for 4 minutes 240000 milliseconds and MOV 0 R39 CNCWR R39
77. 1 Maximum machining spindle speed The following safety regulation forces to limit the spindle speed on lathes A program will not be executed in machining mode unless the maximum spindle speed value for the part is entered as well as the proper maximum speed for the part holding fixture for the machine Should the operator forget to enter or validate these speeds in each program change the execution in machining mode will not be possible It will not exceed the lower speed among the maximum by parameter the maximum by program and the maximum entered manually There is a variable MDISL associated with the spindle speed limits to make this maneuver easier This variable is read write from the PLC and read only from DNC and Besides updated by the PLC this variable can also be updated in the following cases When programming G92 in MDI mode When programming G92 in ISO code in MC or TC mode n MC or TC mode when a new speed limit is defined in the SMAX field The speed limits entered via CNC PLC PLCSL and DNC DNCSL keep the same functionality and priority and are not affected by the MDISL variable in other words the CNC also limits the spindle speed with these variables Management via PLC To comply the safety regulation we recommend to manage from the PLC the variables associated with speed limit as shown in the following example It applies the following restrictions Anew part program cannot be execute
78. 1x 233 8 51 Binary assignment instructions They assign the value obtained from evaluating the logic expression 0 1 to the indicated resource 8 S 5 TGn 1 256 n R Timer trigger input E 3 CUP 1 256 Counter count up E 1 1 256 Counter count down Q CEN 1 256 Counter enable 9 1 256 n R Counter preset 0 31 1 499 Register Bits 13 TG1 4 100 Assigns the status of input 13 to the trigger input TG1 of timer T4 Thus an up flank at 13 will trigger the TG1 input of timer T4 I2 OR 13 AND OR NOT 15 AND 16 M111 It assigns to Mark M111 the value obtained in the evaluation of the Logic Expression 12 OR 13 AND I4 OR NOT 15 AND 16 FAGOR CNC 8035 M V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 234 8 5 2 Conditional binary action instructions SET RES CPL There are 3 instructions SET RES and CPL that are used to change the status of the indicated resource Their programming format is 1 512 O 1 512 M 1 5957 B 0 31 R 1 559 If expression 1 it assigns a 1 to the resource If the result of evaluating the logic expression is a 1 it assigns a 1 to the indicated resource If the result is 0 it does not change the resource Example CPS T2 EQ 100 SET BOR100 When the timing of timer T2 reaches 100 milliseconds it sets bit 0 of register R100 to 1 If expression 1 it assigns a 0 to the resource If the re
79. 7874 01574 inches min Default value 1000 mm min gt Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 81 Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 M V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 82 REFEED2 P35 REFVALUE P36 MAXVOLT P37 GOOFEED P38 UNIDIR P39 OVERRUN P40 UNIFEED P41 Indicates the axis feedrate when searching home after hitting the home switch until it finds the marker pulse lo Possible values Between 0 0001 and 99999 9999 degrees min or mm min Between 0 00001 inches min and 3937 00787 inches min Default value 100 mm min Indicates the position value of the machine reference point physical location of the marker pulse with respect to machine reference zero Possible values Within 99999 9999 degrees or millimeters Within x3937 00787 inches Default value 0 The machine reference point is a point that the OEM sets on the machine to synchronize the system The CNC positions the axis at this point instead of moving it to the machine zero point When the machine uses semi absolute scales with coded marker pulses the axis may be homed anywhere within its travel Thus this parameter must only be set when applying leadscrew error compensation The amount of leadscrew error of the machine reference point may have any value Indicates the maximum analog voltage corresponding to the m
80. 8 digit BCD coded spindle output S Whenever a new spindle speed is selected the CNC will transfer the programmed S value into register SBCD R557 and it will activate general logic output SSTROBE M5533 to tell the PLC to go ahead with its execution This transmission is carried out at the beginning of the block execution and the CNC will wait for the AUXEND general input be activated and then consider its execution completed If it uses 2 bit BCD code the CNC will indicate the S value to the PLC by means of this register and according to the following conversion table Programmed Programmed 5 B S B 80 89 Programmed S o 0 oo 800 899 900 999 1000 1119 1120 1249 1250 1399 1400 1599 1600 1799 1800 1999 2000 2239 2240 2499 2500 2799 2800 3149 3150 3549 3550 3999 4000 4499 4500 4999 5000 5599 5600 6299 6300 7099 7100 7999 8000 8999 9000 9999 78 79 ojo 81 82 83 84 85 Qi a ao a A 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 91 92 93 94 95 710 799 97 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 7 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 EA 22 28 ca pes EA e 2 EA E EB ES 18 EU 22 EA ER 20 E Spindle CQ 5 FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 171 CONCEPTS Spindle FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T
81. 8035 CNC Referred to by this declaration with following directives Safety regulations EN 60204 1 Machine safety Electrical equipment of the machines Regulation on electromagnetic compatibility EN 61000 4 3 Generic regulation on emissions in industrial environments EN 55011 Radiated Class A Group 1 EN 61000 6 2 Generic regulation on immunity in industrial environments EN 61000 4 2 Electrostatic Discharges EN 61000 4 3 Radiofrequency Radiated Electromagnetic Fields EN 61000 4 4 Bursts and fast transients EN 61000 4 6 Conducted disturbance induced by radio frequency fields EN 61000 4 8 Magnetic fields to Mains frequency EN 61000 4 11 Voltage fluctuations and Outages ENV 50204 Fields generated by digital radio telephones As instructed by the European Community Directives 73 23 CEE modified by 93 68 EEC on Low Voltage and 89 336 CEE modified by 92 31 EEC and 93 68 EEC on Electromagnetic Compatibility and their updates In Mondrag n June 15th 2005 cipum FAGOR 29 y CNC 8035 VERSION HISTORY mill model Here is a list of the features added in each software version and the manuals that describe them The version history uses the following abbreviations INST Installation manual PRG Programming manual OPT Operation manual Software V07 1x July 2003 First version Software V09 0x February 2004 List of features Manual Incline axis INST PRG Machine parameters INST TO
82. Analog output Proportional Gain x Following Error a m p PROGRAIN P23 sets the value of the proportional gain Expressed in millivolts mm it takes any integer between 0 and 65535 Its value indicates the analog output corresponding to a feedrate resulting in 1 millimeter 0 03937 inch of following error Example The maximum feedrate for a particular axis rapid traverse GOO is 15m min but we would like to limit its maximum programmable machining feedrate F to 3 m min with a gain of 1 mm lag at a feedrate of 1m min Gain of 1 in metric a m p GOOFEED P38 must be set to 15 000 15 m min a m p MAXVOLT P37 must be set to 9500 and the servo drive adjusted so as to provide 15m min with an analog voltage of 9 5 V a m p MAXFEED P42 must be set to 3 000 3 m min Analog output corresponding to F 1000 mm min Velocity command F x 9 5V GOOFEED Velocity command 1000 mm min x 9 5V 15000 mm min 0 633V Velocity command 633 mV Therefore PROGAIN P23 633 Considerations to bear in mind When setting the proportional gain The maximum amount of following error allowed by the CNC for the axis is the value indicated by MAXFLWE1 P21 When exceeded the CNC issues the corresponding following error message The amount of following error decreases as the gain increases but it tends to make the system unstable n practice the great majority of machines show an excellent behavior
83. CNCEX1 to send commands to the CNC CNCEX sends commands to the CNC so it executes movements on one or several axes 1 sends commands to the so it executes any kind of block The CNCEX action is executed through the execution channel of the PLC The CNCEX1 action is executed via main channel of the CNC and as long as the JOG keyboard is enabled Its execution can be interrupted by pressing CYCLE STOP or even canceled by pressing RESET If a CNCEX1 action is received when the JOG keyboard is disabled the CNC ignores this command The programming format for these actions is CNCEX ASCII block Mark CNCEX1 ASCII block Mark By means of these actions the PLC sends to the CNC the command indicated in the ASCII Block to be executed If the ASCII Block has been accepted by the CNC the PLC will set the indicated mark to 0 or to 1 if otherwise The CNC only indicates that the ASCII Block has been accepted It is up to the operator to verify whether the command has actually been executed by the CNC or not CNCEX G1 U125 V300 F500 M200 Sends to the CNC the command G1 U125 V300 F500 so it executes a linear interpolation of the and V axes ata feedrate of F500 being the end point U125 V300 CNCEX1 T5 M200 Selects the tool T5 in the tool changer Example of how to use action CNCEX1 when using a tool changer controlled by the PLC 1 The T executed last at the CNC is T1 Therefore it is
84. DRSTAF1 M5603 DRSTAS1 M5604 DRSTAF2 M5653 DRSTAS2 M5654 DRSTAF3 M5703 DRSTAS3 M5704 The CNC uses these signals when communicating with the drive via Sercos or via Can and indicate the status of the drive DRSTAF DRSTAS Actuating the main switch of the electrical cabinet supplies 24 Vdc to the drive The drive runs an internal test If correct it activates the output System OK From that moment on the power supply must be turned on When there is power at the drive bus it is ready to output torque To do that activate the drive enable and speed enable inputs Once the drive enable and speed enable are activated the drive is running properly When an internal error occurs at the drive the DRSTAF and DRSTAS signals are FAGOR 2 set low logic level low ANT1 M5606 ANT2 M5656 M5706 CNC 8035 These signals are related to a m p MINMOVE P54 If the axis move is smaller than the value indicated by this a m p MINMOVE P54 the corresponding axis logic output ANT1 thru ANT goes high Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 288 O O installation manual INPOS1 M5607 INPOS2 M5657 INPOS3 M5707 The CNC sets these signals high to tell the PLC that the corresponding axis is in position There is also the general logic output INPOS in which the CNC indicates to the PLC that all the axes have reached their position m gt Logic outputs
85. G44 tool length compensation ON 1 G43 tool length compensation ON Default value 0 Indicates which function G90 absolute programming or G91 incremental programming is assumed on power up after executing M02 M30 EMERGENCY RESET Value Meaning 0 G90 absolute programming 1 G91 incremental programming Default value 0 gt 5 General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 45 General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 46 IFEED P14 THEODPLY P15 GRAPHICS P16 RAPIDOVR P17 MAXFOVR P18 CIRINLIM P19 CIRINERR P20 Indicates which function G94 feedrate in mm min or inch min or G95 mm rev or inch rev is assumed on power up after executing M02 M30 EMERGENCY or RESET Value Meaning 0 G94 mm min or inches min 1 G95 mm rev or inches rev Default value 0 Indicates whether the CNC will display real or theoretical position values according to the following code Value Meaning 0 Real position values 1 Theoretical position values Default value 1 Not being used Indicates whether it is possible to vary the feedrate override between 096 and 10096 when working in GOO Value Meaning YES It may be modified NO It cannot be modified it is set to 100 96 Default value NO The feedr
86. G90 G1 U150 The U axis will go to position 150 To govern axes managed by PLC use the following marks associated with Feed hold and Transfer Inhibit FEEDHOP M5004 Similar to the FEEDHOL signal FHOUTP M5504 Similar to the FHOUT signal XFERINP M5005 Similar to the XFERINH signal Feedrate of the axes The programming format for the axis feedrate F5 5 depends on the function G94 or G95 and on the work units selected for this execution channel f G94 in mm min or inches min f G95 in mm rev or inches rev It must be borne in mind that this feedrate depends on the actual spindle rom which is in the main execution channel If the moving axis is rotary the CNC interprets that the programmed feedrate is in degrees minute An PLC execution channel AXES CONTROLLED FROM THE PLC FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 327 AXES CONTROLLED FROM THE PLC NO PLC execution channel FAGOR 8035 Sort V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 328 Modify the feedrate override The PLCCFR variable sets from the PLC the of feedrate selected by the execution channel of the PLC G m p MAXFOVR P18 limits the value of the percentage applied to both execution channels main and PLC The OVRCAN M5020 mark sets the feedrate override of the main channel to 100 It does not affect the feedrate override of the PLC channel Same as with the main channel the followi
87. GND Probe 1 Probe s 0 V input meth 5 Probe 2 5 V output for the probe PRB2_5 Probe 2 5 V TTL input 2 24 Probe 2 24 Vdc input GND Probe 2 Probe s 0 V input co OFA 8 Up to 2 probes may be connected There are 2 feedback inputs for each one 5V and 24V CNC structure All shields must only be connected to ground at the CNC end through pin 1 of the connector leaving the other end free The wires of the shielded cables cannot be unshielded for more than 75mm about 3 inches CNC CONFIGURATION Connector X4 For analog spindle connection 15 pin high density SUB D type female connector Pin Signal and function Feedback signals 0 4 09 032 8 WN 5 5 V output for feedback ana_out Velocity command output 0 V output for feedback 0 V output for velocity command Chassis Shield It admits 1Vpp non differential TTL and differential TTL feedback The cable shield must be connected to the metallic hood at each end FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 11 Connector 5 For electronic handwheel connection 15 pin high density SUB D type female connector Signal and function Feedback signals of first handwheel 1 Al 2 3 4 10 5 6 7 8 Feedback signals of second handwheel Supply output 5 Supply output GND Supply output GND Supply output 100P Push button of Fagor 100P handwheel CNC CONFIGURATION CNC
88. Multiplying factor up to x 25 with sinewave input Feedrate from 0 0001 to 99999 9999 mm min 0 00001 3937 inches min Maximum travel 99999 9999 mm 3937 inches 1 RS232C communication line 40 optocoupled digital inputs 24 optocoupled digital outputs 32 bit processor Math coprocessor Graphics coprocessor 256 Kb CNC program memory Block processing time of 6 5 ms Configurable sample time 2 3 4 5 or 6 ms Approximate weight 7 5 Kg Maximum consumption of 48 W in normal operation Monochrome monitor Technology LCD STN Diagonal display area dimension 7 5 Resolution 640 x 480 pixels 8 grey ranges Backlit with 1 cold cathode fluorescent lamp pe M T Due to the current state of the LCD technology all manufacturers accept the fact the LCD screens have a certain number of defective pixels APPENDIX Technical specifications of the CNC FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 349 APPENDIX Technical specifications of the CNC FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 350 Power supply Nominal voltage 20 V minimum and 30 V maximum Ripple 4 V Nominal current 2 A Current peak on power up 8 A The figure shows the shape of the supply current on power up PLC Memory 100 kbytes Programming in mnemonics 1 millisecond time unit
89. TZUP X C FOZONE FOZLO X C FOZUP X C FIZONE FIZLO X O FIZUP X C Variable FREAL FREAL X C CNC PLC DNC 2 ee v o v n e o e o v n v s e n e n v s e n e n v n Variables associated with work zones R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W 20 2212 010171 0101 01011 101 101 0101 0 section 11 4 Status of work zone 1 Work zone 1 Lower limit along the selected axis X C Work zone 1 Upper limit along the selected axis X C Status of work zone 2 Work zone 2 Lower limit along the selected axis X C Work zone 2 Upper limit along the selected axis X C Status of work zone 3 Work zone 3 Lower limit along the selected axis X C Work zone 3 Upper limit along the selected axis X C Status of work zone 4 Work zone 4 Lower limit along the selected axis X C Work zone 4 Upper limit along the selected axis X C Status of work zone 5 Work zone 5 Lower limit along the selected axis X C Work zone 5 Upper limit along the selected axis X C Feedrate related variables CNC PLC DNC R R R R R R R section 11 5 Real feedrate of the CNC in mm min or inch min Actual real CNC feedrate of the selected axis Theoretical CNC feedrate of the selected axis FTEO X C R R Summary of internal CNC variables Variables associated with function G94 Active feedrate at the CNC in mm min or inch min Feedrate selected via DNC Feedrate select
90. V12 1x 172 If a value over 9999 is programmed the CNC will tell the PLC the spindle speed corresponding to value 9999 If S output in 8 digit BCD is used the CNC will indicate the programmed spindle speed to the PLC by means ofthis register This value will be coded in BCD format 8 digits in thousandths of a revolution per minute S 12345 678 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 Analog output In order for the CNC to provide an analog output to control the spindle speed it is necessary to set s m p SPDLTYPE PO 0 The will generate the analog output within 10V corresponding to the programmed rotation speed or a unipolar analog output voltage if the s m p POLARMS and POLARMA P8 have been assigned the same value The Closed Loop mode of operation with M19 is described later on in this manual PLC controlled spindle With this feature the PLC may take control of the spindle for a certain period of time To do that follow these steps 1 Have the PLC place the S value at CNC logic input SANALOG R504 This S value corresponds to the analog voltage to be applied to the spindle drive Also set CNC logic input PLCCNTL M5465 high to let the CNC know that from this moment on the PLC is the one setting the analog voltage for the spindle 2 From this instant on the CNC outputs the spindle analog voltage indicated by the PLC at CNC logic input SANALOG R504 If the PLC changes the value o
91. active Possible values Between 0 0001 and 199999 9999 degrees min or mm min Between 0 00001 inches min and 7874 01574 inches min Default value 1000 mm min Indicates the probing feedrate when calibrating a tool in JOG mode Possible values Between 0 0001 and 99999 9999 degrees min or mm min Between 0 00001 inches min and 3937 00787 inches min Default value 100 mm min It indicates the maximum difference allowed between the following errors of the Gantry axes This value is only assigned to the slave axis Possible values Between 0 0001 and 99999 9999 degrees or millimeters Between 0 00001 and 3937 00787 inches Default value 1 mm Indicates whether or notthe value assigned to a m p DERGAIN P24 is applied onto the variations of the programmed feedrate AC forward Value Meaning NO It is applied on variations of following error derivative gain YES It is applied on the variations of the programmed feedrate that are due to acceleration deceleration AC forward Default value YES ACFGAIN NO ACFGAIN YES gt Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 83 Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 84 REFSHIFT P47 STOPTIME P48 STOPMOVE P49 STOPAOUT P50 INPOSW2 P51 This parameter is used when once the mac
92. an AND OR XOR operation is 0 The clock marks M2009 to M2024 make up internal clocks of different periods which can be used by the user The following table shows the available marks and the average period of each one M2021 16s M2022 32 M2009 100 ms M2015 6 4 2010 200 ms 2016 12 8 2011 400 ms 2017 1 2023 64 2024 128 2012 800 ms 2018 25 2013 1 6 M2019 4s M2014 3 2 2020 8 The fixed status marks available at the PLC are M2046 Always has a value of 0 M2047 Always has a value of 1 The PLC allows by means of the activation of a series of message marks the PLC message corresponding to the PLC message table to be displayed on the CNC screen They can be named by means of the mark M4000 M4127 or by means of their associated mnemonic MSG1 MSG128 M4000 M4001 M4002 M4126 M4127 MSG1 MSG2 MSG3 MSG127 50128 Likewise 64 error marks are available which allow the error corresponding to the PLC error table to be displayed on the CNC screen as well as to interrupt the execution of the CNC program stopping axis feed and spindle rotation Activating any of these marks does not activate the external CNC emergency output They can be named by means of mark M4500 M4563 by means of their associated mnemonic ERR1 ERR64 M4500 M4501 M4502 M4562 M4563 ERR1 ERR2 ERR3 ERR63 ERR64 Because the PLC program is not interrupted by these marks it is advi
93. and it gets ready for the next one Bear in mind that all the actions of the program executed by the PLC alter the status of its resources Example 110 AND 120 O5 When this condition is met resource 110 is 1 and 120 is also 1 the PLC sets resource O5 to 1 If this condition is not met the PLC sets resource to FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 197 PLC program execution INTRODUCTION TO THE PLC FAGOR 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 198 Therefore the status of a resource may change during the execution of the PLC program Example assuming that the initial status of resource M100 is O M100 AND 17 Resource M100 0 110 M100 M100 takes the value of resource 110 M100 AND 18 M101 The value of M100 depends on the previous instruction This type of problems may be prevented by careful programming or by using Image resource values instead of Real values The PLC has 2 memories to store the status of the registers the real memory and the image memory Allthe steps described so far work with the real memory Saying value of a particular resource is the same as saying real value of a particular resource The image memory contains a copy of the values status that the resources had at the end of the previous cycle The PLC makes this copy at the end of the cycle The resources having an image value
94. are always given in radius The CNC updates this variable when probing functions G75 and G76 FLWE X C DIST X C LIMPL X C LIMMI X C When the digital probe communicates with the CNC via infrared beams there could be some delay milliseconds from the time the probe touches the part to the instant the CNC receives the probe signal TPOS DPOS Although the probe keeps moving until the CNC receives the probing signal the CNC takes into account the value assigned to general machine parameter PRODEL and provides the following information in the variables TPOS X C and DPOS X C TPOS X C Actual position of the probe when the CNC receives the probe signal DPOS X C Theoretical position of the probe when the probe touched the part It returns the following error of the selected axis It returns the position value coordinate shown on the screen for the selected axis Read and write variables These variables may be used to read or modify the distance traveled by the selected axis This value is accumulative and is very useful when it is required to perform an operation which depends on the distance traveled by the axes their lubrication for example Accessing any of the DIST X C variables interrupts block preparation and the CNC waits for that command to be executed before resuming block preparation With these variables it is possible to set a second tr
95. axis pitch may be set in degrees via parameters April 2005 Manual INST Rollover positioning axis Movement in G53 via the shortest way Software V09 15 INST June 2005 List of features Manual CAN servo system INST Software V11 01 August 2005 List of features Manual The CNC supports Memkey Card Compact Flash or KeyCF OPT File explorer to show the contents of the storage devices INST OPT Loading the version from the Memkey card o from the hard disk OPT New way to search home that may be selected through g m p IOTYPE 3 INST Improved block search Switching from simulation to execution INST OPT New repositioning mode that is activated by setting g m p REPOSTY 1 INST PRG OPT Square sine ramps on open loop spindle INST Numbering of the local inputs outputs of the expansion modules using plc machine parameters INST Default value of axis and spindle machine parameter ACFGAIN YES INST Setting axis parameters FFGAIN and FFGAIN2 with two decimals INST Up to 400 DEF symbols now available at the PLC INST New HTOR variable that indicates the tool radius being used by the CNC INST PRG Longitudinal axis definition with G16 INST PRG Software V11 11 February 2006 List of features Handwheel feedback taken to a free feedback connector Manual INST New variables RIP GGSE GGSF GGSG GGSH GGSI GGSJ GGSK GGSL GGSM PRGSP and
96. base referred to machine reference zero home On limit less rotary axes this variable takes into account the value of the active zero offset The values of the variable are between the active zero offset and X360 ORG x 3609 If ORG 20 it displays between 20 and 380 displays between 340 and 209 If ORG 60 it displays between 60 and 300 displays between 420 and 60 At the lathe model CNC the coordinates of each axis are given as follows When read from the CNC they are given in radius or diameter depending on the active units system Check the DIAM variable to know the active units system When read from the PLC they are always given in radius It returns the real tool base position value referred to part zero of the selected axis At the lathe model CNC the coordinates of each axis are given as follows When read from the CNC they are given in radius or diameter depending on the active units system Check the DIAM variable to know the active units system When read from the PLC they are always given in radius It returns the theoretical position value real coordinate following error of the tool base referred to part zero At the lathe model CNC the coordinates of each axis are given as follows When read from the CNC they are given in radius or diameter depending on the active units system Check the DIAM variable to know the active units system When read from the PLC they
97. between insert and overwrite replace writing modes CAP Switches between upper case and lower case letters when the CRT shows CAP it will indicate that the upper case mode has been selected Make sure this mode is selected since all characters entered in these tables must be upper case ENTER Assumes the edited line and ends the editing of the line CNC offers the following options when working with each parameter of these tables EDIT Edit a parameter The CNC will indicate the proper format by means of the softkeys MODIFY Modify a parameter Position the cursor on the desired parameter and press the Modify softkey Once the modification is done press ENTER for the CNC to assume the new value FIND Look for a parameter The cursor will be positioned over the indicated parameter With this function it is also possible to find the beginning or the end of the table INITIALIZE Initialize the table assuming the default values LOAD Load into memory the tables saved in the memkey card CARD A a peripheral device or a PC SAVE Save the tables into the memkey card CARD A a peripheral device or a PC MM INCHES See the parameter values in the desired units Only those parameters affected by this conversion will be altered It will not change the g m p INCHES 8 that indicates machine units Machine parameter setting In order for the machine tool to be able to properly execute the programm
98. by the CNC for that point to a m p LIMIT P5 Repeat these steps in the negative direction assigning the resulting coordinate to a m p LIMIT P6 Once both travel limits have been set for all the axes press SHIFT RESET or turn the CNC OFF and back ON in order for these new values to be assumed by the CNC a CONCEPTS Reference systems FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 163 5 Unidirectional approach FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 164 5 7 Unidirectional approach The FAGOR 8055 CNC provides a number of machine parameters to help improve the repetitiveness when positioning the axes in rapid GOO by always approaching the end point in the same direction UNIDIR P39 Indicates the direction of unidirectional approach OVERRUN Indicates the distance to be kept between the approach point and the programmed point If this parameter is set to 0 the CNC will not perform the unidirectional approach UNIFEED P41 Indicates the feedrate to be used from the approach point to the programmed point The CNC will calculate the approach point 2 based on the programmed target point 1 and the a m p UNIDIR P39 and OVERRUN 40 The positioning will be carried out in two stages 1 Rapid positioning GOO up to the calculated approach point 2 If the axis is moving in the direction opposite to that indicated by UNIDI
99. cancel the coolant M08 DFU MSTROBE AND CPS MBCD EQ 3 SET M 03 RES M 04 DFU MSTROBE AND CPS MBCD EQ 4 SET M 04 RES M 03 DFU MSTROBE AND CPS MBCD EQ 5 RES M 03 RES M 04 Functions and M04 are incompatible with each other and MO5 cancels both DFU MSTROBE AND CPS MBCD EQ 8 SET M 08 DFU MSTROBE AND CPS MBCD EQ 9 RES M 08 DFU MSTROBE AND CPS MBCD EQ 30 RES M 08 Functions M09 and M30 cancel the coolant M08 DFU MSTROBE AND CPS MBCD EQ 41 SET M 41 RES M 42 DFU MSTROBE AND CPS MBCD EQ 42 SET M 42 RES M 41 Functions M41 and M42 are incompatible with each other En Main module PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 339 PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE GO Main module FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 340 Spindle turning control The spindle enable output O S ENAB will be activated when selecting function or M04 M 03 OR M 04 O S ENAB Treatment of spindle gear change The spindle in this example has two gears high and low To perform a gear change proceed as follows Deactivate the general CNC input AUXEND Remove the control of the spindle back to the CNC Controlled by PLC Output an oscillating analog signal to change gears Move the gears Verify that the gear change has been completed Remove the oscillating analog signal Return the
100. changed may be machined either with rounding or without it This bit indicates whether that point is machined as a round corner bit 1 or as a square corner bit 0 This bit is only taken into account when round corner machining is active when working in square corner the corner where the change takes place is always machined as a square corner Bit 15 Stop block preparation when executing the T function If while executing the T function the block preparation detects a programming error this function might not be executed completely This means that the tool change may have concluded correctly but the requested tool has not been assumed by the CNC To avoid this situation it is possible to stop block preparation during the execution of the T function This bit determines whether block preparation is interrupted 01 41 or not bit 0 while executing a T function Remember that when having a subroutine associated with the T function the tool change is carried out as follows 1 It executes the associated subroutine 2 The function is executed without using the MO6 function 3 The CNC assumes the change Defines the behavior of the probe This parameter has 16 bits counted from right to left bit 1514 131211109 876 54 3 21 0 NH NH NH NH NH NH H H NH NH H Each bit has a function or work mode as
101. control of the spindle back to the CNC Activate the general CNC input AUXEND Deactivate the general CNC input AUXEND While changing gears ranges general CNC input AUXEND should be canceled in order to interrupt the execution of the CNC Treatment of the general CNC input AUXEND Remove the control of the spindle back to the CNC Controlled by PLC Output an oscillating analog signal to change gears DFU M 41 OR DFU M 42 When a range gear change is requested MOV 2000 SANALOG 0 610 analog signal for the spindle is prepared and SET PLCCNTL the PLC grabs the control of the spindle loop PLCCNTL AND M2011 While the PLC has the spindle control SPDLEREV the spindle turning direction is changed every 400 milliseconds Move the gears The corresponding gear output O GEAR is kept active until the range selection is completed I GEAR M 41 AND NOT I GEAR1 O GEAR1 M 42 AND NOT I GEAR2 O GEAR2 Verify that the gear change has been completed Remove the oscillating analog signal Return the control of the spindle back to the CNC 41 AND I GEAR1 OR 42 AND I GEAR2 Once the gear change has concluded the following must be done RES M 41 RES M 42 remove the request for a gear change 41 M 42 MOV 0 SANALOG remove the spindle analog voltage RES PLCCNTL Return the control of the spindle to the CNC I GEAR1 GEAR1 I GAMA2 GEAR2
102. default rotary axes are Rollover and are displayed between 0 and 359 9999 If rollover is not desired set a m p ROLLOVER 55 The axis position will be displayed in degrees Positioning only and or Hirth axes follow the shortest path when programmed in absolute G90 In other words if its current position is 10 and its target position is 350 the axis will go through 10 9 352 351 350 See 5 1 Axes and coordinate systems on page 123 Indicates the work units radius or diameter and the display format used for the axis Value Work units Data format degrees mm inch 9 e 9 2 m s s 5 radius It is not displayed 4 Wwe 33 35 s 4 35 s dames 32 5 35 Indicates if itis a Gantry axis which axis is this one associated with This parameter is to be set only on the slaved axis according to the following code Value Meaning Value Meaning 0 Not Gantry 5 With the V axis 1 With the X axis 6 With the W axis 2 With the X axis 7 With the A axis 3 With the Z axis 8 With the B axis 4 With the U axis 9 With the C axis Default value 0 it is not Gantry The position ofthe Gantry axis is displayed nextto its associated axis unless machine parameter DFORMAT P1 3 SYNCHRO DROAXIS P4 LIMIT P5 LIMIT P6 PITCH P7 Example If the X and U axes form a Gantry pair the axis bei
103. determines bit 1 that the additive offset is canceled after executing M02 M30 or after an emergency or reset Bit 15 Manual intervention with additive handwheel is available This bitindicates whether manual intervention with an additive handwheelis available bit 1 or not bit 0 If set to 0 the rest of the bits are ignored The additive handwheel is activated and deactivated with PLC signal MANINT ADIMPRES 177 SERCDEL1 P178 SERCDEL2 P179 EXPLORER P180 REPOSTY P181 DISSIMUL P184 Resolution of the additive handwheel Value Meaning 0 0 001 mm or 0 0001 inch 1 0 01 mm or 0 001 inch 2 0 1 mm or 0 01 inch Default value 0 These values are only applied when bit 12 of parameter ADIMPG has been to 1 Not being used Not being used It sets how to access the explorer Value Meaning 0 It is accessed using the lt explorer gt softkey of the utilities execute simulate or edit modes 1 It is accessed directly from the utilities execute simulate or edit modes Default value 0 It may be used to select the repositioning mode Value Meaning 0 It activates the basic repositioning mode 1 It activates the extended repositioning mode Default value 1 It may be used to disable the simulation modes and the block search modes when selecting blocks in execution Setting the relevant bit to 1 disables it and removes from the menu the softkey assigned to this bit This paramet
104. disk at the same time Communications board CAN and Ethernet connection There is a new communications board Ethernet CAN Ethernet CAN servo Ethernet This board has the following connections CAN servo system bus Ethernet bus CNC configuration in a local network The Ethernet option permits configuring the CNC as another node within the local area network This makes it possible to communicate with other PC s to transfer files or carrying out telediagnostic tasks Use a standard shielded 10BASE T cable for this connection It must not be longer than 100 meters Once the connection to Ethernet has been configured the following types of connections are possible PC connection through WinDNC it requires WinDNC version 4 0 or higher Connection from a PC through an FTP client Connection to a remote hard disk Remote hard disk The Ethernet connection may be used to use a PC directory server as a hard disk This memory space may be shared by several CNC s or each may have its own memory space The interface and the softkeys of the will the same as if it were a local hard disk When accessing the CNC through WinDNC or the remote hard disk behaves like a local hard disk The remote hard disk is configured by machine parameters The PC that makes its hard disk server public must be connected to the local network Sees ee The NFS protocol is used to co
105. executed at the end of the current block or at the beginning of the next block with compensation Value Meaning x00 It is executed at the end of the current block x10 It is executed at the beginning of the next block with compensation Default value 00 3 amp B E gt gt 0S 1 l COMPTYPE 00 COMPTYPE 10 Executing block by block single block Executing block by block single block mode the first movement ends at mode the first movement ends at point B point A When the beginning or the end of the compensation takes place in a different plane there is an intermediate vertical movement and with angle greater than 270 one should be analyze the CNC s behavior as shown next At the beginning of the compensation the tool should be positioned before penetrating into the part The additional block must be executed in the upper plane and consequently together with the first block COMPTYPE 00 At the end of the compensation the tool should withdraw from the part without penetrating into it The additional block must be executed in the upper plane and consequently together with the second block COMPTYPE 10 MACHINE PARAMETERS General machine parameters hundreds Activate the compensation in the first motion block The hundreds indicate whether the compensation is activated in the first motion block or not even if the plane axes are not involved The same criteria
106. execution Once executed the CNC deactivates it Likewise if they are activated in a block that does not accept them they will also be deactivated they do not stay active for the next block These marks affect the following functions t affect motion blocks GO G1 G2 G3 They affect the dwell programmed with G4 e t affects the look ahead In this type of programs with very small blocks it is not possible to stop at the same block where the BLOABOR mark is detected In these cases it will be canceled at the block where the axis is fully decelerated These marks do not affect the following functions Logic inputs of the PLC channel t does not affect motionless blocs which will be executed tdoes not affect the M functions that are executed after the block These functions are always executed even if the movement of the block is interrupted LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS e tdoes affect not affect threading blocks G33 Nor does it affect the regular tapping or rigid tapping cycles regardless of the value of parameter STOPTAP t does not affect spindle positioning blocks M19 If the spindle positioning is in a block containing axis movement it aborts the movement of the axes but it completes the positioning of the spindle Considerations for the execution These marks do not affectblock preparation When canceling the execution of a block the next movement is carried out up to the prepared target coordinate
107. from the PLC To activate or cancle the Path jog work mode act upon the logic CNC input MASTRHND M5054 M5054 0 Path JOG function off 5054 1 Path JOG function CONCEPTS Movement with an electronic handwheel Ol To indicate the type of movement use CNC logic input HNLINARC M5053 M5053 0 Linear path M5053 1 Arc path For a linear path indicate the path angle in the MASLAN variable value in degrees between the linear path and the first axis of the plane For an arc indicate the arc center coordinates in the MASCFI MASCSE variables for the first and second axes of the main plane o Variables MASLAN MASCFI and MASCSE may be read and written from the CNC DNC and PLC The next example uses the O2 key to activate and deactivate the path handwheel mode and the O3 key to indicate the type of movement DFU B29 R561 CPL M5054 Activate or cancel the path handwheel mode DFU B31 R561 CPL M5053 Select the type of movement straight section or arc section Simultaneous handwheels When selecting the path handwheel mode the CNC behaves as follows The individual handwheels if any will remain associated with the corresponding axes e fthereisageneralhandwheel it will be the one working in path handwheel mode FAGOR f there is general handwheel one the individual handwheel starts working CNC 8035 in path handwheel mode The one associated wit
108. function of register R557 must be executed TSTROBE M5534 Indicates that the auxiliary T function of register R558 must be executed T2STROBE M5535 Indicates that the auxiliary T function of register R559 must be executed ADVINPOS M5537 For punch presses it indicates that punching may begin INTEREND M5538 It indicates that the interpolation is finished INPOS M5539 The axes are in position DMOO M5547 Program interrupted after executing the auxiliary function MOO DMO01 M5546 Program interrupted after executing the auxiliary function MO1 APPENDIX Summary of PLC inputs and outputs DM02 M5545 The execution of the program has stopped after executing the auxiliary M02 function DMOS M5544 The spindle is turning clockwise 04 5543 The spindle is turning counterclockwise M04 05 5542 The spindle is stopped 05 06 5541 The auxiliary MO6 function has been executed DM08 M5540 The coolant output has been activated M08 DMO0O9 5555 The coolant output has been canceled 09 DM19 M5554 A block with spindle stop has been executed M19 DM30 M5553 The program concluded after executing the auxiliary M30 function DM41 M5552 First spindle speed gear range selected M41 DM42 M5551 Second spindle speed gear range selected M42 DM43 M5550 Third spindle speed gear range selected M43 DM44 M5549 Fourth spindle speed gear range selected M44 AXIS LOGIC OUTPUTS Axis 1 Axis 2 Ax
109. in with squarewave linear encoder Since the CNC applies a x4 multiplying factor to squarewave signals we must select a linear encoder whose grading pitch is 4 times the desired resolution FAGOR linear encoders use a grading pitch of either 20 or 100 um Therefore the resolution that can be obtained with them are 5 um 20 4 or 25 um 100 4 Therefore INCHES 0 0 0200 NPULSES 0 SINMAGNI 0 PITCH 0 1000 The CNC s maximum squarewave feedback input frequency is 400 KHz which means that the maximum feedrate obtainable with a 20 pitch linear encoder is Max Feed 20 um pulse x 400 000 pulses sec Max feedrate 8000 mm s 480 m min When using Fagor linear encoder the maximum feedrate is limited by their own characteristics to 60 m min Example 4 Resolution in mm with sinusoidal signal linear encoder We have a sinewave linear encoder with a 20 um pitch and we would like to obtain 1 resolution We must calculate the multiplying factor SINMAGNI to be applied by the CNC to the pulses provided by the linear encoder in order to obtain the desired resolution SINMAGNI linear encoder pitch resolution 20 um 1 um 20 Therefore INCHES 0 0 0200 NPULSES 0 SINMAGNI 20 The CNC s maximum sinewave feedback input frequency is 250 KHz which means that the maximum feedrate for this axis will be Max Feed 20 um pulse x 250 000 pulses sec Max feedrate 5 000 mm s 30
110. in humid environments In order to avoid electrical discharges always work under 90 of relative humidity non condensing and 45 C 113 F Do not work in explosive environments In order to avoid risks damage do no work in explosive environments Precautions against product damage Working environment This unit is ready to be used in industrial environments complying with the directives and regulations effective in the European Community Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any damage suffered or caused when installed in other environments residential or homes FAGOR 2 8035 XIII Safety conditions FAGOR 8035 XIV Install this unit in the proper place It is recommended to install the CNC away from coolants chemical products possible blows etc which could damage it This unit complies with the European directives on electromagnetic compatibility Nevertheless itis recommended to keep it away from sources of electromagnetic disturbance such as Powerful loads connected to the same AC power line as this equipment Nearby portable transmitters Radio telephones Ham radio transmitters Nearby radio TC transmitters Nearby arc welding machines Nearby High Voltage power lines Etc Enclosures The manufacturer is responsible of assuring that the enclosure involving the equipment meets allthe currently effective directives ofthe European Community
111. input MO1STOP must be activated It interrupts the program when executing M01 START AND rest of conditions CYSTART When the cycle START key is pressed the CNC activates the general logic output START The PLC must check that the rest of the conditions hydraulic safety devices etc are met before setting the general input CYSTART high in order to start executing the program SERVO OK AND NOT LOPEN SERVO1ON SERVO2ON SERVO30N If the servo drives are OK and the CNC does not detect any errors in the positioning loop of the axes LOPEN the positioning loop must be closed on all axes Axis logic inputs of the SERVO1ON 5 2 5 FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 337 PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE GO Main module FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 338 Treatment of the axis overtravel limit switches I LIMTX1 LIMIT 1 I LIMTX2 LIMIT 1 I LIMTY1 LIMIT 2 I LIMTY2 LIMIT 2 I LIMTZ1 LIMIT 3 I LIMTZ2 LIMIT 3 Treatment of the machine reference home switches I REFOX DECEL1 I REFOY DECEL2 2 DECEL3 Message treatment The PLC allows displaying the corresponding PLC message at the CNC screen by activating marks MSG1 through MSG128 This text must be previously edited at the PLC message table The following example shows how to generate a message to remind the ope
112. is turned off and the motor has no torque PLCFM19 M5464 M19FEED R505 Main spindle The CNC only considers the signals for the currently selected spindle The PLC uses the PLCM19 signal to indicate to the CNC the positioning and rapid synchronized speed value to assume when operating in closed loop M19 When this input is low the CNC assumes the value set by s m p REFEED1 P34 When this input is high the CNC assumes the value set by the spindle input register M19FEED R505 The M19FEED value is given in 0 0001 min PLCCNTL M5465 spindle The CNC considers these 2 signals at all times so both spindles can be controlled by the PLC This is used to tell the CNC that the spindle is controlled directly by the PLC high logic level 15 used for example for oscillating the spindle during a gear change or for changing tools The following example shows how a new spindle speed is selected involving a gear change 1 0 MSTROB 5 AUXEN 9 T 5 NTL 0 After analyzing the block and detecting the gear change the CNC indicates this to the PLC in one of the MBCD1 7 registers M41 to M44 and will activate the general logic output MSTROBE to tell the PLC that it must execute it LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS The PLC will deactivate the logic input AUXEND to tell the CNC that the treatment of the auxiliary function is startin
113. level 0 to these inputs The operating mode of each of these trigger inputs is explained individually Status output T This output indicates the logic status of the timer Itis referred to by the letter T followed by the number of the timer which it is required to reference for example T1 T25 T102 etc The logic status of the timer depends on the operating mode selected by means of the trigger inputs TG1 TG2 and TG4 and so the activation or deactivation of this signal is explained in each of the PLC operating modes Elapsed time T This output indicates the time elapsed in the timer since the moment it was activated It is referred to by the letter T followed by the number of the timer which it is required to reference for example T1 T25 T102 etc Although when written as T123 it coincides with the status output both are different and they are also used in different types of instruction In binary type instructions function T123 makes reference to the logic status of the timer T123 M100 Assigns mark to M100 the status 0 1 of Timer 123 In arithmetic and comparison functions T123 makes reference to the time elapsed in the timer from the moment it was activated I2 MOV T123 R200 Transfers the time of T123 to register R200 CPS T123 GT 1000 M100 Compares whether the time of T123 is greater than 1000 in which case it activates mark M100 The PLC has a 32 bit variable to store the time of each
114. not be greater than 15m 49ft Shielded cables with twisted pair wires should be used to avoid communication interference when using long cables Use shielded 7 conductor cable of 0 14 mm section Transmission speed The CNC can operate at up to 115 200 Baud It is recommended to ground the unused pins in order to avoid erroneous control and data signal interpretations Ground connection It is suggested to reference all control and data signals to the same ground cable pin 7 GND thus avoiding reference points at different voltages especially in long cables Recommended RS232C interface connection Simplified connection Full connection NC PC 9pin CNC 9 Hold Holc Iold N Hold pep o l lo FG CD O 1 2 RxD 4 TxD lt 4 TxD gt xD gt of gt JSR RTS gt crs o8 4 lt GND o9 2 FAGOR C 25pin CNC C 25pin Hold lold CNC 8035 gt FG O FC 4 E o RxD gt 85 psg gt 200 DTR E ae CTS gt 10 4 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x Connector X2 Digital inputs I1 to 116 and digital outputs O1 to O8 It is a 37 pin normal density SUB D type female connector Connect both 24V and OV of the power supply used for these inputs and outputs must be connected to pins 18 and 19 for OV and pins 1 and 20 for the 24V of the connector All shields must only be connected to ground at the CNC end through p
115. not necessary that the Can addresses of the various axes and spindles be consecutive and start from number 1 the address of the CNC is always 0 For example with Sercos axes and 1 Sercos spindle the values of this parameter must be 1 2 3 and 4 When working in open loop M3 M4 spindle speed variations may be in a step or in a ramp This parameter indicates the duration of the ramp in milliseconds for the maximum S If OPLACETI 0 it will be in a step Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 in steps E M Yi Sometimes the axis does not respond as desired on particular movements handwheel movements etc In these cases the response of the spindle may be smoothed by applying a filter to the speed changes This filter is set by parameter SMOTIME that indicates the duration of the filter in milliseconds value given by g m p LOOPTIME P72 Possible values Integers between 0 and 64 times the value assigned g m p LOOPTIME P72 If LOOPTIME 0 4 ms the maximum value that could be assigned to SMOTIME will be 64 x 4 256 ms Default value 0 not applied To obtain a better response parameter SMOTIME of the axes interpolating with each other should be set with the same value The spindle s response can also be smoothened when working in open loop M3 M4 In this case s m p OPLACETI P45 and SOMTIME P46 must be used
116. only be used when working with acceleration deceleration Possible values Between 0 and 100 99 rpm numbers with 2 decimals Default value 0 feed forward gain not applied Usually a value between 40 and 80 is assigned depending mainly on the type of machine and its characteristics SS SSS SSS SS EE When having a CNC witha version V11 01 orlater where FFGAIN or FFGAIN2 have two decimals when passing them to an older version those parameters lose their decimals Indicates the sign of the analog output If correct leave it as is but to change it select YES if it was set to NO and viceversa Possible values NO YES Default value NO Indicates the minimum analog output for this axis Possible values It is given in D A converter units and it admits integer values between 0 and 32767 which corresponds to an analog voltage of 10V Default value 0 MINANOUT Minimum analog output Indicates the analog offset value for the spindle drive Possible values It is given in D A converter units and it admits integer values between 0 and 32767 which corresponds to an analog voltage of 10V Default value 0 not applied SERVOFF Analog voltage BAKANOUT P29 Additional velocity command pulse to make up for the possible leadscrew backlash BAKTIME P30 DECINPUT P31 REFPULSE P32 REFDIREC P33 REFEED1 P34 when reversing the moving direction Possible values
117. or KeyCF OPT File explorer to show the contents of the storage devices INST OPT Loading the version from the Memkey card o from the hard disk OPT New way to search home that may be selected through g m p IOTYPE 3 INST Improved block search Switching from simulation to execution INST OPT New repositioning mode that is activated by setting g m p REPOSTY 1 INST PRG OPT Square sine ramps on open loop spindle INST Numbering of the local inputs outputs of the expansion modules using plc machine parameters INST Default value of axis and spindle machine parameter ACFGAIN YES INST Setting axis parameters FFGAIN and FFGAIN2 with two decimals INST Up to 400 DEF symbols now available at the PLC INST New HTOR variable that indicates the tool radius being used by the CNC INST PRG Spindle override in the whole threading cycle at 100 PRG Software V12 11 February 2006 List of features Handwheel feedback taken to a free feedback connector Manual INST New variables RIP GGSE GGSF GGSG GGSH GGSI GGSJ GGSK GGSL GGSM PRGSP and PRBMOD INST G04 KO Block preparation interruption and coordinate update PRG Software V12 13 June 2006 List of features Manual Smooth stop when homing the axes it may be selected with a m p IOTYPE INST Software V12 14 List of features August 2006 Selecting the additive handwheel as handwheel associated with the axis Manual INST Sof
118. outputs O1 1 one by one to verify their proper operation With power turned off connect the I O and feedback connectors to the CNC Connect the CNC and the electrical cabinet to A C power and confirm the counting direction of each axis Introduction to machine parameters The machine parameters relate the CNC to the particular machine The values that the CNC assigns to each one of them by default are described in the relevant chapter See chapter 4 Machine parameters These values shown in the parameter tables may be modified manually from the CNC s keyboard or from a peripheral cassette reader floppy disk reader computer etc via the RS 232C serial line Some characters appear next to certain parameters indicating when the CNC assumes the new value assigned to that parameter It is necessary to press the keystroke sequence Shift Reset or turn the CNC off and back on Just press Reset The rest of the parameters those unmarked will be updated automatically only by changing them Setting of the machine parameters for the axes Once the active axes have been assigned by means of g m p AXIS1 PO thru AXIS8 P7 the CNC will enable the relevant axes parameter tables The values to be assigned to the parameters of each of these tables will depend on the results obtained when adjusting each machine axis Before making this adjustment position the axes near the middle of their travel and place t
119. p NPULSES P13 must indicate the number of square pulses supplied by the spindle encoder In order to be able to use feedback alarm on the spindle encoder FBACKAL P15 the pulses provided by the encoder must be differential double ended squarewave DIFFBACK P14 YES Gain setting The various types of gains must be adjusted in order to optimize the system s performance for the programmed movements An oscilloscope is highly recommended to make this critical adjustment by monitoring FAGOR the tacho signals The illustration below shows the optimum shape for this signal the left and the instabilities to be avoided during start up and brake down CNC 8035 Vi Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 175 CONCEPTS Spindle FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 176 There are three types of gain They are adjusted by means of machine parameters and following the sequence indicated next Proportional gain It defines the analog output corresponding to a feedrate resulting in 1 of following error It is defined with s m p PROGAIN P23 Feed forward gain It sets the percentage of analog output dependent of the programmed feedrate To use it acc dec must be active s m p ACCTIME P18 It is defined with s m p FFGAIN P25 Derivative gain or AC forward gain The derivative gain sets the percentage of analog output applied depending on the fluctuations of following
120. pocket where the tool being in the spindle must be placed This indication will be made by means of the variable T2BCD R559 and by activating the general logic output T2STROBE to tell the PLC that it must execute this The CNC will wait for the general input AUXEND to be activated to consider the execution completed O installation manual ieu pu e pe p p pp jp It must be borne in mind that at the beginning of the execution of the block the CNC can tell the PLC the execution of the M S T and T2 functions by activating their STROBE signals together and waiting for a single signal AUXEND for all of them CONCEPTS Auxiliary M S T function transfer Ol FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x SOFT T V12 1x 167 5 Auxiliary 5 T function transfer FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 168 5 8 1 Transferring M S T using the AUXEND signal 1 Once the block has been analyzed and after sending the corresponding values in the MBCD1 7 SBCD TBCD and 2 variables the CNC will tell the PLC by means of the general logic outputs MSTROBE SSTROBE TSTROBE and T2STROBE that the required auxiliary functions must be executed MINAENDW MINAENDW 2 When the PLC detects the activation of one of the STROBE signals it must deactivate the general CNC logic input AUXEND to tell the CNC that the exe
121. probe signal while executing function G75 or G76 Value Meaning YES It issues the error message NO It does NOT issue the error message Default value NO gt 5 General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 61 General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 62 SERSPEED P120 Not being used SERPOWSE P121 Not being used LANGUAGE P122 Defines the work language Value Meaning Value Meaning 0 English 6 Portuguese 1 Spanish 7 Czech 2 French 8 Polish 3 Italian 9 Mainland Chinese 4 German 10 Basque 5 Dutch 11 Russian Default value 0 GEOMTYPE P123 It indicates whether the cutter geometry is associated with the tool T or with the tool SPOSTYPE P124 AUXSTYPE P125 FOVRG75 P126 CFGFILE P127 STEODISP P128 HDIFFBAC P129 offset D The T function tool number indicates the magazine position it occupies The D function offset indicates the tool dimensions Value Meaning 0 It is associated with the tool 1 It is associated with the tool offset Default value 0 When using a tool holding turret the same turret position is usually used by several tools In those cases the T function refers to the turret position and the D function to the dimensions and geometry of the tool occupying that position T
122. programming and later understanding of the PLC program much easier when trying to control the CNC by simulating its keyboard from the PLC program Example DEF HELP FFF2 Assigns the HELP symbol to the code for the HELP key MOV HELP R101 Assigns the code corresponding to the HELP key to register R101 CNCWR R101 KEY M101 Indicates to the CNC that the key whose code is stored in register R101 and corresponds to the HELP key The PLC allows up to 400 symbol definitions which must always be programmed at the beginning of the program before any other instruction be this directing or executing A symbol will be made up with up to 8 characters and must not coincide with any amp ofthe words reserved for instructions nor be formed by the characters space equal uo open and close parentheses comma and semicolon Duplicate symbols cannot be defined but several symbols may be assigned to the same resource Example DEF EMRGOUT O1 DEF SALEMRG O1 The symbols associated to specialized marks and register gt 2047 y R gt 2500 are pre defined inthe PLC and therefore itis not necessary to define them nevertheless and if required the PLC allows a different symbol to be assigned to them Indicate to the PLC that the consultations defined below will be made on the real REA or image IMA values of 1 M resources Counters timers and registers do not have image v
123. set when the drive s velocity command is analog or it is sent via CAN DRIBUSLE 0 or 1 When using gear reduction on the shaft only the whole assembly must be taken into account when setting one of parameters PITCH or NPULSES Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 65535 Default value 1250 al smmqgea When using CAN servo if both parameters NPULSES and PITCHB are set to 0 the will assume the equivalent values of the drive Indicates whetherthe spindle encoder uses differential signals double ended or not Value Meaning NO It does NOT use differential signals YES It uses differential signals Default value YES SINMAGNI P10 FBACKAL P11 FBALTIME P12 AXISCHG P13 Indicates the multiplying factor x1 x4 x20 etc that the CNC must apply only to sinusoidal feedback signal For square feedback signals this parameter must be set to 0 and the CNC will always apply a multiplying factor of x4 Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 255 Default value 0 The axis feedback resolution must be set using a m p PITCH P7 NPULSES P8 and SINMAGNI P10 as shown in the following table PITCH NPULSES SINMAGNI P7 P8 P10 Square signal encoder Leadscrew Nr of pulses 0 pitch Sinusoidal signal encoder Leadscrew Nr of pulses multiplying pitch factor Square signal linear encoder linear encoder
124. shaft only the whole assembly must be taken into account when setting one of parameters PITCHB or NPULSES EIE When using CAN servo if both parameters NPULSES and PITCHB are set to 0 the CNC will assume the equivalent values of the drive On Hirth axes itindicates its pitch in degrees When setto 0 itassumes a pitch value of 1 Possible values Between 0 and 99999 9999 degrees the remainder of 360 HPITCH must necessarily be zero Default value 1 Itadmits values other than 19 and decimal values When HPITCH is set with a decimal value the screen will show the coordinates with decimals Any stop or continuous jog movement will stop the axis in coordinates multiple of HPITCH The incremental jog movements will be similar to the ones carried out with a 1 degree pitch For incremental switch positions of 1 10 100 or 1000 it will move 1 step For an incremental switch position 10000 the movement will be multiple of the closest pitch to 10 and under 10 If the pitch value is greater than 10 it will move a single step Even if the position of a Hirth axis does not coincide with its Hirth pitch any other axis may be moved to a valid position in both automatic and jog modes An error message will be issued if the position to move the axis does not coincide with the pitch In any case it is possible to move any other axis in both automatic and jog modes gt Ax
125. software limits during block preparation it checks the theoretical coordinate ignoring the additional movement of the additive handwheel The mirror image by PLC is not applied to the additive handwheel movement Configuring the additive handwheel When enabling the additive handwheel the following must be borne in mind Ifthe DWELL parameter of an axis has been set and it is not previously in motion it activates the ENABLE mark of the axis and waits a time period indicated in DWELL to check whether its SERVOON has been activated or not The acceleration applied to the additive handwheel movement is that of parameter ACCTIME of the axis On Gantry axes the movement of the master axis using an additive handwheel is also applied to the slave axis The mirror image by PLC is not applied to the additive handwheel movement When testing the software limits during block preparation it checks the theoretical coordinate ignoring the additional movement of the additive handwheel The additive handwheel is configured by machine parameters and is activated and deactivated by PLC Activating and deactivating the additive handwheel The additive handwheel is activated and deactivated with the mark MANINT X C The PLC sets one of these signals high to activate the additive handwheel on each axis Only one additive handwheel may be enabled at a time If there are more than one mark active only the first one will be attended to
126. special tool change has been made family code or 200 or with machining centers with a non random tool magazine g m p RANDOMTC P25 The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that it must execute a second auxiliary T function indicated in the register T2BCD R559 In this register the CNC indicates to the PLC the position of the magazine in which the tool which was on the spindle must be placed It is used on punch presses that have an eccentric cam as a punching system The CNC sets this signal high a specific time period before the axes reach position This time is set by g m p ANTIME P69 This reduces idle time thus increasing the number of punches per minute INPOS M5539 The CNC uses these two signals to let the PLC know that the theoretical interpolation between axes has been completed INTEREND and that all the axes involved in the interpolation are in position INPOS The CNC sets the INTEREND signal high when the interpolation is ended being low while in execution When the CNC verifies that all the axes have been within the dead band in position zone INPOSW P19 for a time period indicated in the a m p INPOTIME P20 it will consider that all of them are in position and it will inform the PLC by setting the logic output INPOS high The logic output INTEREND can be used when itis required to activate mechanisms before the axes reach their position DMOO M5547 DMO1 M5546 DMO02 M55
127. spindle ACCTIME PROGAIN DERGAIN and FFGAIN Parameter ACTGAIN indicates when the CNC assumes the second set of gains and accelerations indicated by the parameters of the axis or of the spindle ACCTIME2 PROGAIN2 DERGAIN2 and FFGAIN2 This parameter has 16 bits counted from right to left bit 15 14 13 121110 9 876 54 3 2 10 mm m m m m m m mm mm sm m Each bit has a function or work mode associated with it By default all the bits will be assigned the value of 0 Assigning the value of 1 activates the corresponding function Bit Meaning Bit Meaning 0 8 G51 1 9 G50 2 10 3 11 4 JOG 12 5 Rigid tapping 13 G33 6 G95 14 G01 7 G75 G76 15 G00 Default value in all the bits 0 Every time each of these functions or work modes is activated the CNC checks the value assigned to the corresponding bit and acts as follows bit 0 applies the first of the sets ACCTIME PROGAIN etc bit 1 It applies the second of the sets ACCTIME2 PROGAIN2 etc When that function or work mode is deactivated the CNC applies the first of the sets ACCTIME PROGAIN Example When setting ACTGAIN2 1000 0000 0001 0000 the CNC applies the second set to all the axes and the spindle whenever function GO or the JOG mode is selected Considerations to bear in mind The change of gains and accelerations
128. status output T 0 and maintain the value it has at that moment as the timer time value T If once the timing has concluded it is required to activate the timer again another leading edge must be produced at the TG4 input Operation of the TRS input this mode If a leading edge is produced at the TRS input at any moment during timing or afterwards the PLC initializes the timer assigning the value 0 to its T status and cancelling its count it initializes this to 0 Due to the fact that the timer is initialized it will be necessary to activate its trigger input to activate it again Timers PLC RESOURCES Operation of the TEN input in this mode once the timer is activated TEN 0 is selected the PLC stops timing and it is necessary to assign TEN 1 for this timing to continue FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 219 Counters PLC RESOURCES FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 220 7 6 Counters These are elements capable of counting up or down a specific amount of events They do not have image values and are represented by the letter C followed by the counter number which it is required to reference for example C1 C25 C102 etc The count of a counter is stored in a 32 bit variable thus having a possible value of up to 2147483647 The PLC has 256 counter each of whic
129. structure Chassis Shield It admits differential double ended and non differential single ended TTL feedback The cable must have overall shielding The rest of the specifications depend on the feedback system used and the cable length required The cable shield must be connected to the metallic hood at each end Itis highly recommended to run these cables as far as possible from the power cables of the machine When using a FAGOR 100P model handwheel connect it as first handwheel and connect the axis selecting signal button to pin 13 FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 12 Connector X7 Digital outputs O33 to O48 It is a 37 pin normal density SUB D type female connector Connect both 24V and OV of the power supply used for these inputs and outputs must be connected to pins 18 and 19 for OV and pins 1 and 20 for the 24V of the connector All shields must only be connected to ground at the CNC end through pin 37 of the connector leaving the other end free The wires of the shielded cables cannot be unshielded for more than 75mm about 3 inches Pin Signal and function External power supply meth CNC CONFIGURATION CNC structure External power supply External power supply External power supply 5 3 0 20 o 00 80 7 0 60 gt 3 0 20 o 0000000000000000000 FAGOR 2 Chassis
130. the A axis 2 With the X axis 8 With the B axis 3 With the Z axis 9 With the C axis 4 With the U axis 10 Spindle 5 With the V axis Default value 0 Example On a machine where the X and Z axes cannot move at the same time the X axis is the main axis and the Z axis is the secondary associated with the X axis SWITCHAX for X 0 SWITCHAX for 1 gt x FAGOR 229 y L4 A CNC 8035 N N 2 88 SWINBACK P66 JERKLIM P67 When having 2 axes controlled by a single servo drive machine parameter SWINBACK of the secondary axis indicates whether it has its own feedback device or it uses that of the main axis it is associated with Value Meaning 0 It assumes the feedback of the main axis 1 It has its own feedback device Default value 0 The following examples show several possibilities In all of them the toggling of the analog voltage must be done from the PLC using the SWTCH2 mark A Each axis has its own feedback device X axis main SWINBACK of the X axis 0 Z axis Secondary SWINBACK of the Z axis 1 A X 27 N S1 J Se 2 N Bus y Z 4 2 gt a gt X The two axes share the same feedback device It must be connected to the feedback connector of the main axis X axis main SWINBACK of the X axis 0 Z axis Secondary SWINBACK of the Z axis 0 2 7 X 2 X 27 Y A 7 A 7 gt 7
131. the PLC are EMERGENCY OUTPUT Physical output to the outside EMERGEN M5000 Physical output to the CNC There are two ways to tell the PLC that an emergency condition must be treated by activating the physical input EMERGENCY STOP of the PLC which is I1 or the general logic input ALARM of the PLC which is mark M5507 In both cases the treatment of these signals will be up to the PLC programmer The PLC program must have the necessary instructions to properly attend to these emergency inputs and act accordingly By the same token the PLC program must have the necessary instructions to properly activate the emergency outputs when required These emergency signals are the physical output EMERGENCY OUTPUT output O1 of the PLC and the general logic output EMERGEN which is mark M5000 of the PLC It must be born in mind that every time a new PLC program cycle is initiated the real inputs are updated with the physical inputs Therefore input will have the value of the physical input EMERGENCY STOP Also before executing the PLC program cycle the values of the M and R resources corresponding to the CNC logic outputs internal variables are updated as well as mark M5507 corresponding to the ALARM signal After the execution of each cycle the PLC updates the physical outputs with the values of the real outputs except the physical output EMERGENCY OUTPUT which will be activated whenever the real output O1 or mark M5
132. the axis resolution format With 5 3mm type display format set MPGRES 1 With 4 4mm type display format set MPGRES 2 With 6 2mm type display format set MPGRES 0 Y MACHINE PARAMETERS General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 57 General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 58 MPG1CHG P83 MPG1RES P84 MPG1NPUL P85 MPG2CHG P86 MPG2RES P87 MPG2NPUL P88 MPG3CHG P89 MPG3RES P90 MPG3NPUL P91 CUSTOMTY P92 XFORM P93 XFORM1 P94 2 P95 Resolution MPGRES 0 MPGRES 1 MPGRES 2 5 3 mm Resolution 0 001 mm 0 010 mm 0 100 mm Pulses turn 0 100 mm 1 000 mm 10 000 mm 4 4mm Resolution 0 0001 mm 0 0010 mm 0 0100 mm Pulses turn 0 0100 mm 0 1000 mm 1 0000 mm 6 2 mm Resolution 0 01 mm 0 10 mm 1 00 mm Pulses turn 1 00 mm 10 000 mm 100 000 mm These parameters must be used when the machine has several electronic handwheels one per axis Set the a m p for the feedback input of the electronic handwheel AXIS1 PO through AXIS7 to one of the following values Value Meaning Value Meaning 21 Handwheel associated 26 Handwheel associated with X with W 22 Handwheel associated 27 Handwheel associated with Y with A 23 Handwheel associated 28 Handwheel associated with Z with B 24 Handwheel associated 29 Handwheel associated with U with C
133. the drive manual CONCEPTS Digital CAN servo The type of information available and its associated identifiers are Type of information Identifier DA1Value 34176 DA2Value 34177 DigitalOutputsValues 34178 VelocityCommand 00036 The VelocityCommand variable can be modified for the axes that have been selected as DRO axes by a m p DROAXIS P4 or via PLC by activating the logic CNC axis input DRO1 2 3 Service channel The service channel can only be accessed through a high level block of a part program a PLC channel or a user channel All variables can be accessed except the string type appearing in the drive manual Reading and writing from a part program or from a user channel Read P SVARaxis Write SVARaxis P Example P110 2 SVARX 40 It assigns to parameter P110 the value of the X axis variable with the identifier 40 which corresponds to VelocityFeedback Reading and writing from the PLC channel CNCEX SVARaxis M1 Write SVARaxis P M1 FAGOR 2 Example CNCEX SVARX 100 P120 M1 It assigns the value of parameter P120 to the X axis variable CNC 8035 with identifier 100 VelocityProportionalGain Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 185 O installation manual 5 12 Fagor handwheels HBE and LGB Fagor handwheels HBA HBE and LGB have a pulse generator encoder an emergency ou
134. the letter B and the bit number 0 31 in front of the selected register For example B7R155 Refers to bit 7 of register 155 The PLC considers bit 0 as being the one with least significance and bit 31 as being the one with most significance The value stored in a register can be treated as being decimal hexadecimal preceded by binary preceded by B or in BCD Example decimal 156 Hexadecimal 9C Binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1001 1100 7 5 Timers These are elements capable of maintaining their output at a determined logic level during a preset time time constant after which the output changes status They do not have image values and are represented by the letter T followed by the number of the timer it is required to reference for example T1 T25 T102 etc The time constant is stored in a 32 bit variable and so its value can be between 0 and 4294967295 milliseconds which is equivalent to 1193 hours almost 50 days The PLC has 256 timers each of which has T status output and TEN TRS TG1 TG2 and TG4 inputs It is also possible to consult at any moment the time which has elapsed from the moment it was activated Enable input TEN This input allows the timing of the timer to be stopped It is referred to by the letter TEN followed by the number of the timer which is wished to reference for example TEN 1 TEN 25 TEN 102 etc So that the time elapses within the timer thi
135. the machine reference point proceed as follows Indicate in the s m p REFPULSE P32 the type of marker pulse lo being used for Home Search Likewise set s m p REFDIREC P33 to indicate the direction of the axis when searching Home Onthe other hand set s m p REFEED1 P34 that defines the approach feedrate of the spindle until the home switch is pressed and s m p REFEED2 P35 that indicates the homing feedrate until the reference mark marker pulse is detected The machine reference point will be set to 0 s m p REFVALUE P36 Once in the JOG mode and after positioning the spindle in the right area start homing the spindle When done the will assign a value to this point FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 178 After moving the spindle to the Machine Reference Zero up to a known position with respect to Machine Reference Zero observe the position reading of the CNC for that point This will be distance from the Machine Reference Zero to that point Therefore the value to be assigned to s m p REFVALUE P36 which defines the coordinate corresponding to the Machine Reference Point physical location of the marker pulse REFVALUE P36 Machine coordinate CNC reading Example If the point whose known position is located at 12 mm from Machine Reference Zero and the CNC reads 123 5 as the coordinate value for this point the coordinate of the Machi
136. the table and execute the profile 10 4 mm in the table and execute the profile 10 3 mm in the table and execute the profile 10 2 mm in the table and execute the profile 10 1 mm in the table and execute the profile 10 0 mm in the table and execute the profile However if while machining the program is interrupted or a reset occurs the table assumes the radius value assigned in that instant e g 10 2 mm Its value has changed To avoid this instead of modifying the tool radius in the TOR table use the variable HTOR to change the tool radius value used by the CNC to calculate Now if the program is interrupted the tool radius value initially assigned in the TOR table will be correct because it has not changed Variables associated with tools Read and write variables of the mill model CNC This variable allows the value assigned to the radius of the indicated tool offset n in the tool offset table to be read or modified ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES CNCRD TOR3 R100 M102 Assigns the R value of tool offset 3 to register R100 CNCWR R101 TOR3 M101 Assigns the value indicated in R101 to the radius of tool offset 3 This variable allows the value assigned to the length of the indicated tool offset n to be read or modified in the tool offset table This variable allows the value assigned to the wear in radius 1 of the indicated tool offset n to be read or modified in the tool offse
137. this Therefore it is crucial to install one or two ground points where the above mentioned elements must be connected Use large section cables for this purpose in order to obtain low impedance and efficiently avoid any interference This way all parts of the installation will have the same voltage reference Proper ground installation reduces the effects of electrical interference But signal cables also require additional protections This is generally achieved by using twisted pair cables that are also covered with antistatic shielding mesh wire This shield must be connected to a specific point avoiding ground loops that could cause undesired effects This connection is usually done at one of CNC s ground point Each element of the machine tool CNC interface must be connected to ground via the established main points These points will be conveniently set close to the machine tool and properly connected to the general ground of the building When a second point is necessary it is recommended to join both points with a cable whose section is no smaller than 8 mm Verify that the impedance between the central point of each connector housing and the main ground point is less than 1 O O O installation manual Ground connection diagram AXES SPINDLE Feedback Drives HANDWHEELS X10 X11 X12 X13 X X4 KA us 1 51 a INPUTS OUTPUTS MACHINE AND POWER CONNECTION Ground
138. timer Timers PLC RESOURCES FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 211 Timers PLC RESOURCES FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 212 7 5 1 Monostable mode TG1 input In this operational mode the timer status is kept at the high logic level 1 from the moment the TG1 input is activated until the time indicated by the time constant elapses If the timer is initialized with values 1 and TRS 0 the timer will be activated when a leading edge is produced at input TG1 At that moment the timer status output T changes status 1 and timing t starts from a value of 0 1 Once the time specified by the time constant has elapsed timing will be considered as having finished The timer status output T changes status T 0 and the elapsed time will be maintained with the time value of the timer T Any alteration which may be produced in input TG1 leading or trailing edge during the timing operation will have no effect whatsoever If once the timing is complete it is required to activate the timer again another leading edge must be produced at the TG1 input Operation of the TRS input this mode If a leading edge is produced at the TRS input at any moment during timing or afterwards the PLC initializes the timer assigning the value 0 to its T status and cancelling its count it initializes this to 0 Due to the fac
139. to 1 internal marks M100 through M102 and reset the SENDKEY flag to M100 CNCWR KEYCODE KEY M100 Sends to the CNC the code of the key to be simulated KEYCODE If this command is not executed correctly M100 1 the PLC will try again on the next cycle scan M101 AND NOT M100 CNCRD KEY LASTKEY M101 If the previous command was executed correctly M100 0 it reads the last key accepted by the CNC LASTKEY M102 AND NOT M101 AND CPS LASTKEY EQ KEYCODE If the previous command was executed correctly M101 0 and the CNC accepted the key sent to it LASTKEY KEYCODE RES M102 SET SENTOK the flag is turned off M102 0 and the key is considered to be sent out successfully 1 NOT M101 But if the CNC did not accept the key sent to it it waits until it does M101 1 End of subroutine END End of program z ar AGC O O installation manual APPENDIX Technical specifications of the CNC 349 Probe METT 353 Summary of internal CNC variables 355 Summary of PLC commands eese 361 Summary of PLC inputs and outputs 365 2 digit BCD code output conversion table 371 Key AAA
140. to be read from the drives is received in other registers of the PLC The registers to be used and the data to be transmitted basically variable are defined by machine parameters of the PLC Use SRR700 P28 through SRR739 P67 parameters to transmit read only variables Use SWR800 P68 through SWR819 P87 parameters to transmit write variables The number of variables defined in this channel is limited depending on the number of axes the sampling period and the transmission speed A data overflow causes an error at the CNC Service channel slow channel Data to be transmitted in several position loops monitoring etc The service channel can only be accessed through a high level block of a part program a PLC channel or a user channel Si CONCEPTS Digital CAN servo FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 183 5 Digital CAN servo FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 184 Cyclic channel Read only variables for the CNC PLC The plc m p SRR700 P28 through SRR739 P67 indicate which drive and what type of information will be placed in CNC registers R700 through R739 P28 gt R700 29 701 P30 gt R702 1 703 etc These parameters are set 1 5 format The units digit identifies the drive node supplying the data and the decimals indicate the identifier number see table below For example P32 1 00040 indicates that PLC reg
141. to s m p REFPULSE P32 This parameter must indicate the type of active flank leading ortrailing edge positive or negative of the reference mark lo used by the CNC Spindle CONCEPTS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 179 5 Treatment of emergency signals FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 180 5 10 Treatment of emergency signals The CNC provides the following emergency signals EMERGENCY STOP Physical emergency input It is generated from the outside and corresponds to the physical emergency input This signal is active low 0 V EMERGENCY OUTPUT Physical emergency output It is generated internally when an error is detEcted at the CNC or at the PLC This signal is active low 0 V EMERGEN M5000 Logic input of the CNC generated by the PLC When the PLC activates this signal the CNC stops the axes feed and the rotation of the spindle and it displays the corresponding error message This signal is active low 0 V ALARM M5507 Logic input of the PLC generated by the CNC The CNC activates this signal to let the PLC know that an alarm or emergency condition has occurred This signal is active low 0 V CNC Treatment of emergency signals The emergency inputs of the CNC are EMERGEN M5000 Physical input coming from the PLC EMERGENCY STOP Physical input coming from the outside Pin 10 of connec
142. torque ELIMINA2 M5163 ELIMINA3 M5213 If the PLC sets one these signals high the CNC does not display the corresponding axis but keeps controlling it Same as when setting a m p DFORMAT P1 3 The ELIMINA mark can be activated and deactivated at any time and it also cancels the feedback alarms which the machine parameter does not do Axis logic inputs LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 267 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Axis logic inputs FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 268 SMOTOF1 M5114 SMOTOF2 M5154 SMOTOFS M5214 LIM1OFF M5115 MANINT1 M5116 The SMOTIME P58 filter set for each axis with parameter P58 can be canceled from the PLC This SMOTIME filter will be activated or deactivated at the beginning of the block If one of these logic inputs is activated or deactivated while the CNC is overlapping blocks being executed in round corner it will be ignored until that operation is finished LIM2OFF M5165 M5215 The PLC sets one of these signals high so that the CNC ignores the software limits of the corresponding axis MANINT2 M5166 M5216 The PLC sets one of these signals high to activate the additive handwheel on each axis Only one additive handwheel may be enabled at a time If there are more than one mark active only the first one will be attended to
143. turned on when the USB device is either inserted or extracted it will be recognized immediately When it is connected it will be shown as USB hard disk on the left panel of the explorer To see its contents press the update refresh softkey Within the USB device the CNC will only recognize files with extensions software version FPGA files and part programs The CNC will not recognize any other type of file Check it by selecting USB hard disk on the left panel of the explorer The right panel only shows the files stored with the extensions mentioned earlier Only software versions can be transferred to the CNC s hard disk KeyCF through this USB device It can also be transferred from the USB to the hard disk KeyCF WARNING Part programs cannot be edited or executed from the USB hard disk To install new software version stored in the USB hard disk first copy the file into the hard disk KeyCF Once the software version has been copied into the KeyCF the transferred version may be installed This is done using the tools of the explorer See the section Loading the version from the hard disk in the 8035 CNC manual WARNING A new software version cannot be installed directly from the USB hard disk D u H M M From versions V11 1x and V12 1x on the CNC will manage the hard disk KeyCF and the USB hard
144. used when working with the spindle in closed loop and it indicates the acceleration time given to reach the maximum speed set by s m p MAXVOLT1 P37 thru MAXVOLT4 P40 in each gear This time is also valid for the deceleration stage Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 there is no control Indicates the width of the IN POSITION zone where the CNC considers the spindle to be in position when working in closed loop M19 Possible values Between 0 and 99999 9999 degrees Default value 0 01 degrees Indicates the time period that the spindle must remain in the IN POSITION zone in order to consider it to be in position This prevents the CNC from considering the spindle to be in position and executing the next block on those machines where the spindle could just overshoot the IN POSITION zone Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 Indicates the maximum following error allowed for the spindle when moving in closed loop M19 Possible values Between 0 and 99999 9999 degrees Default value 30 degrees Indicates the maximum following error allowed forthe spindle when stopped in closed loop M19 Possible values Between 0 and 99999 9999 degrees Default value 0 1 degrees Y Spindle parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 97 PROGAIN P23 The CNC takes this paramete
145. while retracing is active all the possible blocks have been retraced For further information see general input RETRACE 5051 This output is only available on the lathe model The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the constant cutting speed function is selected G96 SELECTO M5524 SELECT1 M5525 SELECT2 M5526 SELECTS M5527 SELECT4 M5528 SELECTS M5529 SELECT6 M5530 SELECT7 M5531 SELECTOR R564 The CNC uses these signals to indicate to the PLC the position selected at each keyboard switch SELECTOR indicates the position currently selected SELECT indicates the value applied by the CNC Usually the two values coincide except when a position has been selected which has been disabled with the KEYDIS4 input R503 If while being the 60 and 120 1 0 inhibited the 100 position is selected SELECTOR will show the selected position 100 and SELECT will show the value being applied 50 SELECTOR bit 7 i i bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 SELECT SELECTO pemr 3 o DD P LC peu qc poseer qnos ee eS 12121310 201314 NEN pu O General logic outputs pum E E LONE 020 eee EE EE EON masses 0 ofi 9 3 L7 1 2 Feedrate 1 1 1 38 override1096 Feedrate override 1 1 48 20 Feedrate override 1 1
146. will be turned off the flag for the next stage M124 is activated MOV ENTER KEYCODE SET SENDKEY ease and the code for the ENTER key is sent out M124 AND SENTOK RES M124 RES SENTOK SET M125 If the previous key was sent out successfully flags M124 and SENTOK will be turned off the flag for the next stage M125 is activated MOV THEOPATH KEYCODE SET SENDKEY and the code for the THEORETICAL PATH 1 is sent out M125 AND SENTOK RES M125 RES SENTOK SET M126 If the previous key was sent out successfully flags M125 and SENTOK will be turned off the flag for the next stage M126 is activated MOV START KEYCODE SET SENDKEY and the code for the START key is sent out O installation manual M126 AND SENTOK RES M126 RES SENTOK If the last key was sent out successfully SENTOK flags M126 and SENTOK will be turned off En x Main module PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x SOFT T V12 1x 345 PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE GO Main module FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 346 MOV CNCKEY KEYBOARD CNCWR KEYBOARD KEYSRC M100 and the is told that from now on the keys will be coming from keyboard CNCKEY not from the PLC Subroutine used to send a key SENDKEY SET M100 SET M101 SET M102 RES SENDKEY To send a key SENDKEY set
147. with MDISL R102 it issues error 10 This error must be defined in the PLC messages M101 AND CPS R102 NE 0 MOV R101 R201 R102 R202 If there is a new program in execution M101 and the speed has been limited with MDISL R102 it copies the program number and the speed limit M102 AND CPS R102 NE 0 MOV R102 R202 If the same program is in execution M102 and the speed is limited again with MDIS R102 it copies the speed limit M100 AND CPS R202 LT R103 CNCWR R202 PLCSL M1000 If there is a program in execution M100 and the speed limit with MDISL R202 is smaller than the limit by CNC R103 it applies the limit by PLC value set by MDISL M100 AND CPS R202 GT R103 CNCWR R210 PLCSL M1000 If there is a program in execution M100 and the speed limit with MDISL R202 is greater than the limit by CNC R103 it does not limit the speed by PLC R210 0 DFD M100 CNCWR R210 PLCSL M1000 CNCWR R210 MDISL M1000 After the execution it cancels the speed limit by PLC and initializes the MDISL variable END CONCEPTS Machine safety related functions FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 191 O installation manual 5 13 2 Cycle start disabled when hardware errors occur If when pressing the CYCLE START key a hardware error is detected Axes board error CAN board error etc the CNC does not allow executing or simulating the program
148. 0 m min When using Fagor linear encoder the maximum feedrate is limited by their own characteristics to 60 m min CONCEPTS feedback system Ol FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 145 5 feedback system FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 146 Example 5 Resolution in inches with squarewave encoder Calculate the necessary squarewave encoder line count and parameter settings to obtain 0 0001 inch counting resolution on a 4 pitch ballscrew 4 turns inch 0 25 inch rev Since the CNC applies a x4 multiplying factor to squarewave signals we would require an encoder which provides the following number of pulses lines per turn Nr of pulses ballscrew pitch multiplying factor x Resolution Nr pulses 0 25 4 x 0 0001 625 pulses turn Therefore INCHES 1 0 25000 NPULSES 625 SINMAGNI 0 Although the CNC accepts a maximum squarewave frequency of 400 KHz when using Fagor squarewave rotary encoders their output frequency is limited to 200KHz thus the maximum possible feedrate F will be Max feedrate 200 000 pulses sec 625 pulses turn x 0 255 inch turn Max feedrate 80 inch sec 4800 inch min Example 6 Resolution in inches with sinewave encoder We would like to obtain a0 0001 inch resolution by using a 250 line sinewave encoder mounted on a leadscrew with a 5 turns inch pitch We must calculate
149. 035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 68 TOOLMATY P164 When using a non random tool magazine e g a turret it indicates how many tools MAXOFFI P165 MAXOFFK P166 TOOLTYPE P167 may be assigned to each turret position When defined with a 0 value in a non random magazine the tools must be placed in the tool magazine table in the pre established order P1 T1 P2 T2 P3 etc Value Meaning 0 One tool per position 1 Several tools per position Default value 0 Tool wear offsets may be modified from tool inspection mode This parameter indicates the maximum amount of wear that may be entered for I itis programmed in mm or in inches It is defined in diameter at the lathe model Default value 0 5 Tool wear offsets may be modified from tool inspection mode This parameter indicates the maximum amount of wear that may be entered for K itis programmed in mm or in inches Default value 0 5 It defines the behavior of the tool or of the tool offset This parameter has 16 bits counted from right to left bit 1514131211109 8 7 654321 0 m m m mmm mimm Each bit has a function or work mode associated with it By default all the bits will be assigned the value of 0 Assigning the value of 1 activates the corresponding function Bit Meaning 0 12 Not being used 13 The STOP signal is always executed after the T function 14 Machining in rou
150. 1 B5 R502 B6 R502 B13 R501 B10 R504 B9 R504 Bo R504 Os B8 R501 B9 R501 B10 R501 B11 R501 B12 R501 B31 R501 B26 R501 B29 R501 B27 R501 B7 R502 15 B16 BO B24 R501 R500 B1 B25 R501 R500 B2 26 R501 500 B3 B27 9501 R500 B4 28 9501 500 B30 B29 501 R500 B25 B30 9501 500 B28 B31 R501 500 B24 B19 R501 R501 B22 R501 17 R504 R502 R502 B18 R502 B7 21 B20 R502 B22 R504 R502 R502 S B16 R500 B17 R500 B18 R500 B19 R500 B20 R500 B21 R500 B22 R500 B23 R500 B18 R501 B8 R504 B8 R500 B9 R500 B10 R500 B11 BO R500 B1 R500 B2 R500 B3 R500 R500 B12 R500 B13 R500 B14 R500 B15 R500 B17 R501 B4 R500 5 R500 B6 R500 B7 R500 B16 R501 B5 R501 2 B15 R502 B31 R502 APPENDIX Key inhibiting codes FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 377 O installation manual APPENDIX Key inhibiting codes FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x MACHINE PARAMETER SETTING CHART General machine parameters APPENDIX Machine parameter setting chart ex FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x
151. 1 58 30 Feedrate override 40 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Feedrate override 50 N Feedrate override 60 Feedrate override 70 Feedrate override 80 FAGOR 2 8035 00 Feedrate override 90 Feedrate override 100 Feedrate override 110 Feedrate override 120 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 283 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS General logic outputs FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 284 MSTROBE M5532 SSTROBE M5533 TSTROBE M5534 T2STROBE M5535 ADVINPOS M5537 INTEREND 5538 The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that it must execute the auxiliary M function or functions which are indicated in registers MBCD1 to MBCD7 R550 to R556 This signal will be used when operating a spindle with BCD coded S signal SPDLTYPE PO The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that it must execute the auxiliary S function which is indicated in the register R557 The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that it must execute the auxiliary S function which is indicated in the register TBCD R558 In this register the CNC will tell the PLC the position of the magazine where the selected tool is If the g m p RANDOMTC P25 has been set so it is not a random magazine the magazine pocket position coincides with the tool number This register is used when a
152. 200 kHz 5 Maximum gap between flanks 460 ns Phase shift 90 20 High threshold logic level 1 1 25 V lt Vj lt 7 V Low threshold logic level 0 7 V My 1 V Vmax 7 V Hysteresis 0 25 V Maximum differential input current mA FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x Connectors and connection Power supply 3 prong male Phoenix connector 7 65 mm pitch Power supply 1 i Power supply 0 Chassis Shield Use an independent external power supply with the following specifications Nominal voltage 20 V minimum 30 V maximum Ripple 4V Nominal current 2A Current peak on power up CNC structure CNC CONFIGURATION The central unit has a protection against overvoltage that activates at 36 V The supply current has the following shape on power up FAGOR 2 8035 M V11 1x T V12 1x Connector 1 RS232 It is a 9 pin SUB D type male connector to connect the RS 232 C serial port The cable shield must be connected to the metallic hood at each end meth 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CNC structure All the pins of this connector are opto isolated Cable length CNC CONFIGURATION EIA RS232C standards specify that the capacitance of the cable must not exceed 2500pF therefore since average cables have a capacitance between 130pF and 170pF per meter the maximum length of the cable should
153. 35 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 48 RANDOMTC P25 Indicates whether the tool magazine is random or not On a random magazine the tools may occupy any position pocket If this machine parameter is set for random magazine g m p 6 P28 must be set for machining center On a non random magazine the tool always occupies its own pocket The magazine position number is the same as the tool number Value Meaning YES is a random tool magazine NO It is not a random tool magazine Default value NO In anon random magazine the tools must be placed in the tool magazine table in the pre established order P1 T1 P2 T2 P3 T3 etc Optionally g m p TOOLMATY P164 may be used to assign several different tools to each tool position TOOLMONI P26 Selects the display units of the tool s nominal and real lives Value Meaning 0 Tool life in minutes 1 Tool life in number of operations Default value 0 NTOFFSET P27 Indicates the number of tool offsets available in the tool offset table On the other hand the CNC adjusts the length of the tool offset magazine table to that value Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 255 Default value 100 TOFFMO6 P28 Indicates whether the machine is a machining center or not If it is the CNC will select at the tool magazine the tool indicated when executing the T function and it will be necessary to execute MO6 afterwards i
154. 45 DMO03 M5544 DMO04 M5543 DMO5 M5542 DMO6 M5541 DMO8 M5540 DMOO9 M5555 DM19 M5554 DM30 M5553 DM41 M5552 The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the auxiliary function MOO program stop is programmed in the block being executed The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the auxiliary function MO1 conditional stop is programmed in the block being executed The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the auxiliary function M02 program end is programmed in the block being executed The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the spindle is turning clockwise or that the auxiliary function is programmed in the block being executed The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the spindle is turning counter clockwise or that the auxiliary function MO4 is programmed in the block being executed The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the spindle is stopped or that the auxiliary function MO5 is programmed in the block being executed The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the spindle is stopped or that the auxiliary function MO6 is programmed in the block being executed tool change The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the coolant output is activated or that the auxiliary function M08 is programmed in the block being executed The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the coolant output is deactivated o
155. 5 5 1 1 Rotary axes With this CNC it is possible to select the type of rotary axis by means of a m p AXISTYPE PO Normal rotary axis AXISTYPE 2 Positioning only axis AXISTYPE P0 Rotary Hirth axis AXISTYPE 4 5 By default their position is always displayed between 0 and 360 Rollover axis these limits are not to be set modify a m p ROLLOVER P55 ROLLOVER YES Rotary axis display between 0 and 360 ROLLOVER NO No display limits CONCEPTS Axes and coordinate systems Although the display is limited between 0 and 360 the internal count is accumulative Therefore a m p LIMIT P5 and LIMIT P6 should be set to limit the maximum number of turns in each direction When both parameters are set to 0 the axis can move indefinitely in either direction rotary tables indexers etc See 4 3 Axis parameters on page 74 When using leadscrew error compensation set positions 0 and 360 first and last point of the table with the same amount of error This way the CNC will apply the same compensation in all the revolutions See 5 5 7 Leadscrew error compensation on page 155 Normal rotary axes They can interpolate with linear axes GOO and G01 movement Absolute coordinate programming G90 The sign indicates the turning direction and the end coordinate the position between 0 and 359 9999 Incremental coordinate programming G91 The sign indicates the turnin
156. 507 ALARM signal coming from the is active 5 11 Digital servo CAN communication requires a drive version V7 02 or later G m p CANSPEED P169 may be used to set the CAN communication speed 5 11 1 Communications channel The data exchange between the CNC and the drives takes place in each position loop The more data to be transmitted the more overloaded the transmission will be These registers should be limited leaving only the ones absolutely necessary after the setup On the other hand there is data that MUST be transmitted at each position loop velocity commands feedback etc and other information that could be transmitted in various loops monitoring etc Since the CNC must know the priority for those transmissions from now on we will use the terms cyclic channel and service channel to refer to each of them Cyclic channel fast channel Data transmitted at each position loop velocity commands feedback etc At every loop time the CNC transmits to the drive through this channel the World Control Speed Enable Drive Enable Homing Enable bit handshake and the velocity command The drive transmits to the CNC the Word Status and the position value The transmitted data depends on a m p DRIBUSLE P63 The type of data to be transmitted basically variables must be indicated The data to be sent to the drives must be placed in certain particular registers of the PLC and the data
157. 561 B4 R562 B15 R561 B5 R562 B8 BO 24 B16 B8 BO R561 561 R560 R560 R560 R560 B9 B1 25 B17 B9 B1 R561 R561 R560 R560 560 R560 B10 B2 B26 B18 B10 B2 R561 561 R560 R560 R560 R560 B11 B3 B27 B19 B11 B3 R561 561 R560 R560 R560 R560 Bi2 B4 B28 B20 B12 B4 R561 R561 R560 R560 560 R560 B31 B30 B29 B21 B13 BS R561 R561 R560 R560 R560 R560 B26 B25 B30 B22 B14 R561 9561 560 R560 R560 R560 B29 B28 B31 B23 B15 B7 R561 561 R560 R560 560 R560 B6 B27 B24 B19 B17 816 R562 R561 R561 R561 R561 R561 R561 B13 B7 B22 B8 B5 R561 R562 R561 R563 R561 B10 B15 B16 17 R563 563 R562 R562 B9 B18 B20 R563 R562 R562 B31 BO B7 B21 B22 R562 563 R563 562 R562 S 2 APPENDIX Logic outputs of key status FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 375 O installation manual APPENDIX Logic outputs of key status FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x KEY INHIBITING CODES Alphanumeric operator panel M T models B6 504 5 R504 B4 R504 B3 R504 B2 R504 B1 R504 B8 R502 B9 R502 BO B1 R502 R502 B14 R501 B10 B25 R502 R502 B23 B24 R502 R502 B26 R502 B2 R502 B7 R501 B3 R502 B6 501 B4 R502 B15 R50
158. 9 LT Operators Inverts the result of the consulting instruction it precedes Performs the logic function AND between consulting instructions Performs the logic function OR between consulting instructions Performs the logic function EXCLUSIVE OR between consulting instructions Assignment Binary Action Instructions 1 512 Inputs 1 512 Outputs M 1 5957 Marks TEN 1 256 Timer enable TRS 1 256 Timer reset TGn 1 256 n R Timer trigger input CUP 1 256 Counter count up CDW 1 256 Counter count down CEN 1 256 Counter enable CPR 1 256 n R Counter preset B 0 31 R 1 499 Register Bits Conditioned binary actions instructions SET If the logic expression is 1 this action assigns a 1 to the resource RES If the logic expression is 1 this action assigns a 0 to the resource CPL If the logic expression is 1 this action complements the logic state of the resource SET 11 512 RES 1 512 CPL M 1 5957 B 0 31 R 1 559 Sequence breaking action instructions JMP L 1 256 Unconditional Jump RET Return or End of Subroutine CAL L 1 256 Call to a Subroutine Arithmetic action instructions Transfers the logic states of the indicated source to the indicated destination NGU Complements all register bits NGS Changes the sign of the Register contents ADS Adds the contents of a two r
159. 9999 9999 mm or 3937 00787 inches When defining the profile points in the table the following requirements must be met The axis points must be in sequential order starting from the most negative least positive point to be compensated For those points outside the compensation zone the CNC will apply the compensation value corresponding to the table point closest to them When both leadscrew and cross compensations are applied on the same axis the CNC will apply the sum of the two Tables MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 121 O installation manual Tables MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x CONCEPTS A It is recommended to save the machine parameters as well as the PLC program and files into the memkey card CARDA or in a peripheral or PC to avoid losing them 51 Axes and coordinate systems Given that the objective of the CNC is to control the movement and positioning of axes it is necessary to determine the position of the point to be reached through the coordinates The CNC allows you to use absolute relative or incremental coordinates throughout the same program Axis nomenclature The axes are named according to DIN 66217 Characteristics of the system of axes FAGOR X and Y main movements on the main work plane of the machine Z parallel to the main axis of the machine perpen
160. 9999999 1 Tool table for lathe model CNC The length X Z radius R and wear offset I K values of the tool are given in the units set by g m p INCHES If INCHES 0 in ten thousandths of a millimeter 999999999 If INCHES 1 in hundred thousandths of an inch 393700787 If rotary axis in ten thousandths of a degree 999999999 Variables associated with tools The location tool shape code F will be an integer between 0 and 9 Tool table at the mill model CNC The tool offset number is an integer between 0 and 255 The maximum number of tool offsets is limited by g m p NTOFFSET ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES The family code is a number between 0 and 255 to 199 if it is a normal tool 200 255 if it is a special tool The nominal life is given either in minutes or in operations 0 65535 The real actual life is given either in hundredths of a minute 0 9999999 or in operations 0 999999 Tool table at the lathe model CNC The tool offset number is an integer between 0 and 255 The maximum number of tool offsets is limited by g m p NTOFFSET The family code is a number between 0 and 255 0 to 199 if it is a normal tool 200 to 255 if itis a special tool The nominal life is given either in minutes or in operations 0 65535 The real actual life is given either in hundredths of a minute 0 9999999 or in operations 0 999999 FAGOR The cutter angle is give
161. ABLE signal is to be output If the SERVOSON signal is high the CNC will allow the spindle to rotate by activating the ENABLE signal and providing the required analog output voltage SERVOSON 4 pp On the other hand if the SERVOSON signal is low or if it changes to low during the rotation of the spindle the CNC will stop the axes feed and the spindle rotation displaying the corresponding error message DWELL lt gt 0 If s m p DWELL P17 has been set to other than 0 the CNC will check the status of the SERVOSON signal at the time when the ENABLE signal is to be output If the SERVOSON signal is high the CNC will allow the spindle to rotate by activating the ENABLE signal and providing the required analog output voltage On the other hand if the SERVOSON signal is low the CNC will activate the ENABLE signal and after waiting for a time period indicated by the value given to DWELL the CNC checks the SERVOSON signal again If itis high the required spindle analog voltage will be output If low the CNC will stop the axes feed and the spindle rotation displaying the corresponding error message DWELL WELL ra Lal Also if it changes to low during the rotation of the spindle the CNC will stop the axes feed and the spindle rotation displaying the corresponding error message GEAR1 M5458 GEAR2 M5459 M5460 GEAR4 M5461 spindle The PLC uses these
162. AC 1 When finding a block that contains an S or a T function When finding a high level language block In all cases the CNC activates the RETRAEND M5522 signal to let the PLC know that all possible blocks have been executed While the retracing function is active neither tool inspection nor MDI operations are possible Retracing cannot be activated while a canned cycle is active or when working in look ahead ACTLIM2 M5052 The PLC sets this signal high to tell to the CNC to activate the second travel limits set by means of variables LIMPL X C and LIMMI X C The second travel limit of each axis will be taken into account if the first one has been set using a m p LIMIT P5 and LIMIT P6 General logic inputs LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 261 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS General logic inputs FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 262 HNLINARC 5053 This signal is used when either the path handwheel or path jog work mode has been selected using general input MASTRHND 5054 It allows selecting the type of movement 5053 0 Linear path M5053 1 Arc path For a linear path the path angle must be indicated by the MASLAN variable and for an arc the center coordinates must be indicated by the MASCFI and MASCSE variables Variables MASLAN MASCFI and MASCSE may be re
163. AGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 25 HEAT DISSIPATION Heat dissipation by air flow to the outside using a fan FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 26 2 3 Heat dissipation by air flow to the outside using a fan Heat dissipation by convection forcing hot air flow to flow outside with a fan and ambient air input through the holes of the bottom surface of the enclosure For this case calculate the necessary air flow that the fan must supply to dissipate the heat generated inside the enclosure The fan s air flow is calculated according to the power dissipated by the CNC and the fan itself as well as the inside and outside temperatures Surface without paint 6 3 8 o AT Q4 40 y must be borne mind that this air flow through the unit allows extracting hot air out but it may let dust in A filter should be placed in order to maintain the permitted ambient conditions MACHINE AND POWER CONNECTION A Power switch e This power switch must be mounted in such a way that itis easily accessed and at a distance between 0 7 meters 27 5 inches and 1 7 meters 5 51 off the floor Install this unit in the proper place e t is recommended to install the CNC away from coolants chemical products possible blows etc which could damage it Mains connection of the central unit The Central Unit
164. AGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 265 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Axis logic inputs FAGOR 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 266 DRO1 M5106 DRO2 M5156 M5206 These inputs together with the corresponding SERVOON inputs make it possible to operate with the axes as DRO In order for the axis to work in DRO mode its DRO input must be high and its corresponding SERVOON input must be low When an axis works as a DRO the positioning loop is open and its following error is ignored while in motion If the DRO signal is brought back low the axis will no longer behave as a DRO and the CNC will take as position value its current position assigning a 0 value to the following error SERVO10ON M5107 SERVO2ON M5157 SERVOS3ON M5207 When one of these signals is set high the CNC closes the positioning loop of the corresponding axis If set low the CNC does not close the position loop of the axis Any position deviation is stored as following error thus when the signal gets back high the axis moves to return to position These signals are controlled by the PLC and when the positioning loop is to be closed they will be processed by the CNC according to the value given to machine parameter DWELL P17 for the axes DWELL 0 When a m p DWELL P17 for the axis to be moved is set to 0 the CNC will check the status of the SERVOON signal at the ti
165. AXIS 1 JOGON AND 175 AND YSEL 5 2 JOGON AND 175 AND ZSEL 5 3 JOGON AND 175 AND 4SEL AXIS 4 JOGON AND 175 AND 5SEL 5 5 JOGON AND 175 AND 6SEL 5 6 JOGON AND 175 AND 7SEL AXIS 7 If JOG movement JOGON and key pressed 177 then axis movement in the negative direction JOGON AND 177 AND XSEL AXIS 1 JOGON AND 177 AND YSEL AXIS 2 JOGON AND 177 AND ZSEL AXIS 3 JOGON AND 177 AND 4SEL AXIS 4 JOGON AND 177 AND 5SEL AXIS 5 JOGON AND 177 AND 6SEL AXIS 6 JOGON AND 177 AND 7SEL AXIS 7 If JOG movement JOGON and Rapid key pressed 176 axis movement in rapid JOGON AND 176 MANRAPID Safety When releasing the Enable Push Button the STOP command is sent out to the CNC 100 ms pulse to stop the possible movement active at the time for example 10 mm in incremental Only if the JOG mode is selected and NOT MDI DFD 179 TG1 17 100 MANUAL AND NOT MDI AND T17 NOT STOP END Se a order comply with the EN 61000 4 4 IEC 1000 4 4 regulation on immunity against rapid transients and blasts use 7x1x0 14 PVC shielded cable for the 5 V feedback cable CONCEPTS Fagor handwheels HBA HBE and LGB Ol FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 189 5 Machine safety related functions FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 190 5 13 Machine safety related functions 5 13
166. After selecting the variable with the t 9 keys pressing the modify softkey displays two windows The first one shows the range of possible values and the second one the current value Enter the new value and press ENTER The drive assumes that value and refreshes the screen Execute command Shows the list of commands that can be executed by the drive Select one using the t keys and press ENTER Change group Selects the group of parameters or variables to be displayed Change set Selects the set number of the parameters or variables to be displayed To drive flash The drive stores all its parameters in its flash memory and it then executes a soft reset command This command interrupts the communication press ENTER to restore it Save It makes a copy of the parameters of the drive s RAM memory into the CNC s CARD A or to a peripheral device or PC through the serial line The parameters are storedwith the name of the axis they are associated with for example the X axis parameters A file saved from the CNC via WinDNC may be loaded into the drive via DDSSETUP and vice versa Load It copies into the drive s RAM memory the parameters saved in the CNC s CARD A or in a peripheral device or in PC through the serial line The CNC copies the axis parameters that are being edited Drive Errors It displays a window with the warnings and errors of the drive If all of them do not fit on the screen use
167. DERGAIN P24 DERGAIN2 P61 P25 FFGAIN P25 FFGAIN2 P62 To select the second set of gains and accelerations set g m p ACTGAIN2 P108 correctly or activate the CNC s general logic input ACTGAIN2 M5013 Y Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 87 DRIBUSLE P63 considers this parameter when using a digital drive Axis parameter DRIBUSID P56 other than 0 Even when the data exchange between the CNC and the drive is done via digital CAN bus one must define whether the feedback is also handled via bus or through the corresponding connector for the axis or spindle Value Meaning 0 The feedback is done via connector 1 The feedback is done via CAN 4 First feedback motor feedback DRIBUSLE 0 The CNC controls the position loop The axis feedback is done via connector The command to the drive is sent out via CAN Axis parameters DRIBUSLE 1 The CNC controls the position loop The axis feedback is done via CAN First feedback motor feedback The command to the drive is sent out via CAN MACHINE PARAMETERS POSINREF P64 Not being used SWITCHAX P65 When having 2 axes controlled by a single servo drive machine parameter SWITCHAX ofthe secondary axis indicates which one is the main axis itis associated with Value Meaning Value Meaning 0 None 6 With the W axis 1 With the X axis 7 With
168. DISTX M302 CNCWR RS39 DISTY M302 CNCWR R39 DISTZ M302 reset to 0 the count of the distance traveled by each axis Activate the lubricating lubing operation T2 OR T3 OR T5 OR T6 O LUBING If any of these conditions is met the lubing output will be activated DFD O LUBING TRS2 TRS3 TRS4 TRS5 TRS6 Once the lubricating operation has concluded All timers must be reset to 0 Coolant treatment The CNC executes function M08 to turn the coolant on and function 9 to turn it off Also in this case the operator has a switch to select whether the coolant is activated manually by the operator or automatically by the CNC I REFMAN The operator control the coolant Manual mode I REFAUT operator control the coolant Automatic mode O REFRIG Coolant on off output I COOLMA OR I COOLAU AND M 08 O COOL Coolant ON RESETOUT NOT O COOL RES M 08 The coolant will be turned off when the CNC is resetto initial conditions RESETOUT or when executing functions MO2 9 and M30 This instruction does not contemplate functions M02 MO9 and M30 since the treatment of M S T functions turns mark 08 off when activating any of them Treatment of the general CNC input AUXEND It is advisable to have one single instruction to control each one of the logic CNC inputs thus preventing undesired functioning When having several instructions which can activate or deactivate an
169. DW P30 This output stays active for the time indicated by g m p MINAENDW P30 S function The CNC transfers the S function out to the PLC only when using the BCD coded S output s m p SPDLTYPE PO set to other than O The sends the programmed S value via logic output SBCD R557 and activates the general logic output 5SSTROBE to indicate to the PLC to go ahead with its execution This transmission is carried out at the beginning of the block execution and the CNC will wait for the AUXEND general input be activated and then consider its execution completed T function The CNC will indicate via the variable TBCD R558 the T function which has been programmed in the block and activates the general logic output TSTROBE to tell the PLC to go ahead with its execution This transmission is made at the beginning of the block execution and the CNC will wait for the general input AUXEND to be activated to consider the execution completed Second T function The CNC transfers the second T function to the PLC in the following cases When having a machining center with non random tool magazine g m p TOFFMO6 P28 YES RANDOMTC P25 NO When using a random tool magazine g m p RANDOMTC P25 YES and a special tool change takes place See the chapter Tool table of the operating manual On executing the MO6 function a the CNC indicates the position of the magazine empty
170. EL 7SEL 1 0 1 If handwheel jog HDWON R60 must be ready to store what will be written into the HBEVAR variable The a b c bits indicate the x1 x10 x100 factor for each axis and bit 30 must be set to 1 in order for the CNC to read the handwheel C t MOV 0 R60 Delete its contents Sets the bit a of the selected axis to 1 x1 multiplying factor HDWON AND XSEL MOV 1 R60 HDWON AND YSEL MOV 8 R60 HDWON AND ZSEL MOV 40 R60 HDWON AND 4SEL MOV 200 R60 HDWON AND 5SEL MOV 1000 R60 HDWON AND 6SEL MOV 8000 R60 HDWON AND 7SEL MOV 40000 R60 It then analyzes the multiplying factor indicated at the switch x1 x10 x100 173 174 b to 11011 0 011 173 174 RL1 R60 1 R60 x10 1 1 0 10 I73 AND NOT 174 RL1 R60 2 R60 x100 1 1 And finally the bit 30 of HBEVAR 1 is enabled for the CNC to read the handwheel pulses OR R60 40000000 R60 When enabling the handwheel or changing the position of one of the switches HBEVAR and its image register R61 are updated refreshed DFU HDWON OR CPS R60 NE R61 MOV R60 R61 CNCWR R61 HBEVAR M201 When disabling the handwheel 0 and its image register R61 are initialized DFD HDWON MOV 0 R61 CNCWR R61 HBEVAR M201 If JOG movement JOGON and key pressed 175 then axis movement in the positive direction JOGON AND 175 AND XSEL
171. ES CONTROLLED FROM THE PLC FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 329 AXES CONTROLLED FROM THE PLC PLC execution channel FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 330 12 1 3 Control of the PLC program from the CNC The section of the PLC program regarding the axes controlled from the PLC can be controlled from the CNC itself To do this the inputs outputs marks registers timers or counters of the PLC itself are used The CNC has the following PLC related variables to read or change the status of the selected resource PLCI To read or modify up to 32 PLC inputs PLCO To read or modify up to 32 PLC outputs PLCM To read or modify up to 32 PLC marks internal relays PLCR To read or modify the status of a register PLCT To read or modify the count of a timer PLCC To read or modify the count of a counter With these variables the desired values will be assigned in the part program of the CNC to the PLC resources used in the communication The setting of these values will be carried out whenever an axis or axes are to be controlled from the PLC In turn the PLC program must checkthe status of such resources and when detecting that one of them is activated it must execute the corresponding section of the PLC program It is also possible to transfer data from the CNC to the PLC via global and local arithmetic parameters The PLC has the following variables rela
172. EYBD R562 depend the CNC model available M or T model keystroke code M model keystroke code Register E T model Register KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 me 4th axis KEYBD3 Spdl override KEYBD3 Spdl override KEYBD3 5 CW KEYBD3 5 CW KEYBD3 START KEYBD3 15 START KEYBD3 KEYBD3 16 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 17 Z KEYBD3 i KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 18 19 20 21 22 23 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 24 3rd axis KEYBD3 KEYBD3 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Logic outputs of key status LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Rapid feedrate Z Spdl stop KEYBD3 KEYBD3 X KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 KEYBD3 i KEYBD3 4th axis Spdl override Spdl CCW STOP FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 293 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Logic outputs of key status FAGOR 2 8035 M V11 1x T V12 1x 294 Register KEYDISA refers to the positions of the feedrate override switch feedrate 96 Key pressed selector Register KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 KEYBD4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
173. F DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF DEF O GEAR1 O GEAR2 I GEAR1 I GEAR2 I SIMULA SENDKEY KEYCODE LASTKEY SENTOK KEYBOARD CNCKEY PLCKEY MAINMENU SIMULATE KEY1 KEY2 ENTER THEOPATH START O5 O6 184 185 186 1100 55 R56 M1101 R57 0 1 FFF4 FCO1 31 32 0D FCOO0 FFF1 Spindle enable output 1 3 Move gears to select range 1 gear 1 Move gears to select range 2 gear 1 Indicates that Gear 1 is selected Indicates that Gear 2 is selected PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE Definition of symbols mnemonics The operator requests the simulation of program P12 Indicates that the code of a key is to be sent out to the CNC Indicates the code of the key to be simulated Indicates which is the last key accepted by the CNC Indicates that the key code has been sent correctly Used to indicate to the CNC the source of the keys Used to indicate that the keys come from the CNC keyboard Used to indicate that the keys come from the PLC Code of the MAIN MENU key Code of the SIMULATE key F2 Code of the 1 key Code of the 2 key Code of the ENTER key Code of the THEORETICAL PATH key F1 Code of the START key FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 335 13 2 First cycle module 1 ERA O1 512 ERA C1 256 T1 256 ERA R1 256 ERA M1 2000 ERA M4000 4127 ERA M4500 4563
174. FAGOR AUTOMATION Soft 8035 Ref 0706 INSTALLATION MANUAL MODELOS amp T All rights reserved No part of this documentation may be copied transcribed stored in a data backup system or translated into any language without Fagor Automation s explicit consent The information described in this manual may be modified for technical reasons FAGOR AUTOMATION S COOP Reserves the right to modify the contents of this manual without having to communicate such modifications The commercial trademarks belong to their respective owners FAGOR 2 The content of this manual and its validity for the product described here has been verified Even so involuntary errors are possible thus no absolute match is guaranteed Anyway the contents of the manual is periodically checked making and including the necessary corrections in a future edition The examples described in this manual are for learning purposes Before using them in industrial applications they must be properly adapted making sure that the safety regulations are fully met This product uses the following source code subject to the terms of the GPL license The applications busybox V0 60 2 dosfstools V2 9 linux ftpd 0 17 ppp V2 4 0 utelnetV0 1 1 The librarygrx V2 4 4 The linux kernel V2 4 4 The linux boot ppcboot V1 1 3 If you would like to have a CD copy of this source code sent to you send 10 Euros to Fagor Automat
175. General handwheel 1 Select the axis to be jogged Press one of the JOG keys of the axis to be jogged The selected axis will be highlighted When using a Fagor handwheel with an axis selector button the axis may be selected as follows Push the button on the back of the handwheel The CNC select the first axis and it highlights it When pressing the button again the CNC selects the next axis and so on in a rotary fashion To deselect the axis hold the button pressed for more than 2 seconds 2 Jog the axis Once the axis has been selected it will move as the handwheel is being turned and in the direction indicated by it Individual handwheels Each axis will move as the corresponding handwheel is being turned according to the switch position and in the direction indicated by it Simultaneous handwheels The machine may have a general handwheel and up to 3 individual handwheels associated with each axis The individual handwheels have priority over the general handwheel So if an individual handwheel is moving the general handwheel will be ignored 5 3 2 Path handwheel With this feature it is possible to jog two axes at the same time along a linear path chamfer or circular path rounding with a single handwheel The CNC assumes as the path handwheel the general handwheel or when this one is missing the one associated with the X axis Mill or Z axis lathe Feature setting This feature must be managed
176. HINE PARAMETERS 4 1 Parameters that may be modified from the OEM program or OEM subroutine 42 4 2 General machine parameters sse nennen 44 4 3 Axis parameters 4 4 Spindle par Meters 95 4 5 Driv parameleS E 109 4 6 Serial line parameters ceci rer reticere cotta tetto Copt ena te Lecce i apa cute des 112 4 7 PLC Parameters 114 4 8 Tables innatis 117 4 8 1 Miscellaneous M function table 117 4 8 2 Leadscrew error compensation table essen 119 4 8 3 Cross compensation parameter table seen 121 CONCEPTS 5 1 Axes and coordinate systems ener 123 5 1 1 Rotary 5 1 2 Gantry axes 5 1 3 Incline axis 5 2 970 5 2 1 Relationship between the axes and the JOG keys 5 2 2 Path jog mode 5 3 Movement with an electronic 135 5 3 1 Standard handwheel c cccccscccccsssccessseccsseeccssseeceseeceesseecessseeccseeecesseesensaaess 5 3 2 Patlihandwheel rane nn dana sa ca Cha kPa sd eno a haa Em Eaka RR RR 5 3 3 Feed 5 3 4 Additive handwheel mode 5 4 feedback system 5 ni rennen eter mses
177. Handwheel associated m 5 with 2 z 6 W axis 24 Handwheel associated 5 with U S 7 A axis 25 Handwheel associated o with V 8 B axis 26 Handwheel associated with W 9 C axis 27 Handwheel associated with A 10 Main spindle 28 Handwheel associated with B 11 Handwheel 29 Handwheel associated with C The following table shows the feedback input the analog voltage output and the default values associated with each parameter Parameter Feedback Analog voltage Default value connector M T AXIS1 PO AXIS1 PO X8 Pin2 z axis X axis AXIS3 AXIS3 P2 3rdaxis Srdaxis X8 Pin4 Pin 4 2 2 O free Not being 0 free ELM used AXIS5 Spindle 10 spindle 10 spindle AXIS6 P 1st 11 11 handwheel handwheel handwheel AXIS7 P6 2nd X5 0 free 0 free handwheel AXIS8 P7 Not being 0 free 0 free used About the handwheels FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x Depending on their configuration the available handwheels are General handwheel It can be used to jog any axis one by one Select the axis and turn the handwheel to move it ndividual handwheel 44 INCHES 8 9 10 IPLANE P11 ILCOMP P12 ISYSTEM P13 It replaces the mechanical handwheels Up to 2 handwheels can be used one per axis It only
178. I1 P68 and IOCODI2 P69 Tenths It defines whether it stops smoothly or not when detecting the reference mark of the axes or not Value Meaning Ox Normal stop on IO 1x Smooth stop on IO When setting the smooth stop parameters DERGAIN and FFGAIN should be set to zero The CNC takes this parameter into account when a m p IOTYPE P52 has been set with a value other than O Linear encoders having a distance coded reference mark indicate the machine position with respect to the zero of the linear encoder Possible values Within 99999 9999 millimeters Within 3937 00787 inches Default value 0 In order for the CNC to show the position of the axes with respect to the machine reference zero home this parameter must be assigned the position value coordinate of the machine reference zero point M with respect to the zero of the linear encoder C This parameter has to do with the axis logic outputs ANT1 through gt Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 85 Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 86 If the axis move is smaller than the value indicated by this a m p MINMOVE P54 the corresponding axis logic output ANT1 through ANT3 goes high Possible values Within 99999 9999 degrees or millimeters Within x3937 00787 inches D
179. IMITAC M5058 When the limit is canceled the CNC recovers the programmed feedrate This limit permits clearing the axis feedrate temporarily via PLC e g when opening the doors etc Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x TANSLAID P76 Not being used TANSLANA P77 Not being used TORQDIST P78 Not being used 92 PRELOAD P79 PRELFITI P80 TPROGAIN P81 TINTTIME P82 TCOMPLIM P83 ADIFEED P84 FRAPIDEN P85 PITCHB P86 HPITCH P89 Not being used Not being used Not being used Not being used Not being used Maximum feedrate allowed due to the additive handwheel Possible values Between 0 and 99999 9999 degrees min or mm min Between 0 inches min and 3937 00787 inches min Default value 1000 Maximum axis feedrate when activating the EXRAPID mark and when pressing the rapid key in execution or in simulation with motion If set to 0 it assumes the feedrate set by parameter GOOFEED If it is set with a value higher than GOOFEED the feedrate will be limited to GOOFEED Possible values Between 0 and 199999 9999 degrees min or mm min Between 0 and 7874 01574 inches min Default value 0 This limit does not affect the rapid jog which will still have the value of parameter GOOFEED Leadscrew pitch This parameter must only be set when using CAN servo system When not using CAN servo system the leadscrew pitch is defined with parameter PITCH P7 When using gear reduction on the
180. INH There is always permission to execute the next block Ifthe START key is pressed on the front panel of the CNC this is indicated to the PLC by means of the general logic output START If the PLC program considers that there is nothing to prevent the part program form being executed the CYSTART signal must be set at a high logic level thus beginning the execution of the program The CNC will indicate by means of the general logic output INCYCLE thatthe program is being executed As of that moment the CYSTART can return to low logic level Example START AND rest of conditions CYSTART When the cycle START key is pressed the CNC activates the general logic output START The PLC must check that the rest of the conditions hydraulic safety devices etc are met before setting the general input CYSTART high in order to start executing the program General logic inputs LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 257 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS General logic inputs FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 258 SBLOCK M5008 MANRAPID M5009 OVRCAN M5010 LATCHM M5011 ACTGAIN2 M5013 N When the PLC sets this signal high the CNC changes to the single block execution mode The treatment this signal receives is similar to that given to the single block softkey If the PLC sets this signal at a high logic level
181. If correct leave it as is Otherwise select YES is there was a NO before or vice versa Possible values NO YES Default value NO MPGRES P81 Parameter MPGRES P81 indicates the counting resolution of the electronic handwheel and depends on the display format selected for the corresponding a m p DFORMAT P1 Possible values 0 1 and 2 Default value 0 Format Resolution DFORMAT P1 MPGRES 0 MPGRES 1 MPGRES 2 5 3 mm 0 001 mm 0 010 mm 0 100 mm 4 4 0 0001 0 0010 0 0100 4 4mm 0 0001 mm 0 0010 mm 0 0100 mm 3 5 0 00001 0 00010 0 00100 6 2 mm 0 01 mm 0 10 mm 1 00 mm 5 3 0 001 0 010 0 100 MPGNPUL P82 Parameter MPGNPUL P82 indicates the number of pulses per turn of the electronic handwheel Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 65535 Default value 0 means 25 Example Having a Fagor electronic handwheel 25 pulses per turn we would like to move 1 mm per handwheel turn 1 Set the a m p for the feedback input of the electronic handwheel AXIS1 PO through AXIS7 P6 to a value of 12 Fagor 100P handwheel Also set g m p MPGAXIS P76 to indicate which axis has been assigned this handwheel 2 Set parameter MPGNPUL 25 or 0 meaning 25 pulses per turn of the Fagor handwheel 3 Since the handwheel outputs square signals and the CNC applies a x4 multiplying factor to them we get 100 pulses per turn 4 The value to be assigned to parameter MPGRES depends on
182. LC register R150 When requesting information about a nonexisting variable i e the position value of a nonexisting axis this instruction will not alter the contents of the register and it will set the selected error mark indicating that the variable does not exist Writing variables CNCWR command The CNCWR command allows writing the CNC s internal variables Its programming format is CNCWR Register Variable Mark This PLC action loads the contents of the indicated register into the selected variable If this instruction has been executed properly the PLC will assign a value of 0 to the indicated error detection mark and 1 if otherwise CNCWR R92 TIMER M200 FAGOR It resets the clock enabled by the PLC with the value contained in register R92 CNC 8035 When trying to modify the contents of a nonexisting variable or assign an improper value to it the selected error mark will be set to 1 which will indicate that this instruction is incorrect When performing an improper reading or writing request the PLC will continue the execution of the program unless interrupted by the programmer after having analyzed Sorr V11 1x the error mark defined in the instruction Sorr T V12 1x 295 11 ACCESS THE INTERNAL VARIABLES FAGOR 8035 Sort V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 296 Identifying the variables in the PLC commands These variables are accesse
183. LCCSS is a read write variable the rest are read only CSS It returns the constant surface speed selected at the CNC This constant surface speed may be indicated by program by PLC or by DNC the CNC selects one of them the one indicated by DNC has the highest priority and the one indicated by program has the lowest priority The values are given in the units set by g m p INCHES If INCHES 0 in m min x999999999 If INCHES 1 in ft min 2393700787 DNCCSS It returns the constant surface speed selected via DNC Its value is given in m min or ft min and it is O it means that it is not currently selected PLCCSS It returns the constant surface speed selected by PLC Its value is given in m min or ft min PRGCSS It returns the constant surface speed selected by program Its value is given in m min or ft min ACCESS THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES Variables associated with the main spindle FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 311 11 ACCESS THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES Variables associated with the main spindle FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 312 SSO PRGSSO DNCSSO PLCSSO CNCSSO SLIMIT DNCSL PLCSL PRGSL MDISL POSS RPOSS TPOSS RTPOSS PRGSP Variables associated with the spindle override The variable PLCSSO is a read write variable the rest are read only It returns the turning speed override 95 o
184. METERS FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 104 MSPINDO P52 SYNPOSOF P53 SYNSPEOF P54 ACCTIMES P55 PROGAINS P56 DERGAINS P57 FFGAINS P58 ACCTIME4 P59 SECACESP P60 SYNCPOLA P61 CONCLOOP P62 Indicates when functions M3 M4 M5 are to be sent out While the spindle is accelerating and decelerating Not being used Not being used These parameters define the third set of gains and accelerations They must be set like the parameters that define the first set First set Second set Third set ACCTIME 18 ACCTIME2 P47 ACCTIME3 P55 PROGAIN P23 PROGAIN2 P48 PROGAIN3 P56 DERGAIN P24 DERGAIN2 P49 DERGAIN3 P57 FFGAIN P25 FFGAIN2 P50 FFGAIN3 P58 Possible values The same as for the first gear Default value For ACCTIME3 P55 4000 ms For PROGAINS P56 50 mV degree For DERGAINS P57 0 For FFGAIN3 P58 100 When working with FFGAIN3 P58 100 set the MAXGEAR and MAXVOLT parameters properly Not being used Not being used It indicates whether the spindle operates in closed positioning loop as if it were an axis or not Value Meaning NO It operates in open loop YES It operates in closed position loop as if it were an axis Default value NO In order to operate in closed positioning loop the spindle must have an encoder and a good servo system for the full speed range When working with M19 the
185. Maximum frequency 1000 kHz 1 Maximum gap between flanks 460 ns zd Phase shift 90 20 2 E Vmax in common mode 7 5 2 Vmax in differential mode 6 Hysteresis 0 2 V 8 Maximum differential input current 3 mA 2 o Work levels for non differential square signal axes and spindle Maximum frequency 400 kHz Maximum gap between flanks 460 ns Phase shift 90 20 High threshold logic level 1 1 25 V lt lt 7 V Low threshold logic level 0 7V My 1 V Vmax 7 Hysteresis 0 25 V Maximum differential input current 3 mA Work levels for sinusoidal signal only for axes Maximum frequency 500 KHz A and B signals Amplitude 0 6 1 2 Vpp FAGOR Centered IV1 V2I 2 Vpp lt 6 5 Relationship VApp VBpp 0 8 1 25 Phase shift 90 10 CNC 8035 Reference mark 10 Amplitude 0 2 0 85 V Width T 90 lt 10 lt 180 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x Feedback input for the handwheels Power supply consumption of 5 V 1 A 250 mA per axis Work levels for differential square signal Maximum frequency 200 kHz Maximum gap between flanks 460 ns Phase shift 90 20 Vmax in common mode 7V 1 Vmax in differential mode 6 V Hysteresis 0 2 V gt 5 i Maximum differential input current mA 5 2 Work levels for non differential square signal B o Maximum frequency
186. NUILO1 165 chosen at will with the restriction 8n 1 Follow the same procedure for the outputs EH The values of the PLC machine parameters mentioned earlier should be multiple of 16 for best managing the inputs and outputs in time NUILO2 P133 Not being used NUOLO2 P134 NUILOS P135 NUOLOS P136 FAGOR NUILO4 P137 NUOLO4 P138 CNC 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 116 4 8 4 8 1 Tables Miscellaneous M function table bit 0 The number of M functions in this table is determined by the g m p NMISCFUN P29 being possible to define up to 255 M functions It must borne in mind that functions MOO M01 M02 M04 M05 8 9 M19 M30 M41 M42 M43 and M44 besides what is indicated in this table have specific meanings when programming the CNC 4 H Tables MACHINE PARAMETERS MODIFY Each miscellaneous function will be called by its M number Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 9999 The table elements that are not defined will be displayed as M A subroutine can be associated with each M function and it will be indicated by the letter S Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 9999 If O is assigned to this field it means that the M function has no subroutine associated with it The third field consists of 8 customizing bits called bit O through bit 7 Indicates whether the CNC must wait or no
187. OLTYPE P167 Stop block preparation when executing a new T TOOLTYPE P167 Execute the stop signal when done with the T change FEEDTYPE P169 Select the behavior of the feedrate for FO TYPCROSS P135 On Gantry axes cross compensation is also applied to the slave axis RAPIDEN P130 Rapid key controlled by PLC General parameters that may be modified from OEM subroutine program CODISET Axis parameters that may be modified from OEM subroutine program MAXFLWE1 MAXFLWE2 PLC marks Name the logic inputs and outputs with the axis name BLOABOR Ending the execution of a block using a PLC mark main channel BLOABORP Ending the execution of a block using a PLC mark PLC channel ELIMIS Park the spindle While compiling the PLC program the outputs are initialized to zero Variables INST PRG SELPRO Variable to select the active probe input DIAM Variable to select the programming mode radius or diameter G2 G3 There is no need to program the center coordinates if their value is zero 41 44 These functions admit subroutines when the gear change is automatic FAGOR 8035 Version history FAGOR 2 8035 VI Software V09 1x List of features Calculation of central unit heat dissipation December 2004 New board Axes2 Automatic keyboard type identification Frequency filters for axes and spindles Machine parameters COMPMODE P175
188. OR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 196 6 1 PLC Resources Inputs 1 These are elements which supply information to the PLC from signals received from the outside world They are represented by the letter and there are 512 inputs available Outputs O Theseare elements which allow the PLC to activate or deactivate the different devices in the electrical cabinet These are represented by the letter O and there are 512 outputs available Marks M These are elements capable of memorizing in one bit as if it were an internal relay the status of the different internal variables of the CNC information of the logic outputs received in the communication between the CNC and the PLC of the CNC and the status of the different variables of the PLC whether these are internal or established by the user They are represented by the letter M and there are 2000 user marks and other special marks Registers R These are elements which allow a numerical value to be stored in 32 bits or facilitate CNC PLC communication with the Logic CNC inputs and outputs They are represented by the letter R and there are 256 user registers and other special registers Timers T These are elements which once activated alterthe status of their outputfor a specific time time constant They are represented by the letter T and there are 256 timers Counters C These are elements capable of counting up or down a speci
189. P105 NUICANG P106 UOCANG P107 NUICAN4 P108 NUOCAM4 P109 IANASV P130 NUILO1 P131 NUOLO P132 Not being used Not being used Not being used Not being used Not being used Not being used Not being used Not being used Not being used These PLC machine parameters may be usedto redefine the numbering ofthe inputs outputs of the local expansion module without having to modify the PLC program Value Meaning NUILO1 Numbering of the first input of the expansion module with inputs outputs I O NUOLO1 Numbering of the first output of the expansion module with inputs outputs I O The CPU of the 8035 CNC may have digital 161 80 and optionally a single local digital expansion of 241 160 The inputs outputs that do not belong to the expansion module are numbered starting from 11 and O1 and cannot be set by parameters IMPORTANT The numbering of both the first local input and the first local output of the expansion module must be a multiple of 8 plus 1 1 8n m X fil If incoherent parameter settings are detected on power up an error message will be issued indicating it Inside the expansion module the numbering of the rest of inputs outputs will be sequential from the first one on The numbering for the inputs outputs of the expansion module will be different depending on the value
190. PRBMOD INST G04 KO Block preparation interruption and coordinate update PRG Software V11 13 June 2006 List of features Manual Smooth stop when homing the axes it may be selected with a m p IOTYPE INST Software V11 14 List of features August 2006 Selecting the additive handwheel as handwheel associated with the axis Manual INST Software V11 18 List of features June 2007 Manual OPT Copy and execute programs on Hard Disk KeyCF Version history M FAGOR 8035 Vil Version history FAGOR 8035 VERSION HISTORY 1 lathe model Here is a list of the features added in each software version and the manuals that describe them The version history uses the following abbreviations INST Installation manual PRG Programming manual OPT Operation manual Software V08 1x July 2003 First version Software V10 0x February 2004 List of features Manual Incline axis INST PRG Machine parameters INST TOOLTYPE P167 Stop block preparation when executing a new T TOOLTYPE P167 Execute the stop signal when done with the T change FEEDTYPE P169 Select the behavior of the feedrate for FO TYPCROSS P135 On Gantry axes cross compensation is also applied to the slave axis RAPIDEN P130 Rapid key controlled by PLC General parameters that may be modified from OEM subroutine program CODISET Axis parameters that may b
191. PUT P31 NO and a m p IOTYPE P52 0 Then perform a home search If assumed immediately change a m p REFPULSE P32 and check again 3 Set a m p IOTYPE P52 1 and ABSOFF P53 0 4 Once in JOG mode and after positioning the axis in the proper area home the axis The new position value displayed by the CNC is the distance from the current point to the origin of the linear encoder 5 Perform several consecutive home searches and observe the CNC display during the whole process The counting must be continuous If it is not if jerky set IOTYPE P52 2 and repeat steps 4 and 5 6 Move the axis up to the Machine Reference Zero or up to a point whose position with respect to Machine Reference Zero is already known and observe the position value displayed by the CNC This value is the distance from the current point to the origin of the linear encoder 7 The value to be assigned to a m p ABSOFF P53 must be calculated with the following formula ABSOFF P53 CNC reading Machine coordinate Example If the point whose position is already known is located 230 mm from Machine Reference Zero and the CNC shows 423 5 mm as the position for this point the linear encoder offset will be ABSOFF P53 423 5 230 653 5 mm 8 After allocating this new value press SHIFT RESET or turn the CNC off and back on in order for the CNC to assume this new value 9 Home the axis again in order for it to as
192. Periodic execution module PE First cycle module CY1 Each module must begin with the directing instruction which defines it PRG PE CY1 and end with the directing instruction END Should the main program contain the main module only it is not necessary to place the instructions PRG and END First cycle module CY1 This module is optional and will only be executed when the PLC is turned on It is used to initialize the different resources and variables with their initial values before proceeding to execute the rest of the program This module operates by default with the real values of resources O M It is not necessary for this to be at the beginning of the program but must always be preceded by the instruction CY1 6 4 2 Main module PRG This module contains the user program It will be executed cyclically and will be given the task of analyzing and modifying CNC inputs and outputs Its execution time will be limited by the value of plc m p WDGPRG PO This module operates by default with the image values of resources O M There can only be one main program and this must be preceded by the instruction PRG it is not necessary to define it if it starts on the first line Modular structure of the program eo INTRODUCTION TO THE PLC FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 201 6 4 3 Periodic execution module 1 This module is optional will be executed every period
193. R it will overshoot the programmed point 2 Positioning at feedrate UNIFEED P41 from this point to the programmed point 1 5 8 Auxiliary T function transfer Every time a block is executed in the CNC information is passed to the PLC about the M S and T functions which are active Auxiliary M function The CNC uses logic outputs MBCD1 thru MBCD7 R550 thru R556 to tell the PLC which M functions it must execute One function per logic output It also activates the general logic output MSTROBE to tell the PLC to start executing them Every time the CNC detects an M function it analyzes the M function table to find out when to pass it along to the PLC either before or after the movement and whether it must wait for the AUXEND signal or not before resuming program execution If the programmed function is not defined in that table it will be executed at the beginning of the block and the CNC will wait for the AUXEND signal to resume program execution See 9 1 Auxiliary M S T functions on page 244 See 10 6 General logic outputs on page 280 See 4 8 Tables on page 117 Example 1 Execution of a motion block containing 7 M functions 4 of which are executed before the axes move M51 M52 M53 M54 and 3 afterwards M61 M62 M63 1 It sends out to the PLC the 4 M functions programmed to be executed before the move It sets logic outputs MBCD1 51 MBCD2 52 MBCD3 53 MBCD4 54 and
194. RPROG P63 TRDERG P64 MAXDEFLE P65 MINDEFLE P66 TRFBAKAL P67 TIPDPLY P68 Not being used Not being used Not being used Indicates the number of the subroutine associated with the tools This subroutine will be executed automatically every time a T function is executed Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 9999 Default value 0 none This parameter must be used when having a machining center g m p TOFFMOG P28 YES Indicates whether a cyclic tool changer is being used or not A cyclic tool changer is an automatic tool changer which requires an M06 command tool change after searching for a tool and before searching for the next one With a non cyclic tool changer itis possible to search for several tools in a row without necessarily having to make the actual tool change MO6 function Value Meaning YES It is a cyclic changer NO It is not a cyclic changer Default value YES Not being used Not being used Not being used Not being used Not being used Not being used Indicates whether the CNC displays the position of the tool tip or that of the tool base when working with tool length compensation Value Meaning 0 It displays the coordinate of the tool base 1 It displays the coordinate of the tool tip Default value 0 for the M model Default value 1 for the T model On the Mill model it is necessary to execute G43 in order to work with tool length compensati
195. SUB 3 ETX Default value 0 XONXOFF P10 Indicates whether the XON XOFF communications protocol is active or not when operating with a generic peripheral Value Meaning ON It is active OFF It is NOT active Default value ON gt Serial line parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 113 o 7 ES 4 lt C a z lt FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 114 4 7 PLC Parameters WDGPRG P0 Indicates the Watchdog time out period for the main PLC program Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 WDGPER P1 Indicates the Watch Dog time out period for the periodic module of the PLC Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 USERO P2 Parameters USERO through USER23 do not mean anything to the USER23 P25 They could contain the type of information that the OEM may find necessary to customize this machine such as Information about the type of machine PLC program version etc This information can be accessed from the PLC program by means of the CNCRD high level instruction Possible values USERO P2 USER7 P9 Integer numbers between 0 and 255 USERO P10 USER7 P17 Integer numbers between 0 and 65535 USERO P18 USER7 P25 Within 99999 9999 mm or 3937 00787 inches Default value 0
196. T M V11 1x T V12 1x 70 status 71 status 315 11 Operating mode related variables ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 316 Installation manual 80 PLC file editing 81 PLC program compilation 82 PLC monitoring 83 Active PLC messages 84 Active PLC pages 85 Save PLC program 86 Restore PLC program 87 PLC usage maps 88 PLC statistics 90 Customizing 100 General machine parameter table 101 Axis machine parameter tables 102 Spindle machine parameter table 103 Serial line related machine parameter tables 104 PLC machine parameter table 105 M function table 106 Leadscrew error compensation tables and cross compensation tables 110 Diagnosis configuration 111 Diagnosis hardware test 112 Diagnosis RAM memory test 113 Diagnosis Flash memory test 114 User diagnosis 11 12 Other variables NBTOOL PRGN BLKN GGSA GGSB GGSC GGSD GGSE Read only variables Indicates the tool number being managed This variable can only be used within the tool change subroutine Example There is a manual tool changer Tool T1 is currently selected and the operator requests tool T5 The subroutine associated with the tools may contain the following instructions P103 NBTOOL MSG SELECT T P103 AND PRESS CYCLE START
197. TC Parts counter of the CNC FIRST First time a program is executed KEY keystroke code KEYSRC Source of the keys ANAIn Voltage in volts of the indicated analog input n ANAOn Voltage in volts to apply to the indicated output n CNCERR Active CNC error number PLCERR Active PLC error number DNCERR Number of the error generated during DNC communications DNCSTA DNC transmission status TIMEG Remaining time to finish the dwell block in hundredths of a second SELPRO When having two probe inputs it selects the active input DIAM It changes the programming mode for X axis coordinates between radius and diameter PRBMOD Indicates whether a probing error must be displayed or not RIP Linear theoretical feedrate resulting from the next loop in mm min ORGROT ROTPF ROTPS PRBST CLOCK e 2222205252 APPENDIX Summary of internal CNC variables The KEY variable can be written at the CNC only via the user channel A The NBTOOL variable can only be used within the tool change subroutine FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 359 O installation manual O APPENDIX Summary of internal CNC variables FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x SUMMARY OF PLC COMMANDS PLC Resources Inputs 1 512 Outputs O 1 512 Registers for communication with the CNC R 500 559 The value stored in each register will be considered by th
198. TROBE to tell the PLC that it must execute it This transmission is made at the beginning of the block execution and the CNC will wait for the general input AUXEND to be activated to consider the execution completed Second T function If this involves changing a special tool or a machining center with non random tool magazine the CNC will indicate on executing the MO6 function the position of the magazine empty pocket in which the tool which was on the spindle must be deposited activating the general logic output T2STROBE to tell the PLC that it must execute it The CNC will wait for the general input AUXEND to be activated to consider the execution completed This indication will be made by means of the variable T2BCD R559 and by FAGOR 2 8035 SSS It must be borne mind that at the beginning of the execution of the block the CNC can tell the PLC the execution of the M S T and T2 functions by activating their STROBE signals together and waiting for a single AUXEND signal for all of them Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 247 CNC PLC COMMUNICATION Auxiliary M S T function transfer FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 248 Transferring M S T using the AUXEND signal Once the block has been analyzed and after sending the corresponding values in the variables MBCD1 7 SBCD TBCD and T2BCD the CNC will tell the PLC b
199. The main module will be executed cyclically until the execution of the PLC has stopped command STOP 6 T pg RG 2 E 62 5 5 5 2 Qs lt zo The periodic module will be executed every time the time indicated in the directing instruction PE t elapses This count starts when the execution of the main module the first time begins Every time this module is executed the execution of the main module is interrupted and its execution resumes when the execution of the periodic module finishes FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 203 O installation manual INTRODUCTION TO THE PLC Modular structure of the program FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x PLC RESOURCES 7 1 Inputs These are elements which supply information to the PLC from signals received from the outside world They are represented by the letter followed by the input number which is desired to reference for example 11 125 1102 etc The PLC may control 512 inputs although when communicating with the outside world it can only access the physical ones Local physical inputs are the ones corresponding to the central unit 7 2 Outputs These are elements which allow the PLC to activate or deactivate the different devices in the electrical cabinet They are represented by the letter O followed by the output number which is desir
200. V11 1x T V12 1x 39 5 FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 40 The available machine parameter tables are General machine parameters Machine parameters for the axes one table per axis Spindle parameters Serial line parameters PLC Parameters Auxiliary miscellaneous M functions Leadscrew backlash Compensation one table per axis Cross compensation To access each one of them use the softkeys shown at the bottom of the screen Some characters appear next to certain parameters indicating when the CNC assumes the new value assigned to that parameter It is necessary to press the keystroke sequence SHIFT RESET or turn the CNC off and back on The rest of the parameters those unmarked will be updated automatically only by changing them On each table it is possible to move the cursor line by line using the t 9 keys or page by page using the Page up and Page down keys Abbreviations used in this manual The manual uses the following abbreviations to identify the type of machine parameter Abbreviation Machine pander Operation with parameter tables Once one of the table lines has been selected the user can move the cursor over this line by means of the 4 keys It is also possible to perform other functions by using the following keys Ke Fen INS Switches
201. V12 1x 231 8 4 PLC PROGRAMMING Operators and symbols AND OR XOR FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 232 Operators and symbols Used to group and operate with different consulting instructions The available operators are NOT AND OR XOR The available symbols are The operators are associated from left to right and the priorities ordered from the highest to the lowest are NOT AND XOR OR With the and symbols it is possible to clarify and select the order in which the logic expression is evaluated Example 12 OR 13 AND I4 OR NOT 15 AND 16 O7 Reverses the result of the consultation I2 Output will be active when input I2 is not Logic function AND 14 AND 15 O6 Output will be active when both inputs 14 15 are active Logic function OR 17 OR 18 O9 Output O9 will be active when either one or both inputs are active Logic Exclusive OR function 110 XOR 111 O12 Output O12 will be active when both inputs 110 and 111 have different logic states Open and close parenthesis They help clarify and select the order the logic expression is evaluated Example 12 OR 13 AND I4 OR NOT I5 AND 16 O7 A consulting instruction consisting of only these two operators always has a value of 1 In other words 02 Output O2 will always be high 1 8 5 Action instruction The acti
202. When a hardware error occurs the corresponding message is displayed CONCEPTS Machine safety related functions FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 192 5 14 Tool change PLC If the tool change process is interrupted the values of the tool magazine table and active tool may not reflect the machine s reality In order to be able to update the tool table the tool change may be resumed from the PLC using variables TOOL NXTOOL TOD NXTOD and TMZT This way it is possible to resume the tool change from the PLC and redefine the tool table according to their positions using the TMZT variable TOOL Number of the active tool 5 TOD Number of active tool offset o NXTOOL Number of next tool Tool that is selected but is awaiting the execution E of to be active 2 NXTOD Number of the next tool s offset 5 o Variables TOOL NXTOOL TOD and NXTOD can only be written from the PLC while 8 no block part program is being executed or simulated Redefine the tool and tool magazine tables To allocate a magazine position to the tool that is considered active by the CNC but is actually physically in the tool magazine proceed as follows 1 Deactivate the tool that the CNC considers active TOOL 0 and TOD 0 2 Assign to the tool the relevant position using the TMZT variable Before trying to write in variables TOOL NXTOOL TOD and NXTOD check the OPMODA variable to make sure t
203. ZUP X C TZONE TZLO X C TZUP X C FOZONE FOZLO X C FOZUP X C FIZONE FIZLO X C FIZUP X C The values of the limits are given in the units set by g m p INCHES If INCHES 0 in ten thousandths of a millimeter 999999999 If INCHES 1 in hundred thousandths of an inch 2393700787 If rotary axis in ten thousandths of a degree 999999999 The status of the work zones are defined according to the following code 0 Disabled 1 Enabled as no entry zone 2 Enabled as no exit zone Read and write variables It returns the status of work zone 1 Lower limit of zone 1 along the selected axis X C Upper limit of zone 1 along the selected axis X C The following example shows how it is possible to define as forbidden zone for the X axis the area between coordinates 0 and 100mm 1000000 tenths of microns condition 0 R1 MOV 1000000 1 CNCWR R1 FZLOX M1 CNCWR R1 FZUPX M1 MOV 1 1 CNCWR R1 FZONE M1 Status of work zone 2 Lower limit of zone 2 along the selected axis X C Upper limit of zone 2 along the selected axis X C Status of work zone 3 Lower limit of zone 3 along the selected axis X C Upper limit of zone 3 along the selected axis X C Status of work zone 4 Lower limit of zone 4 along the selected axis X C Upper limit of zone 4 along the selected axis X C Status of work zone 5 Lower limit of zone 5 along the selected axis X C Upper limi
204. a turn they cannot move via the shortest path When the travel is limited to less than a revolution and a positive and negative display is desired for example P5 120 P6 120 it is possible to program G90 with positive and negative values Defines the pitch of the ballscrew or the resolution of the linear feedback device being used It must be set when the feedback is handled through the CNC connector analog servo or digital with DRIBUSLE 0 Possible values Between 0 0001 and 99999 9999 degrees or millimeters Between 0 00001 and 3937 00787 inches Default value 5 mm Analog servo system The meaning of parameter PITCH depends on the type of axis and encoder used On linear axis with rotary encoder it sets the leadscrew pitch per encoder turn On linear axis with linear encoder it sets the resolution of the encoder On rotary axis it sets the number of degrees the shaft rotates per encoder turn gt Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 75 Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sort M V11 1x T V12 1x 76 Axis type Linear axis Rotary encoder Rotary axis NPULSES 8 DIFFBACK P9 Encoder type Linear encoder Rotary encoder With this type of servo system parameter PITCHB P86 has no meaning PITCH P7 Axis type Encoder type NPULSES P8 Linear axi
205. ables Their programming format is CNCRD Variable Register Mark CNCWR Register Variable Mark The CNCRD action loads the contents of the variable into the register and the CNCWR action reads the contents of the register into the variable The internal CNC variables are described in the chapter on CNC PLC communication The mark is set to 1 at the beginning of the operation and it keeps its value until the end of the operation When requesting information on a nonexistent variable for example the position of an nonexistent axis it will show the relevant error message Examples CNCRD FEED R150 M200 Loads into register R150 the feedrate value selected at the CNC by means of function G94 CNCWR R92 TIMER M200 Itresets the clock enabled by the PLC with the value contained in register R92 Action instruction PLC PROGRAMMING FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 241 O installation manual PAR It analyzes the type of parity of a register Its programming format is PAR R1 559 M1 5957 If the register being checked has an EVEN parity this instruction will set the indicated mark to 1 and if its parity is ODD it will set it to 0 Example 8 115 PAR R123 M222 If 115 1 the PLC checks the parity of register R123 and sets M222 1 if it is EVEN or M222 0 if it is ODD Oc 2 3 lt J FAGOR
206. ad and written from the CNC DNC and PLC MASTRHND M5054 EXRAPID M5057 FLIMITAC M5058 SLIMITAC M5059 The PLC sets this signal high to tell the CNC to activate the path handwheel or the path jog mode M5054 0 Normal work mode with handwheels or jog keys M5054 1 Path handwheel or path jog function on The CNC only takes this signal into account if parameter RAPIDEN has been set to 1 2 Ifthe PLC sets this signal high the programmed movements are executed as follows RAPIDEN 1 When the mark is activated the programmed movements are executed in rapid There is no need to press the rapid key RAPIDEN 2 When the mark is activated the rapid key is enabled The key must be pressed to make movements in rapid in other words both the key and the mark must be active When the signal is set back low the movements are executed at the programmed feedrate The treatment which this signal receives is similar to that given to the rapid feedrate key on the control panel The MANRAPID M5009 signal is similar but for movements in jog mode When the PLC sets this signal high it limits the feedrate of each axis to the value set by its a m p FLIMIT P75 When this limit is canceled the CNC recovers the programmed feedrate When the PLC sets this signal high it limits the spindle speed to the value set by its s m p SLIMIT P66 When this limit is canceled the CNC recovers the p
207. ailable in the current software version 6174 G173 G172 G171 6170 0154 G153 6152 6151 8150 returns the status of functions G175 through G199 The status of each one the functions will be given in the 25 least significant bits and it will be indicated by a 1 when active and a 0 when not active or when not available in the current software version 6199 6198 6197 6196 6195 0179 178 6177 6176 175 It returns the status of functions G200 through G224 The status of each one the functions will be given in the 25 least significant bits and it will be indicated by a 1 when active and a 0 when not active or when not available in the current software version 0224 G223 8222 221 6220 6204 G203 6202 G201 G200 It returns the status of functions G225 through G249 The status of each one the functions will be given in the 25 least significant bits and it will be indicated by a 1 when active and a 0 when not active or when not available in the current software version G249 G248 G247 G246 G245 9229 G228 G227 9226 9225 It returns the status of functions G250 through G274 The status of each one of the functions will be given in the 25 least significant bits and it will be indicated by a 1 when active and a 0 when not active or when not available in the current software version 0274 G273 G272 G271 6270 0254 0253 8252 G251 8250 returns the status of fun
208. ait until the marker pulse home of the slaved axis is found and then it will look for the marker pulse from the main axis If the difference obtained between both reference positions is not the same as the one indicated by a m p REFVALUE 6 for both axes the CNC will correct the position of the slaved axis This will end the home search operation When this search is carried out in the JOG mode the active zero offset will be cancelled and the CNC will display the position value indicated by a m p REFVALUE P36 for the main axis In all other cases the displayed position value will be referred to the zero offset or part zero active before the home search E X I If the a m p REFDIREC P33 of the main axis has been set for a positive direction the a m p REFVALUE P36 of the slaved axis must be set to a value lower than that assigned to the main axis Likewise if the a m p REFDIREC P33 of the main axis has been set for a negative direction the a m p REFVALUE P36 of the slaved axis must be set to a value greater than that assigned to the main axis They must never have the same value When encoders are used for feedback the difference between the values assigned to a m p REFVALUE P36 of both axes must be smaller than the pitch of the ballscrew It is recommended that the distance between the marke
209. also applies when turning the compensation off Value Meaning Oxx The compensation is activated in the first block having a movement of the plane axes 1 compensation is activated the first motion block even if there is no movement of the plane axes FAGOR Default value 000 After activating the compensation it could happen that the plane axes do not get CNC 8035 involved in the first motion block either because they have not been programmed or because the same point as the tool position has been programmed or because a null incremental move has been programmed In this case the compensation is applied in the current tool position depending on the first movement programmed in the plane the tool moves perpendicular to the path on its starting point Sorr M V11 1x The first movement programmed in the plane may be either linear or circular Sorr T V12 1x 55 General machine parameters FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 56 FPRMAN P75 MPGAXIS P76 DIRESET P77 PLACOMP P78 MACELOOK P79 Example of beginning of compensation COMPTYPE 1x1 G90 G01 Y40 30 Y30 G91 G40 YO 210 G01 G41 X 30 Y30 710 805 20 20 120 G01 X25 It is only used on lathe model CNC s and indicates whether feedrate per revolution is permitted or not Value Meaning YES Admitted NO Not admitted D
210. alues so their real values will always be evaluated Action instructions 2O32 will always update the real values of PLC resources Example IMA Consultations will evaluate image values 11 AND 12 01 REA Consultations will evaluate real values IMA I3 AND REA M4 02 Evaluates the image of I3 and the real of 4 IMA 15 REA Evaluates the image of I5 and the next ones in real IRD OWR MRD MWR TRACE Updates the real values of the local inputs after reading the relevant physical inputs Care must be taken when using this instruction since the current real values of the inputs will be lost They update the local physical outputs with the current real values of the corresponding O resources Updates the values of resources M5000 5957 and R500 559 with the values of the logic outputs of the CNC Care must be taken when using this instruction since the current values of those resources will be lost After executing this instruction the new values will match those of the logic outputs of the CNC internal variables Updates the logic inputs of the CNC internal variables with the current real values of resources M5000 5957 and R500 559 This instruction is used when working with the Logic Analyzer in order to capture data during the execution of the PLC cycle It must be born in mind that the logic analyzer performs a data capture at the beginning of each cycle PRG and PE after reading the physical input
211. and of 9 5 V Set each a m p MAXVOLT P37 9500 so the CNC outputs a maximum analog voltage of 9 5 V The maximum axis feedrate a m p MAXFEED P42 depends on the motor rpm well as on the gear reduction and type of ballscrew being used Example for the X axis The maximum motor rpm is 3 000 and the ballscrew pitch is 5mm rev Thus Maximum rapid traverse feedrate G00 ballscrew rpm x ballscrew pitch MAXFEED P42 3 000 rpm x 5 mm rev 15000 mm min In order to adjust the drive a m p GOOFEED P38 should be set to the same value as a m p MAXFEED P42 Also a small CNC program must be executed which will move the axis back and forth a short distance in order to verify that the amount of following error in both directions is the same One such program could be N10 G00 G90 x200 N20 X 200 RPT N10 N20 While the axis is moving back and forth measure the analog voltage provided by the to the drive and adjust the feed potentiometer at the drive NOT AT THE until reaching 9 5 V Si CONCEPTS Axis adjustment FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 149 5 Axis adjustment FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 150 5 5 2 Gain setting The various types of gains must be adjusted for each axis in order to optimize the system s performance for the programmed movements Anoscilloscope is highly recommended to make this
212. ar encoder being used 0 Indicates whether the feedback device uses differential signals double ended or not Feedback multiplying factor applied by the CNC Feedback alarm only with differential signals When using rotary encoders PITCH P7 NPULSES P8 DIFFBACK P9 SINMAGNI P10 FBACKAL P11 Number of degrees per encoder turn Number of pulses lines per encoder turn Indicates whether the feedback device uses differential signals double ended or not Feedback multiplying factor applied by the CNC Feedback alarm only with differential signals Next the feedback counting speed frequency limitation is described as well as how to set these machine parameters for the axes FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 142 5 4 1 Counting speed limitation Sinewave signals The maximum counting speed frequency for sinewave feedback is 250 KHz The maximum feedrate for each axis will depend upon the selected resolution and the signal pitch distance per pulse in use while with rotary encoders it will depend on the number of pulses per revolution Example 1 When using a Fagor linear encoder the signal pitch is 20 um Therefore with a counting resolution of 1 um the maximum feedrate will be 20 um pulse x 250 000 pulses sec 300 m min When using Fagor linear encoder the maximum feedrate is limited by their own characteristics to 60 m min Example 2 Using a
213. arameter of an axis has been set and itis not previously in motion it activates the ENABLE mark of the axis and waits a time period indicated in DWELL to check whether its SERVOON has been activated or not The acceleration applied to the additive handwheel movement is that of parameter ACCTIME of the axis On Gantry axes the movement of the master axis using an additive handwheel is also applied to the slave axis The mirror image by PLC is not applied to the additive handwheel movement When testing the software limits during block preparation it checks the theoretical coordinate ignoring the additional movement of the additive handwheel Bit 11 Selecting the additive handwheel as handwheel associated with the axis If this bit is set to 1 even if there is a general handwheel the additive handwheel will always be the one associated with the axis Bit 12 The resolution of the handwheel is set by g m p ADIMPRES This bit indicates whether the handwheel resolution is set by parameter ADIMPRES 0101 or not Otherwise bit 0 the resolution of the handwheel is set with the switch of the operator panel If the switch is not in the handwheel position it assumes a x1 factor Bit 13 Manual intervention enabled with look ahead This bit indicates whether manual intervention is available bit 1 or not bit 0 when look ahead is active Bit 14 Cancel the additive offset after M02 M30 emergency or Reset This bit
214. arameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 77 Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 78 BACKLASH P14 LSCRWCOM P15 NPOINTS P16 DWELL P17 ACCTIME P18 INPOSW P19 INPOTIME P20 MAXFLWE1 P21 Indicates the amount of backlash Enter 0 when using linear encoders Possible values Within 99999 9999 degrees or millimeters Within 3937 00787 inches Default value 0 Indicates whether the CNC should apply leadscrew error compensation or not Value Meaning OFF Leadscrew compensation not being used ON Leadscrew compensation being used Default value OFF Indicates the number of leadscrew error compensation points available in the table The values in this table will be applied if a m p 5 P15 is ON Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 255 Default value 30 Indicates the dwell from the moment the ENABLE signal is activated until the analog voltage is sent out Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 none Defines the acceleration stage or the time it takes the axis to reach the feedrate selected with a m p GOFFED P38 This time is also valid for the deceleration stage Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 none Indicates the width of the IN POSITION zone dead ba
215. ards are different The software features that have been purchased for that unit The id code only needs very little memory space The rest of memory space of the KeyCF may be used to store data on machine customizing user screens PLC program backup and or machine parameters etc as well as user part programs The KeyCF cannot be accessed manually from the outside but it can via DNC The CNC will recognize it as Hard Disk This may be observed by accessing the left panel of the explorer E CNC CONFIGURATION structure FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 17 CNC CONFIGURATION CNC structure FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 18 USB port USB hard disk Pen Drive connection The USB 1 1 port admits connecting a Pen Drive type memory device These memory devices are commercially available off the shelf and they re all valid regardless of their size brand name or model This port is located in the top rear of the CNC 3S lo USB 1 1 port X8 Do not connect a multi hub USB adapter to connect several devices at the same time It will only recognize the first Pen Drive that is connected Nor will it recognize other types of devices such as keyboards mice recorders etc When using a USB cable it should not be more than 3 m long The CNC recognizes this device as USB Hard Disk Even if the CNC is
216. ariables MBCD1 7 SBCD TBCD and T2BCD the CNC will tell the PLC by means of the general logic outputs MSTROBE SSTROBE TSTROBE and T2STROBE that the required auxiliary functions must be executed MINAENDW MINAENDW 2 Whenthe PLC detects that one ofthe STROBE signalsis active it must deactivate the general logic input AUXEND to tell the CNC that the execution of the corresponding function or functions is starting 3 The PLC will execute all the auxiliary functions required it being necessary to analyze the MSTROBE SSTROBE TSTROBE T2S8TROBE general logic outputs and the MBCD1 7 SBCD TBCD and 2 variables in order to do this Once this has been executed the PLC must activate the general logic input to indicate to the CNC that the processing of the required functions was completed 4 Once the general input is activated the CNC will require that this signal be kept active for a time period greater than the value given to the g m p MINAENDW P30 This way erroneous interpretations of this signal by the CNC due to an improper PLC program logic are avoided 5 Once the period of time MINAENDW has elapsed with the general input at a high logic level the CNC will deactivate the general logic outputs MSTROBE SSTROBE TSTROBE T2STROBE to tell the PLC that the execution
217. ate override may be changed from the operator panel switch from the PLC via DNC or by program The feedrate 96 can always be changed in JOG movements Indicates the maximum value of the feedrate override applicable to the programmed feedrate Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 255 Default value 120 From the operator panel switch it may be varied between 0 and 120 and from the PLC or by program between 096 and 255 Indicates the maximum angular feedrate value for circular interpolations This limitation prevents circular interpolations resulting in polygons instead of arcs when the radius is very small The CNC adjusts the angular feedrate in order not to exceed the selected maximum angular feedrate Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 65535 Default value O it is not limited Example If 1500 and an arc of a radius 0 5mm at F 10000mm min The theoretical angular speed is 10000 mm min 0 5 mm 20000 min But since the speed was limited to 1500 the CNC adjusts the feedrate in the following manner Feedrate to be applied 1500 x 0 5 750 mm min Indicates the maximum error allowed when calculating the end point of an arc PORGMOVE P21 BLOCKDLY P22 NTOOL P23 NPOCKET P24 From the programmed path the CNC will calculate the radius for both the starting point and end point of the arc Although both of them should be exactly
218. ations 5 e G Tool radius value of offset Tool length value of offset Tool radius wear of offset n Tool length wear of offset n Tool length offset n along X axis Tool length offset n along Z axis Location code of offset n Tool radius value of offset Tool length wear of offset n along X axis Tool length wear of offset n along Z axis NOSEAn Cutter angle of indicated tool NOSEWn Width of indicated tool CUTAn Cutting angle of indicated tool Variables associated with zero offsets Variable CNC PLC DNC section 11 2 ORG X C Active zero offset on the selected axis The value of the additive offset indicated by the PLC is not included PORGF R Abscissa coordinate value of polar origin PORGS R Ordinate coordinate value of polar origin ORG X C n Zero offset n value of the selected axis PLCOF X C R Value of the additive zero offset activated via PLC ADIOF X C R Value for the selected axis of the zero offset with additive handwheel Variable CNC PLC DNC section 17 3 FAGOR 2 MPGn R R Value assigned to general machine parameter n MP X C n R R Value assigned to X C axis machine parameter n MPSn R R Value assigned to machine parameter n of the main spindle CNC 8035 MPLCn R R Value assigned to machine parameter n of the PLC 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 355 e APPENDIX Variable FZONE FZLO X C FZUP X C SZONE SZLO X C SZUP X C TZONE TZLO X C
219. avel limit for each axis LIMPL for the upper limit and LIMMI for the lower one The PLC activates and deactivates these second limits through general logic input ACTLIM2 M5052 The second travel limit will be taken into account if the first one has been set using axis machine parameters LIMIT P5 and LIMIT P6 Variables associated with coordinates ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 307 11 7 Variables associated with electronic handwheels HANPF HANPS HANPT 1 1 HANPFO ACCESS THE INTERNAL VARIABLES Variables associated with electronic handwheels FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 308 Read only variables They return the pulses of the first HANPF second HANPS third HANPT or fourth HANPFO handwheel received since the CNC was turned on For handwheels with axis selector button it indicates whether that button has been pressed or not A value of 0 means that it has not been pressed Read and write variables It returns the multiplying factor set by PLC for each handwheel It must be used when using several electronic handwheels or when using a single handwheel but different multiplying factors x1 x10 x100 are to be applied to each axis Le s s w sy mpsz v s C C tie tie C tie tie tie C t o Once the switch
220. aximum feedrate of the axis indicated by a m p GOOFEED P38 Possible values Integer numbers between 0 mV and 9999 mV Default value 9500 9 5 V Indicates the maximum feedrate GOO rapid traverse of this axis Possible values Between 0 0001 and 199999 9999 degrees min or mm min Between 0 00001 inches min and 7874 01574 inches min Default value 10000 mm min Indicates the direction of the unidirectional approach in GOO moves Value Meaning 4 sign Positive direction sign Negative direction Default value sign Indicates the distance to be kept between the approach point and the programmed point If it is a Lathe model this distance must be in radius Possible values Between 0 0001 and 99999 9999 degrees min or mm min Between 0 00001 inches min and 3937 00787 inches min Default value 0 not unidirectional Indicates the feedrate to be used from the approach point to the programmed point Possible values Between 0 0001 and 99999 9999 degrees min or mm min Between 0 00001 inches min and 3937 00787 inches min Default value 0 MAXFEED P42 JOGFEED P43 PRBFEED P44 MAXCOUPE P45 ACFGAIN P46 Indicates the maximum programmable feedrate FO Possible values Between 0 0001 and 199999 9999 degrees min or mm min Between 0 00001 inches min and 7874 01574 inches min Default value 5000 mm min Indicates the feedrate F assumed in the JOG mode if no feedrate is
221. ay takes place between the STROBE off end of first block and STROBE on beginning of the second block It is advisable for the MINAENDW P30 value to be equal to or greater than the duration of a PLC cycle in order to ensure the detection of this signal by the PLC 5 8 2 Transferring the auxiliary miscellaneous M functions without the AUXEND signal 1 Once the block has been analyzed and after passing the corresponding values in variables MBCD1 7 the CNC will tell the PLC through the general logic output 5 that the required auxiliary function or functions must be executed MSTROBE PLC EXECUTION lt MINAENDW 2 The CNC will keep the general logic output MSTROBE active during the time indicated by means of g m p MINAENDW P30 Once this period of time has elapsed the CNC will continue to execute the program It is advisable for the MINAENDW P30 value to be equal to or greater than the duration of a PLC cycle in order to ensure the detection of this signal by the PLC 3 When the PLC detects the activation of the general logic signal MSTROBE it will execute the required auxiliary functions at the CNC logic outputs MBCD1 thru 7 CONCEPTS Auxiliary M S T function transfer Ol FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 169 CONCEPTS Spindle FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 170 5 9 Spind
222. by a m p ACCTIME2 P59 PROGAIN2 P60 DERGAIN2 P61 and FFGAIN2 P62 or s m p ACCTIME2 P47 PROGAIN2 P48 DERGAIN2 P49 and FFGAIN2 P50 The gains and accelerations can also be changed from the PLC regardless of the active operating mode or function To do this use general input ACTGAIN2 M5013 ACTGAIN2 M5013 0 The CNC assumes the first set ACTGAIN2 M5013 1 The CNC assumes the second set The change of gains and accelerations is always made at the beginning of the block When working in round corner G5 the change does not take place until GO7 is programmed RESETIN M5015 AUXEND M5016 TIMERON M5017 This signal will be treated by the CNC when the JOG mode is selected and there is no movement of the axes or when a program to be executed is selected and it is not running When there is a rising edge leading edge of this signal change from low to high the CNC assumes the initial machining conditions selected by the machine parameter The CNC will indicate by means of the general logic output RESETOUT that this function has been selected The treatment received by this signal is similar to that given to the RESET key on the front panel This signal is used in the execution of auxiliary functions M S and T to tell the CNC that the PLC is executing them It operates in the following way 1 Once the block has been analyzed and after sending the corresponding values in the v
223. cates the axis causing position variations on another axis The definition code is Value Meaning Value Meaning 0 None 5 V axis 1 X axis 6 W axis 2 Y axis 7 A axis 3 Z axis 8 B axis 4 U axis 9 C axis Default value 0 none Used in the first cross compensation table it indicates the axis suffering the position variations caused by another axis The compensation is applied onto this axis The definition code is Value Meaning Value Meaning 0 None 5 V axis 1 X axis 6 W axis 2 Y axis 7 A axis 3 Z axis 8 B axis 4 U axis 9 C axis Default value 0 none Example If NPCROSS 20 MOVAXIS X COMPAXIS W the CNC will allow access to the cross compensation table Each one of these 20 points NPCROSS of this table will indicate the X position value and the error suffered by the W axis when the X axis is positioned at this point This way the CNC will apply the compensation of the X axis table onto the W axis Y MACHINE PARAMETERS General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 49 REFPSUB P34 INT1SUB P35 4 INT2SUB P36 INT3SUB P37 INT4SUB P38 MACHINE PARAMETERS General machine parameters PRBPULSE P39 PRBXMIN P40 PRBXMAX P41 PRBYMIN P42 PRBYMAX P43 PRBZMIN P44 PRBZMAX P45 FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 50 Indicates the number of the subroutine associated with fun
224. cation system of the keyboards is recognized from versions V9 11 and V10 11 If an auto identifying keyboard is connected to a CNC that has an older software version the keyboard will beep In this case disable the auto identification hardware of the keyboard by setting the identification switch to Zero FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x SOFT T V12 1x O installation manual Dimensions Jl GCSES h 222 35 8 8 2 F1 ra Fa rs Fs re F7 Ug at 8 sa BID 0 LI sug e 56 3 2 21 CNC structure 8 5 0 3 335 13 2 115 5 4 54 352 13 9 125 4 92 CNC CONFIGURATION 318 12 51 287 8 11 3 FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x Enclosure 335 13 2 6 0 236 5 0 7 323 12 72 x E M o 8 S5 oia B oz 588 2 1 7 1 E O 32 1 26 1 26 2 The minimum distance from each side of the monitor its enclosure order to guarantee the required ambient conditions is shown below 180 7 087 50 1 968 L 50 1 968 50 1 968
225. ce between the following errors of both axes CONCEPTS Axes and coordinate systems Example of a bridge type milling machine with two Gantry axes X U Z W Machine parameters X axis GANTRY 0 U axis GANTRY 1 Z axis GANTRY 0 W axis GANTRY 3 FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 129 5 Axes and coordinate systems FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 130 5 1 3 Incline axis With the angular transformation of an incline axis it is possible to make movements along an axis that is not perpendicular to anoher On certain machines the axes are configured in a Cartesian way they are not perpendicular to each other A typical case is the X axis of a lathe that due to sturdiness reasons is not perpendicular to the Z axis i x Cartesian axis X Angular axis Z Orthogonal axis Programming in the Cartesian system Z X requires activating an angular transformation of an incline plane that converts the movements of the real non perpendicular axes Z X This way a movement programmed on the X axis is transformed into movements on the Z X axes i e itthen moves along the Z axis and the angular X axis Configuring the incline axis The incline axis is configured by the following general machine parameters H X 60 2 ANGAXNA X di Z ANGANTR 60 Z OFFANGAX Configuring the a
226. ck being executed If there are less than 7 miscellaneous M functions in each block the CNC will send the information in the lower numbered registers assigning the value FFFFFFFF to those which are left free This way if a block contains functions M100 M120 and M135 the CNC will transfer the following information MBCD1 R550 100 MBCD2 R551 120 MBCD3 552 135 MBCD4 R553 FFFFFFFF MBCDS5 R554 FFFFFFFF MBCD6 R555 FFFFFFFF MBCD7 R556 FFFFFFFF Use one of the following methods to determine whether or not a specific function has been programmed in a block which is being executed 1 Check all MBCD registers one by one until the specific function is found or until one of them contains the F FFFFFFF value 2 Use the format which permits checking all MBCD registers at the same time Example CECEMB CDA 0 930 77 It returns 1 if it detects an M30 and 0 if otherwise The miscellaneous M functions can be executed at the beginning or end of the block according to how these are set in the miscellaneous M function table Besides this table will indicate whether the CNC must wait or not for the general logic input AUXEND to consider the execution of the corresponding M as having been completed This register will be used when using a spindle operating with BCD coded S signal s m p SPDLTYPE The auxiliary S function w
227. cles regardless of the value of parameter STOPTAP t does not affect spindle positioning blocks M19 If the spindle positioning is in a block containing axis movement it aborts the movement of the axes but it completes the positioning of the spindle Considerations for the execution These marks do not affectblock preparation When canceling the execution of a block the next movement is carried out up to the prepared target coordinates no preparation is done On the other hand only the programmed axes are involved in the next movement The rest of the axes are ignored even if there is a real difference in position because the previous block has been aborted Path 1 Path 2 The solid lines represent the programmed paths and the dashed lines the real paths after activating the BLOABOR mark If a block is aborted and then the RETRACE function is activated the retraced path backwards will not be the same as the one traveled forward The two paths will not coincide either when aborting a block while the RETRACE function is active General logic inputs LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 263 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Axis logic inputs FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 264 10 2 Axis logic inputs There are several groups of logic inputs LIMIT DECEL etc which refer to the possible axes of the machi
228. connection up to 30 V pou The external 24Vdc power supply used for the PLC s inputs and outputs MUST be regulated The OV point of this power supply must be connected to the main ground point of the electrical cabinet 3 2 Analog inputs and outputs A Analog outputs They may be used with axis and spindle drives The electrical characteristics of these outputs are Analog voltage range 10 V Minimum impedance of the connected drive 10 Kw Maximum cable length without shield 75 Shielded cables should be used connecting the shield at each connector as shown here See chapter 1 CNC configuration a a ee Itis recommended to adjust the servo drives so the maximum feedrate G00 is obtained at a velocity command of 9 5V Analog inputs and outputs MACHINE AND POWER CONNECTION FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 31 Setup MACHINE AND POWER CONNECTION FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 32 3 3 Setup General considerations Inspect the whole electrical cabinet verifying the ground connections BEFORE powering it This ground connection must be done at a single machine point Main Ground Point and all other ground points must be connected to this point The power supply used for the digital inputs and outputs must be regulated and its zero volts must be connected to the main ground poi
229. constant 11277110 E an If the timer is initialized with values TEN 1 and TRS 0 the timer will be activated when a leading edge is produced at the TG3 input At that moment the timer status output will have value of T 1 The timer will wait a trailing edge of the TG3 input to start timing t from a value of 0 Once the time specified by the time constant has elapsed the timing operation will be considered as having completed and the timer status output will be deactivated 0 The elapsed time will remain as a timer time value once timing has been completed If once the timing has finished it is required to activate the timer again another leading edge must be produced at the TG3 input If another leading edge of the trigger input TG3 is produced before the time specified by the time constant has elapsed the PLC will consider that the timer has been activated again maintaining its status T 1 and initializing timing at 0 Operation of the TRS input this mode If a leading edge is produced at the TRS input at any moment during timing or afterwards the PLC initializes the timer assigning the value 0 to its T status and cancelling its count it initializes this to 0 Due to the fact that the timer is initialized it will be necessary to activate its trigger input to activate it again Timers PLC RESOURCES
230. control system established by FAGOR for this purpose In order to prevent the possibility of having the time period from the time a product leaves our warehouse until the end user actually receives it run against this 12 month warranty FAGOR has set up a warranty control system based on having the manufacturer or agent inform FAGOR of the destination identification and on machine installation date by filling out the document accompanying each FAGOR product in the warranty envelope This system besides assuring a full year of warranty to the end user enables our service network to know about FAGOR equipment coming from other countries into their area of responsibility The warranty starting date will be the one appearing as the installation date on the above mentioned document FAGOR offers the manufacturer or agent 12 months to sell and install the product This means that the warranty starting date may be up to one year after the product has left our warehouse so long as the warranty control sheet has been sent back to us This translates into the extension of warranty period to two years since the product left our warehouse If this sheet has not been sent to us the warranty period ends 15 months from when the product left our warehouse This warranty covers all costs of material and labour involved in repairs at FAGOR carried out to correct malfunctions in the equipment FAGOR undertakes to repair or replace their products within the period f
231. corresponding to the Machine Reference Point physical location of the marker pulse REFVALUE Machine coordinate reading Example If the point whose known position is located 230 mm from Machine Reference Zero and the CNC reads 123 5 mm as the coordinate value for this point the coordinate of the Machine Reference Point with respect to Machine Reference Zero will be REFVALUE 230 123 5 353 5 mm After allocating this new value press SHIFT RESET or turn the off and back on in order for the CNC to assume this new value The axis must be homed again in order for it to assume its right reference values Considerations If at the time when the home search is requested the axis is sitting on the home Switch the axis will back up in the direction opposite to the one indicated by REFDIREC P33 until it is off the switch and then it will go on to searching home If the axis is positioned beyond the software limits LIMIT P5 and LIMIT P6 it must be brought back into the work area within those limits and on the proper side for referencing home searching Care must be taken when placing the home switch and when setting feedrates REFEED1 P34 and REFEED2 P35 The home switch 1 will be installed so the marker pulse 2 will be found in the zone corresponding to feedrate REFEED2 P35 If there is no room for it reduce the value of REFEED1 P34 For example for ro
232. crew error compensation on rotary axes On rotary axes although the display is limited between 0 and 3609 the internal count is accumulative When using leadscrew error compensation set positions 0 and 360 first and last point of the table with the same amount of error This way the will apply the same compensation in all the revolutions FAGOR Otherwise the compensation will be limited to the indicated field CNC 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 155 Considerations and limitations When defining the profile points in the table the following requirements must be met The axis points must be in sequential order starting from the most negative least positive point to be compensated For those points outside the compensation zone the CNC will apply the compensation value corresponding to the table point closest to them The amount of error of the machine reference point may have any value Theerror difference between two consecutive points must not be greater than the 5 distance between them maximum slope 100 Bidirectional compensation of the leadscrew error is available from versions V7 11 mill and V8 11 lathe on When updated from a version that does not have bidirectional compensation it keeps the error values in the positive direction and it sets a zero error in the negative direction for all the points CONCEPTS Axis adjustment When changing to a version tha
233. critical adjustment by monitoring the tacho signals The illustration below shows the optimum shape for this signal on the left and the instabilities to be avoided during start up and brake down Vi There are three gain types for each axis They are adjusted by means of axis machine parameters and following the sequence indicated next Proportional gain It defines the analog output corresponding to a feedrate resulting in 1 of following error It is defined with a m p PROGAIN P23 Feed forward gain It sets the percentage of analog output dependent of the programmed feedrate To use it acc dec must be active ACCTIME P18 It is defined with a m p FFGAIN P25 Derivative gain or AC forward gain The derivative gain sets the percentage of analog output applied depending on the fluctuations of following error The AC forward gain sets the percentage of analog output proportional to the feedrate increments acceleration and deceleration stages To use it acc dec must be active ACCTIME P18 It is defined with DERGAIN P24 and ACFGAIN P46 If ACFGAIN No it applies derivative gain If ACFGAIN Yes it applies AC forward gain 5 5 3 Proportional setting A In a pure proportional positional loop the analog output of the CNC to control an axis is at all times proportional to the following error axis lag which is the difference between its theoretical and actual real position
234. ction G74 machine reference zero or home search This subroutine will be executed automatically when G74 is programmed alone in a block or also when searching home in the JOG mode by pressing the softkey ALL AXES Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 9999 Default value 0 no associated subroutine They indicate the number of the subroutine associated with the corresponding general logic input INT1 M5024 INT2 M5025 INT3 M5026 INT4 M5027 When one of these inputs is activated the program currently being executed is interrupted and the CNC jumps to execute the associated subroutine whose number is indicated in the corresponding parameter These interruption subroutines do not change the nesting level of local parameters thus only global parameters must be used in them Once the CNC completes the execution of the subroutine it will continue running the original program Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 9999 Default value 0 no associated subroutine Indicates whether the probe functions of the CNC react to the up flank leading edge or down flank trailing edge of the probe signal This probe is connected to the connector X7 of the AXES module Value Meaning sign Positive pulse 24 V or 5 V sign Negative pulse 0 V Default value sign Indicate the position of the tabletop probe used for tool calibration These position values must be absolute and
235. ction or its feedrate On axes with distance coded feedback system Home switches are no longer necessary since the axes may be homed anywhere along its travel However a m p REFVALUE P36 must be set when operating with leadscrew error compensation The home search will be performed on one axis at a time and in the selected sequence The axes will move a maximum of 20 mm or 100 mm in the direction set by a m p REFDIREC P33 at the feedrate set by a m p REFEED2 P35 each axis until the marker pulse is found If during the home search the home switch is pressed if any the CNC will reverse the homing direction i If after the machine is all set up itis necessary to remove the feedback system it may happen that when it is reinstalled its marker pulse is no longer at the same physical location as it was before In that case the distance shift between the previous marker pulse location and the current one must be assigned to a m p REFSHIFT P47 of the affected axis in order for the machine reference point home to remain the same This way when searching home the axis will move this additional distance indicated by a m p REFSHIFT P47 value after finding the new marker pulse This movement is carried out at the feedrate indicated by a m p REFEED2 P35 Gantry axes Home search on Gantry axes may be carried out in JOG mode or by program It will be carried out as follows
236. ctions G275 through G299 The status of each one of the functions will be given in the 25 least significant bits and it will be indicated by a 1 when active and a 0 when not active or when not available in the current software version 0299 a298 G297 G296 295 6279 278 G277 G276 0275 It returns the status of functions G300 through G320 The status of each one of the functions will be given in the 25 least significant bits and it will be indicated by a 1 when active and a 0 when not active or when not available in the current software version G320 6319 G318 6317 6316 0804 303 0302 G301 6300 Returns data on the abscissa axis bits 4 to 7 and the ordinate axis bits 0 3 of the active plane in 32 bits and in binary 7654 3210 180 Abscissa 2 ous axis The axes are coded in 4 bits and indicate the axis number according to the programming order LONGAX MIRROR SCALE SCALE X C ORGROT PRBST CLOCK TIME DATE CYTIME FIRST Example If the CNC controls the X Y and Z axes and the ZX plane G18 is selected CNCRD PLANE R100 M33 assigns the hexadecimal value 31 to register R100 Abscissa axis 3 0011 gt Z axis Ordinate axis 1 0001 gt X axis This variable can only be used at the mill model It returns the number according to the programming order corresponding to the longitudinal axis This will be the one selected with the G15 function and by defaul
237. cution of the corresponding function or functions has begun 3 The PLC will execute all the auxiliary functions required it being necessary to analyze the general CNC logic outputs MBCD1 through MBCD7 and MSTROBE to execute the M functions SBCD and SSTROBE to execute the S function TBCD and TSTROBE to execute the T function T2BCD and T2STROBE to execute the second T function Once this has been executed the PLC must activate the general logic input AUXEND to indicate to the CNC that the processing of the required functions was completed 4 Once the general input is active the CNC will require that this signal be kept active for a period of time greater than that defined by means of the g m p MINAENDW P30 This way erroneous interpretations of this signal by the CNC due to an improper PLC program logic are avoided 5 Once the period of time MINAENDW P30 has elapsed with the general input AUXEND at a high logic level the CNC will deactivate the general logic outputs MSTROBE SSTROBE TSTROBE 2 to tell the PLC that the execution of the required auxiliary function or functions has been completed When executing 2 consective blocks which send information to the PLC and after finishing the execution of the first block the CNC waits a MINAENDW period of time before starting to execute the second block This way it assures that a MINAENDW del
238. d from the PLC using high level commands Each one of these variables is referred to by its mnemonic that must be written in upper case capital letters Mnemonics ending in X C indicate a set of 9 elements formed by the corresponding root followed by X Y Z U V W A B and C ORG X C gt ORGX ORGY ORGZ ORGU ORGV ORGW ORGA ORGB ORGC e Mnemonics ending in nindicate that the variables are grouped in tables To access an element of any of these tables indicate the field of the desired table using the relevant mnemonic followed by the desired element TORn gt TOR1 TOR3 TOR11 These variables can also be referred to by its corresponding mnemonic and a register that indicates the element number of that table TORn gt TOR R1 TOR R23 CNERDA TORTR2 2 MESES Valk QI Itassignsthe radius value ofthe offset indicated by Register R222 to register R100 111 Variables associated with tools These variables are associated with the tool offset table tool table and tool magazine table so the values which are assigned to or read from these fields will comply with the formats established for these tables Tool table for mill model CNC The radius length 1 and wear offset 1 values of the tool are given in the units set by g m p INCHES If INCHES 0 in ten thousandths of a millimeter 2999999999 If INCHES 1 in hundred thousandths of an inch 2393700787 If rotary axis in ten thousandths of a degree 99
239. d has several auxiliary functions M S T the CNC waits a time period set by g m p MINAENDW P30 between two consecutive transfers 9 2 2 Transferring the auxiliary miscellaneous M functions without the AUXEND signal 1 Once the block has been analyzed and after passing the corresponding values in variables MBCD1 7 the CNC will tell the PLC through the general logic output 5 that the required auxiliary function or functions must be executed 4 MINAENDW 2 The CNC will keep the general logic output MSTROBE active during the time indicated by means of g m p MINAENDW P30 Once this period of time has elapsed the CNC will continue to execute the program It is advisable for the MINAENDW value to be equal to or greater than the duration of a PLC cycle in order to ensure the detection of this signal by the PLC 3 When the PLC detects the activation of the general logic signal MSTROBE it will execute the required miscellaneous functions in the MBCD1 7 variables CNC PLC COMMUNICATION Auxiliary M S T function transfer FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 249 9 3 Displaying messages errors and screens The PLC has a series of marks that allow messages and errors to be displayed in the CNC as well as displaying screens which have been defined previously by the user Displaying messages 9 The PLC has 128 mark
240. d if any is modified it is modified at the drive The CNC does not have parameters ofthe drive although their copies may be stored in the memkey card Card A When accessing the parameters of a drive the CNC shows a screen that looks like this Refer to the drive manual for further details on commands variables etc displayed on the screen AXIS X DRIVE PARAM rm 11 50 14 General Parameters NODE 1 VALUE COMMENT SERCOS ID 0 VelocityPolarityParameters 200 r p m VelocityLimit 50 milisec VelocityIntegralTime 0 milisec KD Velo I193 5 5 CurrentProportionalGain 125 5 CurrentIntegralTime ACCESS VERSION V01 00 AXIS 100 1 31 20 10 000 EXECUTE CHANGE CHANGE FLASH BS WORD MODTEY COMMAND GROUP SET DRIVE n the GROUP window one must select the group of parameters or variables to be displayed To change the group press the Change Group softkey select the new group with the t keys and press ENTER n the SET window one must select the set of parameters or variables to be displayed To select another set press the Change set softkey select the new set with the 9 keys and press ENTER The NODE window shows the node number identifying that drive in the CAN connection i e the position of its rotary switch In other words t
241. d of the cycle Inthe 4th cycle scan the image value of M3 is 1 and the real value of O5is setto 1 5 aly E e 59 59 RT oc FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 199 Cycle time INTRODUCTION TO THE PLC FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 200 6 3 Cycle time The time the PLC requires to execute the program is called cycle time and can vary in the successive cycles of a same program as the conditions under which they are executed are not the same plc m p WDGPRG PO sets the maximum cycle execution time This is called WATCH DOG time and if a cycle is executed which lasts longer than 1 5 times this time or two cycles are executed one after the other taking longer than this time period the CNC will display the WATCH DOG error of the main module Cicle Cicle cle 2 je gt lt gt lt gt gt This way the execution of cycles that due to their duration disturb the operation of the machine can be prevented and the PLC can be prevented from executing a cycle which has no end due to a programming error 6 4 6 4 1 Modular structure of the program The program to be executed by the PLC consists of a series of modules which are appropriately defined by means of directing instructions The modules which can make up the program are Main module PRG
242. d without previously entering the spindle speed limit Otherwise an error message will be issued When repeating the execution of the program the speed limit needs not be entered it must only be entered when executing the program for the first time While executing a program if a new limitis entered in MDI it replaces the previous one n independent MC or TC cycles it is not required to enter the SMAX because it is already defined in each cycle f the program being executed has a G92 function the program will only be valid if the value defined in G92 is smaller than the one programmed by MDI When having two main spindles the speed limit entered will be valid for both PLC programming example PRG REA CNCRD OPMODA R100 M1000 Reading of the OPMODA variable BOR100 AND INCYCLE 100 Indicator of program in execution DFU M100 CNCRD PRGN R101 M1000 CNCRD MDISL R102 M1000 At the beginning of the execution it reads the program being executed CNCRD and the speed limit set by MDISL M100 CNCRD PRGSL R103 M1000 While executing it reads the speed limit set by the CNC M100 AND CPS R101 NE R201 M101 If there is a new program in execution it activates mark M101 M100 AND CPS R101 EO R201 M102 If itis the same program it activates mark M102 M101 AND CPS R102 EQ 0 10 If there is a new program in execution M101 and the speed has not been limited
243. dicated in register R101 CNCWR R110 KEYSCR M10 Process only keystrokes coming from the CNC KEYSRC This variable allows reading or modifying the source of keystrokes possible values being 0 Keyboard 1 PLC 2 DNC The CNC only allows modification of this variable if it is set to O or 1 Once the keystroke simulation is finished it is advisable to re enable the CNC keyboard in order to be able to access the various operating modes of the CNC The will assign a value of 0 to this variable on power up and after pressing SHIFT RESET ANAOn This variable allows the required analog output n to be read or modified The value assigned will be expressed in 0 0001 volt units and within 10 V Other variables The analog outputs which are free among the eight 1 through 8 available at the CNC may be modified the corresponding error being displayed if an attempt is made to write in one which is occupied SELPRO When having two probe inputs it allows selecting the active input On power up it assumes the value of 1 thus selecting the first probe input To select the second probe input set it to a value of 2 Accessing this variable from the CNC interrupts block preparation DIAM In the lathe model it changes the programming mode for X axis coordinates between radius and diameter When changing the value of this variable the CNC assumes the new way to program the followi
244. dicular to the main XY Uds CNC 8035 U VW auxiliary axes parallel to X Y Z respectively A B C Rotary axes on each axis X Y Z Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 123 5 Axes and coordinate systems FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 124 In the figure below an example of the nomenclature of the axes on a milling profiling machine with a tilted table yX Axis selection From the possible 9 axes that there could be the CNC lets the OEM select up to 3 of them at the mill model and 2 of them at the lathe model Moreover all the axes should be suitably defined as linear rotary etc through the machine parameters of axes which appear in the Installation and Start up Manual There is no limitation to the programming of the axes and interpolations can be made simultaneously with up to 3 axes Example of milling The machine has two regular linear axes X Y and Z an analog spindle S and a handwheel Setting of g m p AXIS1 PO through AXIS8 P7 AXIS1 PO 1 X axis associated with feedback X1 and output O1 AXIS2 P1 Y axis associated with feedback X2 and output O2 AXISS3 P2 Z axis associated with feedback X3 and output O3 AXISA 10 5 associated with feedback X5 1 6 and output O5 5 4 AXIS6 P5 AXIS7 P6 11 Handwheel associated with feedback input X6 1 6 8 P7 0 The CNC activates a mach
245. does not display the corresponding spindle but keeps controlling it Same as when setting a m p DFORMAT P1 24 This mark can be activated and deactivated at any time and it also cancels the feedback alarms which the machine parameter does not do LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Spindle logic inputs FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 274 10 4 Key inhibiting logic inputs KEYDIS1 R500 KEYDIS2 R501 KEYDIS3 R502 KEYDIS4 R503 The PLC can individually inhibit the operation of the panel keys setting the corresponding bit of one of these 32 bit registers high Inhibited key Inhibited key 10 H N KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 5 Y RESET KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 ESC KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 SHIFT KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 CAPS KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 PG DW KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 PG UP KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 KEYDIS2 KEYDIS1 30 KEYDIS1 31 MAIN MENU Key inhibiting logic inputs l LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ENTER HELP ok ZEE E b Ik LE c o 0 01 m m nm ON Nm m
246. dwheel or while tracing It is recommended not to activate these filters on machines carrying out movements against a hard stop TYPE P71 Filter type Two types of filters may be used namely low passing or anti resonance To obtain a good machining quality all the axes and the spindle interpolating with each other should be defined with the same type of filter and with the same frequency Value Meaning 0 Low passing filter 1 Anti resonance notch filter Default value 0 When defining anti resonance filters parameters NORBWIDTH and SHARE must also be set Low passing filter The low passing filter is used to limit the 1 jerk by making the movements smoother although it has the drawback that it rounds the corners slightly 0 707 348 FREQUEN Anti resonance filter notch filter The anti resonance notch filter must be n used when the machine has a resonance e frequency to be eliminated 0 707 Ao 3dB fi f2 FREQUEN FREQUEN P72 The meaning of this parameter depends on the type of filter being applied For the low passing filter it indicates the cutoff frequency or frequency at which its amplitude drops 3 dB or reaches 70 of the nominal amplitude 30B 20 log A Ao gt A 0 707 Ao For the anti resonance notch filter it indicates the mid frequency or frequency at which the resonance reaches its maximum value Possible values Be
247. e FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 344 DFU I SIMULA SET M120 ERA M121 126 Whenever the operator requests the simulation I SIMULA marks M120 through M126 must be activated z MOV PLCKEY KEYBOARD CNCWR KEYBOARD KEYSRC M100 indicate to the CNC that from now on the keys will be coming from the PLC PLCKEY z MOV MAINMENU KEYCODE SET SENDKEY and send the code for the MAIN MENU key M120 AND SENTOK RES M120 RES SENTOK SET M121 If the previous key was sent out successfully SENTOK flags M120 and SENTOK will be turned off the flag for the next stage M121 is activated z MOV SIMULATE KEYCODE SET SENDKEY and the code for the SIMULATE key F2 is sent out M121 AND SENTOK RES M121 RES SENTOK SET M122 If the previous key was sent out successfully SENTOK flags M121 and SENTOK will be turned off the flag for the next stage M122 is activated MOV KEY1 KEYCODE SET SENDKEY mts and the code for the 1 key is sent out M122 AND SENTOK RES M122 RES SET M123 If the previous key was sent out successfully SENTOK flags M122 and SENTOK will be turned off the flag for the next stage M123 is activated z MOV KEY2 KEYCODE SET SENDKEY and the code for the 2 key is sent out M123 AND SENTOK RES M123 RES SENTOK SET M124 If the previous key was sent out successfully flags M123 and SENTOK
248. e The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the spindle is in position Spindle logic outputs LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 291 10 9 Logic outputs of key status KEYBD1 R560 KEYBD2 R561 KEYBD3 R562 KEYBD4 R563 These registers indicate whether or not one of the keys on the keyboard or on the operator panel is pressed When one of these keys is pressed the corresponding bit will be set high and it will return low when the key is released keystroke code keystroke code KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 SHIFT KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 CAPS KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 PG DW KEYBD1 KEYBD2 PG UP KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 29 KEYBD2 KEYBD1 30 KEYBD2 FAGOR 2 KEYBD1 31 KEYBD2 CNC 8035 z RESET ESC MAIN MENU He LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS e Logic outputs of key status A G M R ez l ENTER HELP i Ao ZEE nl O1 mre N ours m N 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 292 The values returned by register K
249. e one currently in execution 12 1 1 Considerations Screen editor The a m p AXISTYPE of each axis of the machine must be set properly indicating whether that axis is controlled by the CNC or from the PLC The axes of the PLC channel can only be governed from the PLC They may be edited and part programs may be generated with axes of the PLC channel This permits generating part programs or subroutines associated with the PLC channel Itissues an error message when trying to execute from the CNC channel a program block that includes a PLC axis When all the axes of the machine are set to be governed from the CNC with the CNCEX action only blocks programmed in high level language may be executed through the PLC execution channel Axis control To govern axes managed by PLC use the following marks associated with Feed hold and Transfer Inhibit FEEDHOP M5004 Similar to the FEEDHOL signal FHOUTP M5504 Similar to the FHOUT signal XFERINP M5005 Similar to the XFERINH signal Auxiliary M functions To control the M functions managed by the PLC the following marks and registers are generated MBCDP1 through MBCDP7 R565 through R571 similar to signals MBCD1 through MBCD7 AUXENDP M5006 Similar to the AUXEND signal MSTROBEP M5505 Similar to the MSTROBE signal Data transfer when executing at the PLC the action CNCEX ASCII Block Mark the CNC detects that the contents of the ASCII block bein
250. e Meaning sign Positive direction sign Negative direction Default value sign Indicates the spindle s positioning speed when in M19 and the synchronizing speed until it finds the home switch Possible values Between 0 0001 degrees min and 99999 9999 degrees min Default value 9000 degrees min Indicates the synchronizing speed of the spindle after hitting the home switch and until it finds the marker pulse Possible values Between 0 0001 degrees min and 99999 9999 degrees min Default value 360 degrees min Indicates the position value assigned to the reference point of the spindle home or marker pulse Possible values Within 99999 9999 degrees Default value 0 Indicates the analog voltage corresponding to the maximum speed of gears 1 2 3 and 4 Possible values Integer numbers between 0 mV and 9999 mV Default value 9500 9 5 V There is no need to set this parameter for an axis handled via CAN GAINUNIT P41 ACFGAIN P42 M19TYPE P43 The CNC takes this parameter into account when operating in closed loop M19 Defines the units for s m p PROGAIN P23 and DERGAIN P24 Value Meaning 0 millivolts degree 1 millivolts 0 01 degree Default value 0 mV degree This parameter is used when working with the spindle in closed loop A value of 1 will be assigned when the analog voltage corresponding to a following error of 1 degree is very small This offers greater s
251. e PLC as a signed integer which could be referred to in the following formats Decimal Integer within x2147483647 Hexadecimal Number preceded by the sign and between 0 and FFFFFFFF Binary Number preceded by the letter B and made up of up to 32 bits 1 or 0 Directing instructions E R All consultations will be performed on real values A IMA All consultations will be performed on image values IRD R Updates the 1 resources with the values of the physical inputs MRD Updates resources M5000 5957 and R500 559 with the values of the logic CNC outputs OWR Updates the physical outputs with the real values of the O resources MWR Updates the logic CNC inputs internal variables with the values of resources M5000 5957 and R500 599 TRACE Captures data for the Logic Analyzer while executing the PLC cycle APPENDIX Summary of PLC commands FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 361 APPENDIX Summary of PLC commands FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 362 Simple consulting Instructions 1 512 Inputs 1 512 Outputs M 1 5957 Marks T 1 256 Timers C 1 256 Counters B 0 31 R 1 499 Register Bits Flank detection consulting Instructions DFU Up flank detection 1 512 DFD Down flank detection O 1 512 M 1 5957 Comparison consulting Instructions T 1 256 GT T 1 256 C 1 256 GE C 1 256 R 1 559 EQ R 1 55
252. e mark M2003 is called zero flag and indicates whether the result of an AND OR XOR operation equals zero in which case it follows that M2003 1 Examples with R200 B1001 0010 R201 BO100 0101 200 R201 R202 202 80 2003 1 R200 R201 R203 R203 B11010111 M2003 0 XOR R200 R201 R204 R204 B11010111 M2003 0 AND B1111 R201 R205 R205 B00000101 2003 0 200 1111 R206 206 810011111 2003 0 XOR 1010 1110 R207 R207 B00000100 2003 0 Used to rotate registers clockwise RR or counterclockwise RL There are two types of rotations type 1 RR1 or RL1 and type 2 RR2 or RL2 Rotation type 1 RL1 or RR1 It inserts 0 at the least significant bit RL1 or at the most significant bit RR1 pushing the other bits of the register The value of the last bit disappears Rotation type 2 RL2 or RR2 Circular rotation of the register in the indicated direction Its programming format is Nr of repetitions Destination R1 559 R1 559 R1 559 0 31 Action instruction PLC PROGRAMMING FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 239 O installation manual Action instruction PLC PROGRAMMING FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 240 The origin and destination registers must always be defined even when they are both the same The number of repetitions indicates the consecutive number of times
253. e modified from OEM subroutine program MAXFLWE1 MAXFLWE2 PLC marks Name the logic inputs and outputs with the axis name BLOABOR Ending the execution of a block using a PLC mark main channel BLOABORP Ending the execution of a block using a PLC mark PLC channel ELIMIS Park the spindle While compiling the PLC program the outputs are initialized to zero Variables INST PRG SELPRO Variable to select the active probe input DIAM Variable to select the programming mode radius or diameter G2 G3 There is no need to program the center coordinates if their value is zero 41 44 These functions admit subroutines when the gear change is automatic FAGOR 8035 Version history T FAGOR 2 8035 Software V10 1x December 2004 List of features Manual Calculation of central unit heat dissipation INST New board Axes2 INST Automatic keyboard type identification INST Frequency filters for axes and spindles INST Machine parameters INST COMPMODE P175 New tool radius compensation methods Axis parameters that may be modified from OEM subroutine program REFVALUE REFDIREC FLIMIT Spindle parameters that may be modified from OEM subroutine program REFVALUE REFDIREC SLIMIT Variables INST PRG DNCSTA DNC communication status TIMEG Status of the timer count programmed with G4 HANDSE Handwheel s axis selector button pressed ANAI n Value o
254. e probe touches the part to the instant the CNC receives the probe signal ao ES 1 The probe keeps moving until the CNC receives the probe signal Parameter PRODEL indicates in milliseconds the delay mentioned earlier Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 255 Default value 0 While probing the CNC always takes into account the value assigned to parameter PRODEL and provides the following information variables associated with the coordinates TPOS DPOS Actual position of the probe when the CNC receives the probe signal Theoretical position of the probe when the probe touched the part With PRODEL 0 the DPOS variable has the same value as the TPOS variable Indicates whether the CNC maintains the tool offset number D on power up and after an EMERGENCY or RESET Value Meaning 0 It does not maintain it It always assumes offset DO 1 It maintains it Default value 0 gt 5 General machine parameters FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 59 General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 60 ACTGAIN2 P108 The axes and the spindle can have 2 sets of gains and accelerations By default the TRASTA P109 CNC always assumes the first set indicated by the parameters of the axis or of the
255. e program has been requested by the PLC to the CNC by means of the logic input CYSTART the latter will indicate that it is being executed by setting the INCYCLE signal high This signal is maintained high until the CNC finishes the part program or when this is stopped by means of the STOP key on the CONTROL PANEL or the general logic input STOP If the CNC is in the single block execution mode the INCYCLE signal is set low as soon as the block execution is concluded If the CNC is in JOG mode the INCYCLE signal is set low as soon as the position indicated has been reached If the CNC is in JOG mode and the axes are being jogged the INCYCLE signal goes high while any of the jog keys are pressed The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that a rapid positioning G00 is being executed The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that a tapping canned cycle is being executed G84 The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that a threading block is being executed G33 The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that a probing movement is being executed G75 G76 The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that a machine reference search is being executed G74 This output is only available on the mill model The CNC set this signal high to indicate to the PLC that a RIGID TAPPING operation G84 is being performed RETRAEND M5522 CSS M5523 The CNC sets this signal high to indicate to the PLC that
256. e set by the zero offset Reference point This is a point on the machine established by the manufacturer physical location of the marker pulse from the feedback device When the feedback system is semi absolute with coded marker pulse lo this point is only used when leadscrew error compensation must be applied onto the axis When the feedback is a regular incremental system without coded marker pulse lo besides using this point in the leadscrew error compensation the system is synchronized atthis point instead of having to move the axis all the way to the Machine Reference Zero home y ZMR Y 5 gt 4 mx 7 gt A 4 ZMR nl gt M Machine zero Part zero R Machine reference point XMW YMW ZMW etc Coordinates of part zero XMR YMR ZMR etc Coordinates of machine reference point CONCEPTS Reference systems FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 157 5 Reference systems FAGOR 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 158 5 6 1 Home search With this CNC home search may be performed in jog mode or by program Home search may be carried out on one axis at a time or on several axes at the same time When this search with or without distance coded lo is carried out in JOG mode the active zero offset will be cancelled and the CNC will display the position values indicated by a m p REFVALUE P36
257. eases in time Bit 13 Additional pulse only in circular paths G2 G3 This bit indicates whether the additional pulse of velocity command is applied only on circular paths G2 G3 01 41 or in any other type of movement bit 0 Not being used Not being used JERKACT P160 TLOOK P161 MAINTASF P162 CAXGAIN P163 Jerk ON This parameter has 16 bits counted from right to left bit 1514131211109 8 765 43 21 0 E E E NH H H NH NH NH Each bit has a function or work mode associated with it By default all the bits will be assigned the value of 0 Assigning the value of 1 activates the corresponding function Bit Meaning 0 Apply jerk control in look ahead 1 15 Not being used Default value in all the bits 0 Bit 0 Apply jerk control in look ahead That bit indicates whether jerk control is to be applied 01 41 or not bit 0 look ahead Using jerk in look ahead a trapezoidal acceleration profile is applied with a ramp slope equivalent to the maximum jerk of the axis The maximum jerk depends on the value assigned to a m p JERKLIM P67 of that axis and of the number of axes involved in the programmed path For the axes whose JERKLIM parameter has been set to zero the CNC assumes the jerk value recommended for that parameter Real block processing time for look ahead
258. ed RESETOUT M5503 Indicates that the CNC is set to initial conditions LOPEN M5506 Indicates that the positioning loop for the axes is open ALARM M5507 An alarm or emergency condition was detected MANUAL M5508 The manual operation JOG mode has been selected SBOUT M5511 The single block execution mode has been selected INCYCLE M5515 The part program is being executed RAPID M5516 rapid traverse is being executed G00 TAPPING M5517 A tapping cycle is being executed G84 THREAD M5518 A threading block is being executed G33 PROBE M5519 A probing movement is being executed G75 G76 ZERO M5520 A machine reference search is being executed G74 CSS M5523 The G96 function is selected FAGOR 2 SELECTO M5524 Position selected at the front panel switch SELECT1 M5525 Position selected at the front panel switch CNC 8035 SELECT2 M5526 Position selected at the front panel switch SELECTS3 M5527 Position selected at the front panel switch SELECT4 M5528 Position selected at the front panel switch SELECT5 M5529 Position selected at the front panel switch Sorr M V11 1x SELECT6 M5530 Position selected at the front panel switch SELECT7 M5531 Position selected at the front panel switch SELECTOR R564 Position selected at the front panel switch 367 5 5532 Indicates that the auxiliary M functions which are indicated registers R550 to R556 must be executed SSTROBE M5533 Indicates that the auxiliary S
259. ed instructions as well as interpret the different elements connected to it the CNC must know the specific data of the machine such as feedrates accelerations feedback automatic tool change etc This data is determined by the machine builder and can be introduced either from the CNC s keyboard or via the CNC s two serial ports First the general machine parameters must be set since they determine the machine axes There are some parameters to indicate whether the machine has cross compensation or not This compensation table will be generated by the CNC from the values assigned to those parameters The general machine parameters also determine the number of elements at the tables for tools tool magazine tool offsets and M functions miscellaneous The axes parameters will define the leadscrew compensation tables and they will only be generated for those axes which require them When selecting the drive parameters at the CNC it is possible to display and modify the parameters stored at each drive The CNC does not have parameters of the drive although their copies may be stored in the memkey card Card A MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 41 subroutine MACHINE PARAMETERS Parameters that may be modified from the OEM program or OEM FAGOR 2
260. ed their software limits must be measured and set This is achieved a single axis at a time as follows Move the axis in the positive direction towards the end of the axis travel stopping at a safe distance from the mechanical end of travel stop Assign the coordinate shown by the for that point to a m p LIMIT P5 Repeat these steps in the negative direction assigning the resulting coordinate to a m p LIMIT P6 Once this process is completed hit SHIFT RESET or turn the CNC off and back on in order for it to assume the new values Adjustment of the drift offset and maximum feedrate 00 These adjustments are performed on servo drives of the axes and on spindle drives Offset drift adjustment Disconnect the analog input and short circuit it with a wire jumper Turn the offset potentiometer of the drive until the voltage on the tach terminals is OmVdc Check this with a volt meter set at a range of 200 mV Remove take the wire jumper that short circuited the analog input Maximum feedrate adjustment It is recommended to adjust the drives so the maximum feedrate is obtained with an analog signal of 9 5V If they are adjusted to a different voltage it must be indicated in the a m p or s m p MAXVOLT P37 Also the maximum feedrate must be indicated in the a m p GOOFEED P38 The maximum feedrate can be calculated from the motor rpm the gear ratios and the type of leadscrew being used Example A mot
261. ed in the n block of the program p GPOS X O n p 356 Variables associated with electronic handwheels Variable CNC PLC DNC section 11 7 HANPF R R Pulses received from 1st handwheel since the CNC was turned on HANPS Pulses received from 2nd handwheel since the CNC was turned on HANPT Pulses received from 3rd handwheel since the CNC was turned on HANPFO Pulses received from 4th handwheel since the CNC was turned on HANDSE For handwheels with a selector button it indicates whether that button has been pressed or not HANFCT R Multiplying factor different for each handwheel when having several HBEVAR R R HBEhandwheel Reading enabled axis being jogged and multiplying factor x1 x10 x100 MASLAN R W Linear path angle for Path handwheel or Path Jog mode MASCFI R W Arc center coordinates for Path handwheel mode or Path jog MASCSE R W Arc center coordinates for Path handwheel mode or Path jog e Feedback related variables APPENDIX Summary of internal CNC variables Variable CNC PLC DNC section 11 8 ASIN X C R R Asignal of the CNC s sinusoidal feedback for the selected axis BSIN X C R R R B signal of the CNC s sinusoidal feedback for the selected axis ASINS R R A signal of the CNC s sinusoidal feedback for the spindle BSINS R R R P signal of the CNC s sinusoidal feedback for the spindle Variables associated with the main spindle Variable CNC PLC DNC sectio
262. ed to reference for example O1 O25 0102 etc The PLC may control 512 outputs although when communicating with the outside world it can only access the physical ones Local physical outputs are the ones corresponding to the central unit Output O1 coincides with the emergency output of the CNC connector thus it must be kept high logic level 1 FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 205 Marks PLC RESOURCES FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 206 7 3 5 These are elements capable of memorizing in one bit as if they were an internal relay information defined by the user their value being inalterable even when the power supply to the system is turned off This will be programmed by the letter M followed by the number of the mark which it is wished to reference for example M1 M25 M102 etc The PLC controls the following marks User marks M1 M2000 Arithmetic flag marks M2003 Clock marks M2009 M2024 Fixed status marks M2046 and M2047 Marks associated with messages M4000 M4127 Marks associated with errors M4500 M4563 Screen marks M4700 M4955 CNC communication marks M5000 M5957 Marks M1 thru M2047 have image values unlike the remainder of the marks and so the PLC will always work with their real values The arithmetic flag mark available at the PLC is M2003 Is the Zero flag and is set to 1 high logic level when the result of
263. ed value For example If the measured voltage was 0 945 V then setthis parameterto 9 45 V in other words P37 9450 Next set a m p FFGAIN P25 to the desired value As an example the following values may be used For slow machining between 40 and 60 For regular feed machining between 60 and 80 Machines laser plasma between 80 and 100 O O installation manual 5 5 5 Derivative AC forward gain setting With the derivative gain it is possible to reduce the following error during the acc dec stages Its value is given by a m p DERGAIN P24 When this additional analog voltage is due to fluctuations of following error ACFGAIN 46 NO it is called derivative gain oh Analog output 9 Feedback CONCEPTS Axis adjustment When it is due to variations of the programmed feedrate ACFGAIN P46 YES it is called AC forward gain since it is due to acc dec Best results are usually obtained when using it as AC forward Gain ACFGAIN P46 YES together with feed forward gain This gain is only to be used when operating with acceleration deceleration A practical value between 2 to times the Proportional PROGAIN P23 may be used To perform a critical adjustment proceed as follows Verify that there is no oscillations on following error In other words that it is not unstable Check with an oscilloscope the tacho voltage or the analog voltage at the dri
264. ed via PLC Feedrate selected by program Active feedrate at CNC in m rev or inch rev DNCFPR Feedrate selected via DNC PLCFPR Feedrate selected via PLC PRGFPR Feedrate selected by program Variables associated with function G32 PRGFIN R R R Feedrate selected by program in 1 min Variables associated with feedrate override 95 FRO Feedrate Override 95 active at the CNC PRGFRO Override selected by program DNCFRO Override selected via DNC PLCFRO Override selected via PLC CNCFRO Override selected from the front panel knob PLCCFR Override of the PLC execution channel Coordinate related variables Variable CNC PLC DNC section 11 6 FAGOR 2 PPOS X C R Programmed theoretical position value coordinate POS X C Machine coordinates Real coordinates of the tool base TPOS X C Machine coordinates Theoretical coordinates of the tool base CNC 8035 APOS X C Partcoordinates Real coordinates of the tool base ATPOS X C R Part coordinates Theoretical coordinates of the tool base DPOS X C R Theoretical position of the probe when the probe touched the part FLWE X C R Following error of the indicated axis DIST X C R Distance traveled by the indicated axis LIMPL X C Second upper travel limit Sorr M V11 1x LIMMI X C R Second lower travel limit R SOFT Veg DPLY X C Coordinate of the selected axis displayed on the screen Coordinate of the selected axis programm
265. edrate of F 1000 mm min MACHINE PARAMETERS Command from the drive 9 5V for a feedrate of 20000 mm min Command for a feedrate of F 1000 mm min Command 9 5 20000 x 1000 475 mV Therefore PROGAIN 475 DERGAIN P24 Indicates the value of the derivative gain Its value represents the analog voltage in millivolts corresponding to a change in following error of 1mm 0 03937 inches in 10 milliseconds This analog voltage will be added to the one calculated for the proportional gain Analog voltage DERGAIN e PROGAIN 10 t To apply this gain to an axis that axis should be working with acc dec a m p ACCTIME P18 other than 0 Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 65535 Default value 0 derivative gain not applied FFGAIN P25 Indicates the of the analog voltage due to the programmed feedrate The rest will depend upon the following error Both the proportional and derivative gains will be applied onto this following error FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x Analog voltage Sorr T V12 1x 2 e PROGAIN 2 DERGAIN FFGAIN Fprog x MEXVOET 10 t 100 GOOFEED 79 Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 M V11 1x T V12 1x 80 LOOPCHG P26 MINANOUT P27 SERVOFF P28 The feed forward gain improves the position loop minimizing the following error but it should
266. eedrate in mm minute or inches minute selected by DNC If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected It returns the feedrate in mm minute or inches minute selected by program If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Read write variables associated with function G94 It returns the feedrate in mm minute or inches minute selected by PLC If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Read only variables associated with function G95 Itreturnsthe feedrate selected atthe CNC by function G95 In mm turn or inches turn This feedrate may be indicated by program by PLC or by DNC the CNC selects one of them the one indicated by DNC has the highest priority and the one indicated by program has the lowest priority It returns the feedrate in mm turn or inches turn selected by DNC If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected It returns the feedrate in mm turn or inches turn selected by program If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Read write variables associated with function G95 It returns the feedrate in mm turn or inches turn selected by PLC If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected PRGFIN FRO DNCFRO CNCFRO PRGFRO PLCFRO PLCCFR Read only variables associated with function G32 It returns the feedrate selected by program in 1 min Likewise the CNC variable FEED associated with G94 indicates the resulting feedrate in mm mi
267. efault value 0 ROLLOVER P55 The CNC takes this parameter into account when the axis has been set as rotary AXISTYPE 2 or It indicates whether the rotary axis is Rollover or not Value Meaning NO It is NOT Rollover YES It is Rollover Default value YES DRIBUSID P56 It indicates the address of the digital drive CAN associated with the axis It corresponds with the value of the drive s rotary switch address device select Value Meaning 0 Analog axis 1 8 Address of the digital drive Default value 0 It is recommended not necessary that the Can addresses of the various axes and spindles be consecutive and start from number 1 the address of the CNC is always 0 For example with CAN axes and 1 CAN spindle the values of this parameter must be 1 2 3 and 4 EXTMULT P57 This parameter is to be used when utilizing a distance coded feedback system It indicates the ratio between the mechanical period orthe graduation pitch on the glass or steel tape and the electrical period or period of the feedback signal supplied to the Possible values Period of the graduation on the glass mechanical period or EXTMULT P57 Period of the feedback signal electrical period Default value 0 Example E g Fagor linear encoder FOT has a graduation pitch of 100 um and a feedback signal period of 20 um EXTMULT 100 20 5 Values to be assigned for Fagor encoders with di
268. efault value NO It is only used on the Lathe model CNCs and it indicates which axis the handwheel is assigned to It is set according to the following codes Value Meaning Value Meaning 0 None 5 V axis 1 X axis 6 W axis 2 Y axis 7 A axis 3 Z axis 8 B axis 4 U axis 9 axis Default value 0 shared It is used on the lathe model CNC It indicates whether the RESET is effective with or without a previous CYCLE STOP Value Meaning YES The CNC accepts the RESET any time NO Only if the STOP condition occurs Default value NO If DIRESET YES the CNC first carries out an internal CYCLE STOP to interrupt program execution and then executes the RESET Obviously if it is performing a threadcutting or similar operation not admitting a CYCLE STOP it will wait for the operation to be concluded before interrupting the program Not being used When using Look Ahead the operator sets the percentage of acceleration being applied in Look Ahead by means of function G51 With g m p MACELOOK P79 the OEM can limit the maximum percentage of acceleration that the user may set with G51 Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 255 Default value 0 there is no limit P80 MPGRES P81 MPGNPUL P82 These parameters must be used when having an electronic handwheel to jog the axes MPGCHG P80 Parameter MPGCHG P80 indicates the turning direction of the electronic handwheel
269. egisters or a number and a register content SBS Subtracts between the contents of two registers or between a number and a register content MLS Multiplies the contents of two registers or anumber and a register content DVS Divides the contents of two registers or a number and a register content MDS Module between registers contents or between a number and a register content Number of bits to transmit Destinati on code Source code 1 512 O 1 512 M 1 5957 T 1 256 C 1 256 R 1 559 1 512 O 1 512 M 1 5957 R 1 559 0 Bin 1 BCD 0 Bin 1 BCD R1 559 R1 559 1 559 Logic action instructions AND Logic AND operation between register contents or between a number and a register content OR Logic OR operation between register contents or between a number and a register content XOR Logic XOR operation between register contents or between a number and a register content 1 2 Right hand register rotation 1 2 Left hand register rotation AND R1 559 R1 559 OR 1 559 Number of repetitions Code R1 559 R1 559 R1 559 0 31 APPENDIX Summary of PLC commands FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 363 J O LI installation manual APPENDIX Summary of PLC commands FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 364 Specific action instructions ERA Group erase
270. el FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 278 10 5 Logic inputs of the PLC channel FEEDHOP M5004 XFERINP M5005 AUXENDP M5006 To govern the axes managed by PLC It is similar to general logic input FEEDHOL M5002 but for the PLC channel When the PLC sets this signal low the CNC stops the axes maintaining spindle rotation When the signal returns to the high logic level the movement of the PLC axes continues This input must always be defined in the PLC program It is similar to general logic input XFERINH M5003 but for the PLC channel If the PLC sets this signal low the CNC prevents the following block from starting but finishes the one it is executing When the signal returns to high logic level the CNC continues to execute the program This input must always be defined in the PLC program It is similar to general logic input AUXEND M5016 but for the PLC channel This signal is used in the execution of auxiliary M functions to tell the CNC that the PLC is executing them It operates in the following way 1 Once the block has been analyzed and after passing the corresponding values in variables MBCD1 7 the CNC will tell the PLC through the general logic output MSTROBEP that the required auxiliary function or functions must be executed 2 When the PLC detects the activation of the MSTROBEP signal it must deactivate the general l
271. elative humidity 30 95 non condensing Operating temperature between 5 C 41 F and 40 C 104 F with an average under 35 C 95 F Storage temperature between 25 C 13 F and 70 C 158 F Maximum operating altitude Meets the IEC 1131 2 standard Packaging Meets the EN 60068 2 32 standard Vibration When running 10 50 Hz amplitude 0 2 mm 10 While being shipped 10 50 Hz amplitude 1 mm 5g Free fall of packaged unit under Fagor ruling 1m Electromagnetic compatibility and safety Refer to the section on safety conditions in the introduction of this manual Degree of protection Central Unit IP54 for the front panel and IP2X for the rear panel Accessible parts inside the enclosure IP1X Operator panel IP54 Battery 3 5 V lithium battery Estimated life 3 years As from error indication low battery the information contained in the memory will be kept for 10 days maximum with the CNC off It must be replaced leem e a Neither attempt to recharge the battery nor expose it to temperatures over 100 212 F Do not short circuit the terminals for risk of explosion or combustion APPENDIX Technical specifications of the CNC FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 351 O installation manual APPENDIX Technical specifications of the CNC FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x
272. eletes the messages using the keyboard FAGOR 3 In the next PLC cycle since 110 is kept at 1 MSG2 is activated again CNC 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 250 Displaying errors The PLC has 64 marks with their corresponding mnemonic for displaying errors at the CNC M4500 ERROO1 M4501 ERRO02 M4502 ERR003 M4561 ERR062 M4562 ERRO63 4530 ERROS1 4531 ERROS2 M4563 ERRO064 4532 ERR033 25 When of these marks is activated they are set high they interrupt CNC part program execution It also displays the selected error message and its associated text in the middle of the screen The CNC allows a text to be associated to each PLC error PLC error editing mode It is recommended to change the state of these marks by means of accessible external inputs since the PLC will not stop and the CNC will receive the error message in each new PLC cycle scan thus preventing access to any of the PLC modes CNC PLC COMMUNICATION Displaying messages errors and screens Displaying screens pages The PLC has 256 marks with their corresponding mnemonic for displaying screens pages at the CNC M4700 4701 1 4702 2 4900 PIC200 M4953 PIC253 M4901 PIC201 M4954 PIC254 M4902 PIC202 M4955 PIC255 If one of these marks is activated high logic level the CNC will display the character asterisk on the PLC message display window upper ri
273. ensitivity for adjusting s m p PROGAIN P23 and DERGAIN P24 The CNC takes this parameter into account when operating in closed loop M19 Indicates whether or not the value assigned to a m p DERGAIN P24 is applied onto the variations of the programmed speed AC forward Value Meaning NO It is applied on variations of following error derivative gain YES It is applied on the variations of the programmed speed that are due to acceleration deceleration AC forward Default value YES ACFGAIN NO ACFGAIN YES This parameter sets the type of spindle orient M19 available It indicates whether the spindle must be homed when switching from open to closed loop or it is enough to home it once on power up Value Meaning 0 When switching from open loop to closed loop 1 Once after power up Default value 0 gt Spindle parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 101 Spindle parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 102 DRIBUSID P44 OPLACETI P45 SMOTIME P46 It indicates the address of the digital drive Sercos or CAN associated with the spindle It corresponds with the value of the drive s rotary switch address device select Value Meaning 0 Analog spindle 1 8 Address of the digital drive Default value 0 It is recommended
274. ent of the corresponding axis This movement will continue when the PLC sets this signal at the low logic level once more If the inhibited axis is moving together with other axes all these stop moving until the signal returns to the low logic level MIRROR2 M5154 MIRRORS M5204 Ifthe PLC sets one of these signals at a high logic level the CNC applies mirror image to the movement of the corresponding axis It must be borne in mind that if this signal is activated during a programmed movement the CNC will only apply mirror image to the movement not to the final coordinate G01 XO YO 1000 N10 G01 X70 Y42 20 G01 X100 60 N30 M30 when executing the programmed movement in block N20 the signal corresponding to the X axis MIRROR is active the CNC will apply mirror image to the remaining movement in X This way the new end of travel point will be X40 Y60 By means of the activation of these signals symmetrical parts can be executed by using a single program for example soles of shoes In order to obtain the same effect as functions G11 G12 G13 and G14 itis necessary for the corresponding axis or axes to be positioned at part zero when these signals are activated SWITCH2 M5155 SWITCH3 M5205 When having 2 axes controlled by the same servo drive this mark may be used to toggle the velocity commands between the two axes 0 Axis logic inputs LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS F
275. er has 16 bits counted from right to left For the block search Disabling in execution DISSIMUL O 1 XXX xxxx bit7 1 G SEARCH bit6 1 GMST SEARCH For simulation Disabling in simulation bit 10 1 RAPID SO bit 11 1 RAPID bit 12 1 MAIN PLANE bit132 1 G M S T FUNCTIONS bit 14 1 G FUNCTIONS bit 15 1 THEORETICAL PATH DISSIMUL 0 1 XXXX XXXX l gt 5 General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 73 Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 74 4 3 Axis parameters AXISTYPE PO 1 2 sets the type of axis and whether it is governed by the CNC or by the PLC Value Meaning Normal linear axis Rapid positioning linear axis GOO Normal rotary axis Rapid positioning rotary axis GOO Rotary axis with Hirth toothing positioning in whole degrees Normal linear axis commanded from the PLC Rapid positioning linear axis G00 commanded from the PLC Normal rotary axis commanded from the PLC Rapid positioning rotary axis G00 commanded from the PLC AN OA 8 ON o Rotary axis with Hirth toothing positioning in whole degrees commanded from the PLC Default value 0 E By
276. error The AC forward gain sets the percentage of analog output proportional to the feedrate increments acceleration and deceleration stages To use it acc dec must be active s m p ACCTIME P18 It is defined with s m p DERGAIN P24 and ACFGAIN P46 If ACFGAIN No it applies derivative gain If ACFGAIN Yes it applies AC forward gain Proportional gain setting In a pure proportional positional loop the analog output of the CNC to control the spindle is at all times proportional to the following error axis lag which is the difference between its theoretical and actual real position Analog output Proportional Gain x Following Error a m p PROGRAIN P23 sets the value of the proportional gain Expressed in millivolts degree it takes any integer between 0 and 65535 Its value indicates the analog output corresponding to a feedrate resulting in 1 of following error This value is taken for the first spindle gear and the CNC calculates the values for the rest of the gears Example The maximum speed for the 1st gear rapid traverse GOO is 500 rpm and we would like to obtain 1 at a speed of 1000 min 2 778 rpm Command from the drive 9 5V for 500 rpm Analog output corresponding to S 1000 min 2 778 rpm Analog velocity command S x 9 5 V MAXGEAR1 Analog voltage 9 5 V 500 rev min 2 778 rev min 252 778 mV Therefore PROGAIN 53 When setting the p
277. erts the value of P155 into mm CNCEX 01 WP155 F2000 101 Movement of the W axis Interrupt block preparation Same as in the CNC channel blocks are also prepared in advance in the PLC channel CNCEX G1 W100 M101 Movement of the W axis IF P100 0 actionl P100 is analyzed during block preparation The value of P100 may be different before during and after the movement of the W axis If itis to be analyzed after moving the axis function G4 must be programmed CNCEX G1 W100 M101 Movement of the W axis CNCEX G4 M102 Interrupts block preparation IF P100 0 actionl P100 is analyzed after moving the axis Likewise every time a PLC resource is accessed O M R block preparation is interrupted G1 W100 101 Movement of the W axis IF PLCI8 1 lt action2 gt 18 is checked after moving the axis Auxiliary M functions The M functions programmed in the PLC channel may be defined in the M function table In the PLC channel the following functions cannot be programmed MO M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M19 M30 M41 M42 M43 and M44 The following marks and registers are generated for managing the M functions MBCDP1 through MBCDP7 R565 through R571 similar to signals MBCD1 through MBCD7 AUXENDP M5006 Similar to the AUXEND signal MSTROBEP M5505 Similar to the MSTROBE signal PLC execution channel AX
278. erwise it will keep the EMERGENCY OUTPUT signal active low and it will display the corresponding error message Once the initialization process is over the PLC will execute the PLC program stored in memory If none is available it wait for one to be entered and executed When the execution of the first cycle CY1 or the first program scan is finished the PLC will assign the value of output O1 to physical output EMERGENCY OUTPUT It is recommended to program the CY1 cycle of the PLC program assigning a value of 1 to O1 when everything checks out fine and a value of 0 when there is an error The interface of the electrical cabinet will take into account all the elements that could cause this type of error Among such elements are e E stop has been pressed The travel limit of any axis has be exceeded There is a malfunction on a drive or it is locked without analog signal FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 36 O O installation manual When the CNC detects an error it will indicate it to the PLC with the general logic output ALARM and it will set the emergency output low pin 2 of connector X2 Since this signal corresponds to the PLC output O1 it can also be activated by the PLC program CNC ALARM s ELECTRICAL The recommended connection diagram is the following MACHINE AND POWER CONNECTION Connection of the emergency input and output
279. ese 2 signals at all times so both spindles can be controlled by the PLC When the PLC sets this signal high the CNC outputs a zero analog for the spindle SPDLEREV M5454 Main spindle The CNC considers these 2 signals at all times so both spindles can be controlled by the PLC When the PLC sets this signal high the CNC reverses the programmed spindle turning direction If while being this signal high a block containing an M3 or M4 is executed the spindle will start turning in the opposite direction SMOTOFS M5455 spindle The SMOTIME P46 filter set for the spindle with parameter P46 can be canceled from the PLC This SMOTIME filter will be activated or deactivated at the beginning of the block If one of these logic inputs is activated or deactivated while the CNC is overlapping blocks being executed in round corner it will be ignored until that operation is finished FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 269 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Spindle logic inputs FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 270 SERVOSON M5457 Main spindle These signals are controlled by the PLC and the CNC will process them only when the spindle is working in closed loop M19 Its treatment depends on the value assigned to s m p DWELL P17 DWELL 0 If s m p DWELL P17 has been set to 0 the CNC will check the status of the SERVOSON signal at the time when the EN
280. et input of timer T10 Trigger input TG1 TG2 TG3 TG4 These inputs allow the timer to be activated and it begins to time They are referred to by the letters TG1 TG2 TG4 followed by the number of the timer it is required to reference and the value which is required to start the count with time constant For example TG1 1 100 TG2 25 224 TG3 102 0 TG4 200 500 etc The time constant value is defined in thousandths of a second and it is possible to indicate this by means of a numerical value or by assigning it the internal value of an R register TG1 20 100 Activates timer T20 by means of trigger input TG1 and with a time constant of 100 milliseconds TG2 22 R200 Activates timer T22 by means of trigger input TG2 and with a time constant which will be defined in thousandths of a second by the value of Register R200 when the instruction is executed Inputs TG1 TG2 TG3 and TG4 are used to activate the timer in four different operating modes TG1 input in MONOSTABLE mode TG2 input in DELAYED CONNECTION mode TG3 input in DELAYED DISCONNECTION mode TG4 input in SIGNAL LIMITING mode This activation of the timer is made when a logic level transition of any of these inputs is produced either from to 1 or from 1 to 0 leading or trailing edge depending on the chosen input By default and every time the timer is initialized by means of the reset input TRS the PLC will assign logic
281. everses the spindle turning direction SERVOSON M5457 Servo signal 1 to move the spindle in closed loop M19 GEAR1 M5458 Spindle gear 1 selected GEAR2 M5459 Spindle gear 2 selected GEAR3 M5460 Spindle gear 3 selected GEAR4 M5461 Spindle gear 4 selected SPENAS M5462 With Sercos Speed enable signal of the drive DRENAS M5463 With Sercos Drive enable signal of the drive PLCFM19 M5464 Rapid synchronization feedrate in M19 M19FEED R505 Rapid synchronization feedrate in M19 PLCCNTL M5465 Spindle controlled directly by the PLC SANALOG R504 Spindle analog voltage Only for spindle controlled by PLC ELIMIS M5456 The CNC does not display the spindle although it keeps controlling it KEY INHIBITING LOGIC INPUTS KEYDIS1 R500 Inhibit the operation of the panel keys KEYDIS2 KEYDIS3 KEYDIS4 LOGIC INPUTS THE PLC CHANNEL g FEEDHOP M5004 Stops the PLC axes momentarily maintaining spindle rotation Ls 2 XFERINP M5005 Prevents the next block from being executed in the PLC channel but finishes the one a S being executed AUXENDP M5006 Indicates that the execution of the M S and T functions has completed BLOABORP M5061 Possibility to abort the PLC channel o 2 oO GENERAL LOGIC OUTPUTS E i CNCREADY M5500 CNC without errors START M5501 The CYCLE START key of the front panel has been pressed FHOUT M5502 Indicates that program execution has been interrupt
282. f the SANALOG input the CNC will update the analog voltage accordingly 3 Once the operation has concluded the CNC must recover the control of the spindle back from the PLC To do this CNC logic input PLCCNTL M5465 must be set low again A typical application of this feature is the control of the spindle oscillation during the spindle gear change 5 9 3 Spindle gear change With this CNC the machine can use a gear box for adjusting the best spindle speed and torque for the particular machining needs at any time The CNC admits up to 4 spindle gears that are determined by MAXGEAR1 P2 MAXGEAR2 P3 P4 and MAXGEAR4 P5 They indicate the maximum speed in rpm for each range The value assigned to MAXGEAR1 P2 will be the one corresponding to the lowest gear and the one assigned to MAXGEAR4 P5 will be the one corresponding to the highest gear When not using all 4 gears use the lower parameters starting with MAXGEAR 1 P2 Set the unused gears with the same value as the highest of the ones used Spindle CONCEPTS The auxiliary functions M41 M42 M43 and M44 are used to tell the PLC that spindle gear 1 2 3or 4 must be selected In turn the PLC must tell the CNC the speed gear being selected This will be indicated by means of the logic inputs for the spindle GEAR1 M5458 GEAR2 M5459 GEAR3 M5460 and GEAR4 5461 Since t
283. f the analog inputs APOS X C Real coordinates of the tool base referred to part zero ATPOS X C Theoretical coordinates of the tool base referred to part zero Retracing function INST If RETRACAC 2 the retrace function does not stop at the M functions The RETRACAC parameter is initialized with SHIFT RESET The number of blocks being retraced has been increased to 75 When activating tool radius compensation in the first motion block even if there is no movement INST of the plane axes Manual intervention with additive handwheel INST OPT G46 Maintain G46 when the home search does not involve any axis of the angular INST PRG transformation G151 G152 Programming in diameter or radius PRG MEXEC Execute a modal part program PRG Up to 319 G functions now available PRG The simulations without axis movement ignore the G4 OPT Maintain the feedrate selected in simulation OPT Software V10 12 February 2005 List of features Manual Look ahead INST PRG Software V10 13 April 2005 List of features Manual Hirth axis pitch may be set in degrees via parameters INST Rollover positioning axis Movement in G53 via the shortest way INST Software V10 15 June 2005 List of features Manual CAN servo system INST 12 01 August 2005 List of features Manual The CNC supports Memkey Card Compact Flash
284. f the logic input corresponding to the spindle GEAR1 GEAR4 The PLC then activates the logic input AUXEND to tell the CNC that the execution of the gear change has been completed Once the AUXEND input is activated the CNC will require that this signal be kept active for a time period greater than the value given to the g m p MINAENDW P30 This way erroneous interpretations of this signal by the CNC due to an improper PLC program logic are avoided Once the MINAENDW time has elapsed with the AUXEND general input kept high FAGOR the will check whether the new spindle gear has been selected by verifying that the corresponding input GEAR1 is set high CNC 8035 If itis it will cancel the general logic output MSTROBE to tell the PLC that the gear change has finished and if the corresponding input GEAR1 GEAR4 is not selected the CNC will stop the axes feed and the spindle rotation displaying the corresponding error message Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 271 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Spindle logic inputs FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 272 If the M41 M42 M43 or M44 function does not use the AUXEND signal The CNC indicates to the PLC the selected gear M41 M42 M43 or M44 in one of the registers MBCD1 through MBCD7 and it activates the MSTROBE
285. f the main spindle currently selected at the It is given in integer values between 0 and MAXFOVR maximum 255 This turning speed percentage of the main spindle may be indicated by program by PLC by DNC or by the front panel the CNC selects one of them and the priority from the highest to the lowest is by program by DNC by PLC and from the front panel This variable may be used to read or modify the speed override percentage of the main spindle currently selected by program It is given in integer values between 0 and MAXFOVR maximum 255 If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Itreturnsthe turning speed override 96 ofthe main spindle currently selected via DNC If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected It returns the turning speed override 96 of the main spindle currently selected by PLC If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected It returns the turning speed override of the main spindle currently selected from the front panel Speed limit related variables PLCSL and MDISL are read write variables the rest are read only Itreturnsthe value setin rpm atthe CNC forthe turning speed limit ofthe main spindle This limit may be indicated by program by PLC or by DNC the CNC selects one of them the one indicated by DNC has the highest priority and the one indicated by program has the lowest priority It returns the speed limit of the main spindle in rpm currently selected
286. fic amount of events They are represented by the letter C and there are 256 counters 6 2 PLC program execution The PLC executes the user program cyclically In other words once it executes the complete program it restarts running this program from the first instruction This cyclic processing of the program is done as follows 1 Atthe beginning of the cycle PLC s of the physical inputs connectors resources are assigned the current values For example if the physical input 1015 at 24V the PLC sets the 110 resource to 1 gic Outputs Jeginning Beginning PLC program execution INTRODUCTION TO THE PLC Cycle L ee J 2 It allocates the current values of the logic CNC outputs CNCREADY START FHOUT etc to PLC resources M5500 thru M5957 and R550 thru R562 3 It runs the program cycle The following sections indicate how the PLC program is structured and which are its execution modules See 6 4 Modular structure of the program on page 201 4 After executing the cycle it updates the Logic CNC inputs EMERGEN STOP FEEDHOL etc with the current values of PLC resources M5000 thru M5465 and R500 thru R505 5 It assigns the current values of the PLC s resources to the physical outputs connectors For example if the O5 resource is at 1 the PLC sets physical output O5 connector to 24V 6 It concludes this cycle scan
287. first two sets of gains and accelerations are used regardless of the value given to this parameter When working in closed positioning loop M4 5 the third set of gains and accelerations is used ACCTIME3 PROGAIN3 DERGAINS and FFGAINS SYNMAXSP P63 M3M4SIM P64 SINMAGNI P65 SLIMIT P66 ORDER P67 Not being used Not being used It indicates the multiplying factor x1 x4 x20 etc that the CNC must apply only to sinusoidal feedback signals of the spindle For square feedback signals this parameter must be set to 0 and the CNC will always apply a multiplying factor of x4 Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 255 Default value 0 Spindle feedback resolution is set by s m p NPULSES P13 and SINMAGNI P65 Example We would like to obtain a 0 001 resolution by using a 3600 pulse rev sinusoidal encoder We must calculate the multiplying factor SINMAGNI to be applied by the CNC to the pulses provided by the encoder in order to obtain the desired resolution SINMAGNI degrees per turn number of pulses x resolution SINMAGNI 360 3600 x 0 001 100 Therefore NPULSES 3600 SINMAGNI 100 Maximum safety limit for the spindle speed This limit is activated from the PLC and is applied in all the work modes including the PLC channel When the spindle is controlled by the PLC by means of the PLCCNTL mark this limit is ignored Possible values Between 0 and 65535 rpm
288. g After calculating the value corresponding to the residual output S for the gear change the PLC will indicate this to the CNC by means ofthe register SANALOG afterwards setting the signal PLCCNTL at a high logic level At this time the CNC will send out the output indicated in the register SANALOG Once the requested gear change has been made the new active speed will be indicated to the CNC spindle logic inputs GEAR1 to GEAR4 In order to give the control of the spindle back to the CNC the signal PLCCNTL must be set low Finally the PLC will activate the logic input AUXEND once more to tell the CNC that the execution of the auxiliary function has been completed SANALOG R504 Main spindle The CNC considers these 2 signals at all times so both spindles can be controlled by the PLC The PLC will indicate by means of this 32 bit register the spindle analog output which the CNC must send out when it is controlled by the PLC SANALOG 32767 corresponds to an analog output of 10 V 10 32767 0 305185 millivolts of analog output correspond to SANALOG 1 This way for 4V of analog voltage the following must be programmed FAGOR SANALOG 4 32767 10 13107 4V of analog voltage the following must be programmed SANALOG 4x32767 10 13107 CNC 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 273 Li installation manual ELIMIS M5456 Main spindle If the PLC sets this signal high the CNC
289. g With the derivative gain it is possible to reduce the following error during the acc dec stages Its value is given by s m p DERGAIN P24 When this additional analog voltage is due to fluctuations of following error ACFGAIN P46 2 NO it is called derivative gain rogr mmet P gt e gt ROGAIN gt Analog output eedrate 1 M JERGAIN Spindle CQ 5 FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 177 When it is due to variations of the programmed feedrate ACFGAIN P42 YES it is called AC forward gain since it is due to acc dec GAIN e JERGAIN gt Analog output N EU Best results are usually obtained when using it as AC forward Gain ACFGAIN 5 E P42 YES together with feed forward gain z 9 This gain is only to be used when operating with acceleration deceleration A practical value between 2 to 3 times the Proportional Gain PROGAIN P23 may be used To perform a critical adjustment proceed as follows Verify that there is no oscillations on following error In other words that it is not unstable Check with an oscilloscope the tacho voltage or the analog voltage at the drive velocity command verify that it is stable left graph and that there are neither instabilities when starting up center graph nor when braking down right graph Vh Machine reference point setting To set
290. g direction If the programmed movement exceeds 360 the axis will turn more than once before positioning at the desired point Normal rotary axis AXISTYPE 2 ROLLOVER YES It counts between 0 and 360 G90 The sign indicates the turning direction LIMIT 8000 G91 The sign indicates the turning direction LIMIT 8000 ROLLOVER NO It counts between 7999 9999 and 7999 9999 G90 and G91 as linear axis FAGOR 2 ROLLOVER YES It counts between 0 and 360 G90 The sign indicates the turning direction LIMIT 0 G91 The sign indicates the turning direction CNC 8035 LIMIT O ROLLOVER NO There are 2 loops one between 0 and 360 and the other between 0 and 360 It is possible to switch from one to the other G90 and G91 as linear axis LIMIT 350 ROLLOVER YES NO_ It can only move between 10 and 350 Sort M V11 1x LIMIT 210 With G90 and G91 like when LIMIT 8000 An Sorr T V12 1x error message is issued if the target position is beyond the limits 126 Positioning only axis It cannot interpolate with linear axes Movement always in GOO and they do not admit tool radius compensation G41 G42 Absolute coordinate programming G90 Always positive and in the shortest direction End coordinate between 0 and 359 9999 Incremental coordinate programming G91 The sign indicates the turning direction If the programmed movement exceeds 360 the axis will turn more than once before posit
291. g of PLC resources Consultation or modification of PLC resources Execution of PLC commands compile execute etc Etc The DNC manual can be applied for from the Commercial Department of Fagor Automation CNC PLC COMMUNICATION Access to the PLC from a PC via DNC O FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 253 O installation manual CNC PLC COMMUNICATION Access to the PLC from a PC via DNC FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Physical inputs and outputs are the names given to the set of inputs and outputs of the CNC system which being controlled by the PLC communicate with the outside through CNC connectors The CNC also has a series of logic inputs and outputs for the internal exchange of information with PLC marks and registers This type of marks do not have images on the PLC Each of these CNC logic inputs and outputs may be referred to with the corresponding PLC resource or with their associated mnemonic Mnemonics which begin with indicate that the signal is active low 0 V For example M5000 EMERGEN M5104 MIRROR1 M5016 M5507 ALARM All the mnemonics refer to their associated variable it being necessary to use the NOT operator to refer to its negation for example NOT M5000 NOT EMERGEN NOT M5016 NOT AUXEND CNC logic inputs and outputs can be grouped in General logic inputs
292. g received is erroneous it will set the indicated Mark to 1 The PLC program will keep executing while it is up to the programmer to check whether the function was executed correctly or not The CNC considers the contents of the ASCII block incorrect in the following instances When the syntax is incorrect When programming a not permitted preparatory function G code When programming an auxiliary function M S T or tool offset D When programming a high level language block When the axis to be moved cannot be controlled from the PLC When the internal buffer for PLC command storage is full Errors during execution When the CNC detects an execution error in one of the two execution channels for example travel limit overrun it will show the corresponding error code If it must also stop the movement of the axes and the spindle rotation the CNC will stop the movement of all the axes regardless of whether they are controlled from the CNC or the PLC Also if the detected error stops the program execution the CNC will stop the execution of both channels and each one of them will act as follows CNC channel Once the cause of the error has been removed select again the execution or simulation mode and continue with the program execution PLC channel The PLC program does not stop and continues running The commands sent by means of action will not be executed until removing the cause of the error
293. ght hand part indicating that at least one of the 256 screens pages defined by the user in the graphic editor mode is activated The selected screens pages will be displayed one by one if the active page screen option is accessed in the PLC operating mode A page can be deactivated from the PLC program by placing the corresponding mark atthe low logic level or from the CNC keyboard after selecting it in the active page mode FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 251 Installation manual 9 4 Access to the PLC from the CNC The CNC is provided with an operating mode in which it can Monitor the user PLC program Monitor PLC resources Modify PLC resources Execute PLC commands compile execute etc 9 e Etc Likewise the CNC allows access to PLC variables of any program and is provided with several high level language instructions for this purpose which allow Inputs Outputs Marks Registers Timers and Counters to be read or modified CNC PLC COMMUNICATION Access to the PLC from the CNC FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 252 9 5 Access to the PLC via DNC The CNC allows the PLC to communicate with a computer via DNC through the RS232C serial line In this way a computer can access the PLC carrying out Transfer and reception of the user PLC program Monitoring of the user PLC program Monitorin
294. gn gt Spindle parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 95 Spindle parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 96 SREVMO5 P9 MINSOVR P10 MAXSOVR P11 SOVRSTEP P12 NPULSES P13 DIFFBACK P14 FBACKAL P15 This parameter is used with a Mill model CNC Indicates whether it is necessary or not to stop the spindle M05 when reversing rotation direction during a tapping canned cycle G84 Value Meaning NO It is not necessary YES It is necessary Default value YES Indicate the minimum and maximum applicable to the programmed spindle speed Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 255 Default value For MINSOVR P10 50 For MAXSOVR P11 150 The resulting speed will be limited to the value indicated by s m p MAXVOLT1 P37 MAXVOLT2 P38 MAXVOLT3 P39 or MAXVOLT4 P40 corresponding to the selected gear Indicates the incremental step of the programmed spindle speed every time the override keys at the operator panel are pressed Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 255 Default value 5 Indicates the number of pulses per revolution provided by the spindle encoder 0 means that there is no spindle encoder It must be set when the drive s velocity command is analog or it is sent via CAN DRIBUSLE 0 or 1 When the main spi
295. h buttons in order to use the handwheel Definition of symbols mnemonics DEF HDWON M600 Handwheel jog DEF JOGON M601 JOG DEF XSEL M602 X axis selected DEF YSEL M603 Y axis selected DEF ZSEL 604 2 axis selected DEF 4SEL M605 Ath axis selected DEF 55 M606 5th axis selected DEF 6SEL M607 6th axis selected DEF 7SEL M608 7th axis selected PRG REA Ifthe handwheel enable 179 andthe switch is at handwheel position x1 x10 orx100 179 AND 173 OR 174 HDWON 173 174 229 xi 0 1 28 8035 100 1 0 move the axes in JOG proceed as follows e enable handwheel 179 SOFT M V11 1x turn the switch to the position NOT 173 AND NOT 174 Corn Ts e position the CNC panel selector in the JOG area not handwheel not incremental SELECTOR gt 7 179 AND NOT 173 AND NOT 174 AND CPS SELECTOR GE 8 187 5 Fagor handwheels HBE and LGB FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 188 JOGON Axis selection Inputs 170 171 172 170 171 172 170 AND 171 AND NOTI72 XSEL XSEL 0 0 0 170 AND NOTI71 AND 172 YSEL 0 0 1 170 AND 171 172 ZSEL ZSEL 0 1 1 170 AND 171 AND NOTI72 4SEL 4SEL 0 1 0 170 171 AND NOTI72 5SEL 5SEL 1 1 0 170 AND 171 AND 172 6SEL 6SEL 1 1 1 170 AND NOTI71 AND 172 7S
296. h has the C status output and CUP CDW CEN and CPR inputs It is also possible to consult the count value at any time 4 Feedback input CUP This input allows the counter count to be increased in a unit every time a leading edge is produced in it It is referred to by the letters CUP followed by the counter number which is required to reference for example CUP 1 CUP 25 CUP 102 etc Example 12 CUP 10 Every time a leading edge is produced at input 12 the counter count C10 will be increased Count down input CDW This input allows the counter count to be decreasedin a unit every time aleading edge is produced in it It is referred to by the letters CDW followed by the counter number which is required to reference for example CDW 1 CDW 25 CDW 102 etc Example 13 CDW 20 Every time a leading edge is produced at input I3 the counter count C20 will be decreased Enable input CEN This input allows the internal counter count to be stopped It is referred to by the letters CPR followed by the number of the counter which is required to reference for example CEN 1 CEN 25 CEN 102 etc In order to be able to modify the internal count by means of the inputs CUP and CDW this input must be at logic level 1 By default and every time a counter is activated the PLC will assign this input a logic level of 1 If CEN 0 is selected the PLC stops the counter count ignoring the inputs CUP and CDW until this input allow
297. h manual intervention or additive handwheel it is possible to move the axes manually while a program is being executed To do this once this option is activated use the handwheel to make a movement to be added to the one resulting from the automatic execution This movement will be applied as if it were another zero offset The general handwheel will be used as the additive handwheel If there is no general handwheel use the handwheel associated with the axis 228 ADIOFX N ADIOFZ A Position of the tool while in execution B Position of the tool after a manual intervention The intervention with an additive handwheel is only possible in execution mode even while the program is interrupted However itis not allowed in the tool inspection mode The additive handwheel may be enabled for a coordinate transformation G46 inclined axis where the handwheel movements are applied to the machining operation even if they are not shown on the graphics screen The offset caused by the additive handwheel stays active after disabling the handwheel and it is reset to zero after a home search The offset stays active or is reset after or M30 and after an emergency or a reset depending on the setting of g m p ADIMPG P176 Considerations The movement with the additive handwheel on the master axis is also applied to the slave axis when using axes that are gantry slaved or synchronized by PLC Whentestingthe
298. h the X axis if Mill model or the one associated with the Z if lathe model Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 137 5 Movement with an electronic handwheel FAGOR 8035 Sort V11 1x T V12 1x 138 5 3 3 Feed handwheel mode Usually when making a part for the first time the machine feedrate is controlled by means of the feedrate override switch From this version on itis also possible to use the machine handwheels to control that feedrate This way the machining feedrate will depend on how fast the handwheel is turned To do this proceed as follows Inhibit all the feedrate override switch positions from the PLC Detect how far the handwheel is turned reading of pulses received Set the corresponding feedrate override from the PLC depending on the pulses received from the handwheel The following CNC variables return the number of pulses the handwheel has turned HANPF shows the number of pulses of the 1st handwheel HANPS shows the number of pulses of the 2nd handwheel HANPT shows the number of pulses of the 3rd handwheel HANPFO shows the number of pulses of the 4th handwheel PLC programming example The machine has button to activate and deactivate this feature feed handwheel and the feedrate control is carried out with the second handwheel CY1 R101 0 Resets the register containing the previous handwheel reading END PRG DFU I71 CPL M1000 E
299. h the counting resolution of each one of the axes and the spindle Defines the pitch of the ballscrew or the linear encoder being used When using a Fagor linear encoder this parameter must be set with the pitch value of the feedback signals 20 or 100 When using rotary axis indicate the number of degrees per encoder revolution E g ifthe encoder is mounted on the motor and the axis has gear ratio of 1 10 parameter PITCH must be set with the value of 360 10 36 Indicates the number or pulses rev provided by the rotary encoder When using a linear encoder just enter O If a gear box is used on the axis the whole assembly must be taken into account when setting the number of pulses per turn Indicates the multiplying factor x1 x4 x20 etc that the CNC must apply only to sinusoidal feedback signal For square feedback signals this parameter must be setto 0 and the CNC will always apply a multiplying factor of x4 The counting resolution for each axis will be defined by means of the combination of these parameters as shown in the following table PITCH NPULSES SINMAGNI Leadscrew pitch Leadscrew pitch Nr of pulses 0 Nr of pulses multiplying factor linear encoder pitch 0 0 linear encoder pitch 0 multiplying factor Example 1 Resolution in mm with squarewave encoder We would like to obtain a 2um resolution by using a squarewave encoder mounted on 5 mm pitch leadscrew Since the CNC applies a x4 mu
300. has been turned to one of the handwheel positions the CNC checks this variable and depending on the values assigned to each axis bit c b a it applies the multiplying factor selected for each one of them The value indicated at the front panel keyboard switch x10 factor O o 0 1 x1 factor 0 0 x100 factor If there are more than one bit set to 1 for an axis the least significant bit will be considered Thus c b t 1 1 1 0 x10 factor The screen always shows the value selected at the switch It must be used when having a Fagor HBE handwheel It indicates whether the HBE handwheel is enabled or not the axis to be jogged and the factor to be x1 x10 LEN Indicates whether the HBE handwheel pulses will be taken into account or not in mode 0 They are ignored 1 They are taken into account MASLAN MASCFI MASCSE 4 When the machine has a general handwheel and individual handwheels associated with an axis it indicates which handwheel has priority when both are turned at the same time 0 The individual handwheel has priority The relevant axis ignores the pulses from the general handwheel the rest of the axes don t 1 The general handwheel has priority It ignores the pulses from the individual handwheel a b c Indicate the axis to be moved and the selected multiplying factor c b x1 factor
301. hat no block or part program is being executed or simulated The next bits of the OPMODEA variable must be set to 0 Bit 0 Program in execution Bit 1 Program in simulation Bit 2 Block in execution via MDI JOG Bit 8 Block in execution via CNCEX1 FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 193 O installation manual CONCEPTS Tool change via PLC FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x INTRODUCTION TO THE PLC A It is recommended to save the PLC program and files into the memkey card CARDA or in a peripheral or PC to avoid losing them The PLC program PLC_PRG may be edited at the front panel or copied from the memkey card CARD A or from a peripheral device or PC The PLC program PLC_PRG is stored in the internal CNC memory with the part programs and it is displayed in the program directory utilities together with the part programs Before executing the PLC PRG program it must be compiled Once it is done compiling the CNC requests whether the PLC should be started or not To make the operator life easier and avoid new compilations the source code generated at each compilation is stored in memory After power up the CNC acts as follows 1 1 If there is an executable program stored in memory it executes it RUN 2 If there is executable program but there is a PLC_PRGin memory it compiles it COMPILE and N executes it RUN
302. he hard stops monitored by the electrical cabinet near these mid travel points in order to prevent any possible damage to the machine Verify that the PLC Mark LATCHM is OFF Then after selecting the parameters of the desired axes go on to adjusting them following these advises Adjust the axes one by one Connect the power output of the drive corresponding to the axis being adjusted Selecting the Jog mode at the CNC jog the axis to be adjusted In case of runaway the CNC will display the relevant following error and the machine parameter labelled LOOPCHG corresponding to the sign of the analog output of the CNC will have to be changed Ifthe axis does not run away but the direction of the move is not the desired one parameters labelled AXISCHG P13 axis feedback counting direction and LOOPCHG P26 sign of the analog output will have to be changed Machine reference point home adjustment for each axis Once the movement of the axes has been properly adjusted place the travel limit switches back where they should be MACHINE AND POWER CONNECTION FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 33 Setup MACHINE AND POWER CONNECTION FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 34 The following adjusting sequence is one of the many that could be used This adjustment should be done one axis at a time Indicate in the a m p REFPULSE P32 the type of marker p
303. he indicated distance MACHINE PARAMETERS General machine parameters 1 It limits the feedrate and the distance to the maximum allowed The movement stops when the handwheel stops It does not move the indicated distance The individual handwheels those associated with each axis always limit the feedrate and the distance bits 0 and 1 indicate whether the handwheels output differential signals 1 or not 0 RAPIDEN 130 It indicates how the rapid movements are carried out The behavior of this key is managed using the EXRAPID mark Value Meaning 0 It has no effect 1 When the mark is activated the movements are executed in rapid There is no need to press the key 2 The rapid key is enabled when the mark is activated or when the key is pressed The key must be pressed to make the movements Default value 0 The rapid key is treated in execution and simulation as follows The movements are carried out in rapid traverse GOO while the rapid key is pressed The rapid key is ignored while threading while look ahead is active f G95 is active it switches to G94 mode When releasing the rapid key it goes back to G95 mode e It only affects the main channel It is ignored in the PLC channel FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 63 General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 64
304. he position of the Sercos switch The main window shows the variables or parameters of the selected group and set indicating their Fagor name in each variable its value its meaning and its identifier If the variable does not have a write permission a key will appear before the Fagor name This information is updated when selecting a new information group or set when modifying a variable or parameter or when pressing page up page down It is not refreshed continuously gt Drive parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 109 Drive parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 110 The ACCESS window shows the permitted access level There are 3 access levels at the drive basic level OEM level and Fagor level To change the level press the Password softkey key in the relevant code and press ENTER The VERSION window shows the software version installed at the drive the name of the motor associated with the drive and the drive model Softkeys available in this mode Password Modifies the access level selected in the Access window Inthe case of CAN servo system to accessthe drive parameters with an OEM access level the password is defined in Utilities mode as OEMPSW not a pre established one as when using Sercos Modify To modify the variables that are not protected those without a key icon
305. he rest of the axes LIMIT 1 5100 LIMIT 1 M5101 LIMIT 2 M5150 LIMIT 2 M5151 LIMIT 3 M5200 LIMIT 3 M5201 The PLC sets these signals at a high logic level in order to tell the CNC that the corresponding axis has overrun the end of its range of movement in the positive or negative direction indicated by the limit switch In this case the CNC stops axis feed and spindle rotation and displays the corresponding error on screen In manual JOG operating mode the axis which has overrun its range of travel can be moved in the correct direction in order to place it within the correct range of travel DECEL1 M5102 DECEL2 M5152 DECEL3 M5202 These signals are used by the CNC when machine reference search is made If the PLC sets one of these signals high this indicates to the CNC that the machine reference search switch of the corresponding axis has been pressed When this signal is activated in the machine reference search mode the CNC decelerates the axis changing the rapid approach feedrate indicated by the a m p REFEED1 with the slow feedrate indicated by the a m p REFEED2 After decelerating it accepts the following reference signal from the corresponding axis feedback system as being valid INHIBIT1 M5103 MIRROR1 M5104 SWITCH1 M5105 INHIBIT2 M5153 M5203 The PLC sets one of these signals at a high logic level in order to tell the CNC to prevent any movem
306. he timing has finished it is required to activate the timer again another leading edge must be produced in the TG2 input If the trailing edge of the trigger input TG2 is produced before the time specified by the time constant has elapsed the PLC will consider that the timing operation has concluded maintaining the time count it had at that moment as the timer time T Operation of the TRS input this mode If a leading edge is produced at the TRS input at any moment during timing or afterwards the PLC initializes the timer assigning the value 0 to its T status and cancelling its count it initializes this to 0 Due to the fact that the timer is initialized it will be necessary to activate its trigger input to activate it again Timers PLC RESOURCES Operation of the TEN input in this mode once the timer is activated TEN 0 is selected the PLC stops timing and it is necessary to assign TEN 1 for this timing to continue FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 215 Timers PLC RESOURCES FAGOR 2 8035 M V11 1x T V12 1x 216 7 5 8 Delayed disconnection mode TG3 input This operating mode allows a delay to be made between the deactivation ofthe trigger input and the activation of the T status of the timer The duration of the delay is determined by the time
307. hen the S function indicated at variable SBCD must be executed the TSTROBE output when the T function indicated at variable TBCD must be executed and the T2STROBE output when the T function indicated at variable T2BCD must be executed Whenever the CNC activates one of these signals it is convenient to deactivate the general CNC input AUXEND in order to interrupt the execution of the CNC When the PLC concludes the processing of the required function this AUXEND signal must be activated back so that the CNC resumes the execution of the interrupted program This example deactivates the AUXEND signalfor 100 milliseconds using the timer T1 MSTROBE OR SSTROBE OR TSTROBE OR T2STROBE TG1 1 100 The activation of the STROBE signals activates timer T1 in the mono stable mode for 100 milliseconds Whenever timer T1 is active the PLC must set the AUXEND signal low as described in Treatment of the general CNC input AUXEND When the CNC activates the MSTROBE signal the contents of variables MBCD1 through MBCD7 must be analyzed in order to know which auxiliary functions are to be executed All MBCD variables may be analyzed at the same time by using This example the auxiliary marks so they can be analyzed later Once analyzed they must be RESet so that the PLC does not analyze them again on the next cycle scan DFU MSTROBE AND CPS MBCD EQ 0 RES M 08 DFU MSTROBE AND CPS MBCD EQ 2 RES M 08 Functions MOO and M02
308. hese signals when communicating with the drive via Sercos or via Can and indicate the status of the drive DRSTAF DRSTAS Actuating the main switch of the electrical cabinet supplies 24 Vdc to the drive The drive runs an internal test If correct it activates the output System OK From that moment on the power supply must be turned on When there is power at the drive bus it is ready to output torque To do that activate the drive enable and speed enable inputs Once the drive enable and speed enable are 1 1 activated the drive is running properly FAGOR 2 When internal error occurs at the drive the DRSTAF and DRSTAS signals are set low logic level low CNC 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 290 REVOK M5956 spindle The CNC only considers the signals for the currently selected spindle When working with and M04 the CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the real spindle revolutions correspond to those programmed The CNC will activate this signal every time the real revolutions are within the range defined by s m p LOSPDLIM and UPSPDLIM When working with the spindle in closed loop M19 the CNC sets this signal high if the spindle is stopped gt INPOSS M5957 spindle This signal is used when working with the spindle in closed loop M19 The CNC only considers the signals for the currently selected spindl
309. hine has been all set up it is necessary to reinstall the feedback system and the new machine reference point home no longer coincides physically with the previous one It indicates the difference existing between the two reference points the previous one and the current one Possible values Within 99999 9999 degrees or millimeters Within 3937 00787 inches Default value 0 If this parameter has a value other than 0 once the home search has been carried out the reference mark of the feedback device has been detected the CNC moves the distance indicated by a m p REFSHIFT P47 This way the machine reference point will always be the same This movement is carried out at the feedrate indicated by REFEED2 P35 These parameters are used in conjunction with a m p STOPAOUT P50 with function G52 move to hardstop STOPTIME P48 The CNC considers that the hardstop has been run into when a certain time period elapses without the axis moving This time period is indicated in thousands of a second by parameter STOPTIME P48 Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 STOPMOVE P49 The CNC considers the axis to be stopped when its movements do not exceed the value set by STOPMOVE P49 during the time period set by STOPTIME P48 Possible values Between 0 0001 and 99999 9999 millimeters Between 0 00001 and 3937 00787 inches Default value 0 This parame
310. hined Not being used It indicates how cross compensation is applied This parameter has two digits units Cross compensation with theoretical or real coordinates The units indicate whether cross compensation is applied with theoretical coordinates or with real ones Value Meaning x0 With real coordinates x1 With theoretical coordinates Default value 0 tens The cross compensation on Ganiry axis affects the slave axis The tens indicate whether cross compensation on Gantry axes affects only the master axis or both Value Meaning 0 It affects the master axis 1x It affects both axes Default value 0 AXIS9 P136 PAXIS9 P137 AXIS10 P138 PAXIS10 P139 AXIS11 P140 PAXIS11 P141 AXIS12 P142 PAXIS12 P143 ACTBACKL P144 If a CNC is configured so that any of the feedback inputs of its axes or spindles is free because they are digital axes or spindle without feedback connection to the these free connectors could be configured as electronic or mechanical handwheels 9 AXIS12 Define the handwheel type The values to be assigned to these parameters are Value Meaning Value Meaning 11 Handwheel 12 Handwheel with axis selector button 21 Handwheel associated 22 Handwheel associated with X with Y 23 Handwheel associated 24 Handwheel associated with Z with U 25 Handwheel associated 26 Handwheel associated with V with W 27 Handwheel associated 28 Handwheel associated
311. hus GEOMTYPE 1 Not being used Not being used It indicates whether function G75 ignores the feedrate override switch of the front panel or not Value Meaning NO It ignores the setting of the switch Always at 100 YES It is affected by the of the switch Default value NO Not being used It indicates whethe the CNC displays the real or theoretical RPM affected by the of the main spindle Value Meaning 0 It displays the real RPM 1 It displays the theoretical RPM Default value 0 When not having spindle encoder NPULSES 0 it is recommended to set P128 1 so it displays theoretical value This parameter has 16 bits counted from right to left bit 1514131211109 8 765 43 21 0 m Nm M NH NH M NM NM NH NM NNNM Each bit has a function work mode associated with it By default all the bits will be assigned the value of 0 Assigning the value of 1 activates the corresponding function Bit Meaning Bit Meaning Handwheel 1 8 Handwheel 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 It limits the movement Y 8 WN Default value in all the bits 0 Bit 15 indicates how the CNC acts when requesting a feedrate greater than the maximum allowed depending on the handwheel turning speed and the position of the switch 0 It limits the feedrate to the maximum allowed but it moves t
312. ifferent types of instructions In binary type instructions function C123 makes reference to the counter s logic status C123 M100 Assigns mark to M100 the status 0 1 of counter 123 Counters PLC RESOURCES FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 221 O installation manual In arithmetic and function comparison instructions C123 makes reference to the internal counter count I2 MOV C123 R200 Transfers the count of C123 to register R200 CES G23 GT 1000 Mi 00 Compares whether the count of C123 is greater than 1000 in which case it activates mark M100 7 The PLC has 32 bit variable to store the count of each counter o 5 a6 7 tr FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 222 7 6 1 Operating mode of a counter If the CEN counter input is initialized CEN 1 the counter allows its count to be increased and decreased by means of the CUP and CDW inputs Operation of CUP and CDW inputs Every time a leading edge is produced at the CUP input the counter increases its count by one count Every time a leading edge is produced at the CDW input the counter decreases its count by one count Operation of the CPR input If a leading edge is produced at the CPR input the internal count value will take the new value assigned Operation of the CEN input If CEN 0 is selected the counter ignores both up count CUP and down count
313. ill always be executed at the beginning of the block and the CNC will wait for the general logic input AUXEND to be activated to consider the execution completed If S output in 2 digit BCD is used the CNC will tell the PLC by means of this register the selected spindle speed according to the following conversion table Programmed Programmed 5 B S B Programmed S oo o 0 800 899 78 900 999 79 1000 1119 1120 1249 1250 1399 1400 1599 1600 1799 1800 1999 2000 2239 2240 2499 2500 2799 2800 3149 3150 3549 3550 3999 4000 4499 4500 4999 5000 5599 5600 6299 6300 7099 7100 7999 8000 8999 9000 9999 ojo 81 82 83 84 85 wo Qi gt oo 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 91 92 93 94 95 710 799 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 7 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 x9 Ea EN 2 RN EA EX EH EE E EN KG Ea ER E NEN EA EE If a value over 9999 is programmed the CNC will tell the PLC the spindle speed corresponding to value 9999 If S output in 8 digit BCD is used the CNC will indicate the programmed spindle speed to the PLC by means of this register This value will be coded in BCD format 8 digits in thousandths of a revolution per minute 12345 678 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 If no S has been programmed in the block the CNC will assign a value of FFFFFFFF to this register
314. illiseconds H cc Sampling periods shorter than 2 msec are not allowed when not using the CPU TURBO option Likewise the CNC configuration limits the sample period The shorter the sample period the less time will the CPU have to process data Therefore bear in mind that e Sinewave feedback requires more calculation time More axes means more calculation time if the user channel is active more calculation time is required IPOTIME P73 It sets the interpolation period used by the CNC and consequently it affects its block processing time FAGOR 2 Value Meaning 0 IPOTIME LOOPTIME CNC 8035 1 IPOTIME 2 LOOPTIME Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 53 General machine parameters FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 54 COMPTYPE P74 t determines how tool radius compensation is applied This parameter has three digits units Type of tool radius compensation beginning and end The units set the type of beginning end of tool radius compensation applied by the Value Meaning xx0 It approaches the starting point going around the corner 1 goes directly perpendicular to the point without going around the corner Default value 0 COMPTYPE x0 COMPTYPE x1 tens Additional compensation block The tens indicate whether the additional compensation block is
315. in 37 of the connector leaving the other end free The wires of the shielded cables cannot be 1 unshielded for more than 75mm about 3 inches Since the response time of the emergency signal must be very short the CNC has assigned input 11 for this purpose thus the CNC will treat this input immediately regardless of how the PLC program uses it The emergency output which coincides with O1 of the PLC will be activated change from logic level 1 to 0 whenan ALARM or ERROR occurs at the CNC or when the PLC output O1 is set to 0 logic level 0 Signal and function 24V External power supply O1 Emergency output O3 O5 O7 11 13 15 17 19 111 113 115 OV External power supply OV External power supply 24V External power supply 02 04 O6 O8 FAGOR 2 M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 116 Chassis Shield 10 CNC CONFIGURATION CNC structure Le ate E E ER anon alo ek mE oon m m m O 40 29 j 0 50 49 2 A O Oo 01 Connector For probe connection 9 pin normal density SUB D type female connector Pin Signal and function Chassis Shield 5 Probe 1 5 V output for the probe 1 5 5V TTL input PRB1_24 Probe 1 24 Vdc input
316. in the main module because the cycle scan time for the main module would be too long for these resources to be checked and reacted upon FAGOR It does not modify the status of the PLC resources Therefore the main module will resume execution as if the periodic module had not been executed at all CNC 8035 The periodic module is processed as follows 1 The PLC takes into account the current values as just before executing the PE module of the local physical inputs connectors of the central unit 2 Executes the periodic module Sorr V11 1x 3 It assigns the current values of the PLC s O resources to the local physical Sort T V12 1x outputs connectors of the central unit 4 It ends the execution of the Periodic Module and resumes the execution of the main module 225 Module structure PLC PROGRAMMING FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 226 8 1 Module structure The modules which make up the PLC program main module PRG periodic modules PE and first cycle module CY1 consist of a series of instructions which depending on their functionality can be divided into Directing instructions Executable instructions The directing instructions provide the PLC with information on the type of module PRG CY1 and on how it must be executed REA IMA Executable instructions allow inquiries to be made on and or alterations to the status of PLC resources a
317. ine parameter table for each axis X Y Z U and another one for the spindle S a m p AXISTYPE PO must be set as follows X axis AXISTYPE P0 2 0 Regular linear axis Y axis AXISTYPE P0 2 0 Regular linear axis Z axis AXISTYPE P0 2 0 Regular linear axis s m p SPDLTYPE PO must be set as follows Spindle SPDLTYPE PO 20 10V spindle analog output Likewise a m p DFORMAT P1 and s m p DOFORMAT P1 must be properly set to indicate their display formats Example of lathe The machine has two regular linear axes X and Z and an analog spindle S Setting of g m p AXIS1 PO through AXIS8 P7 AXIS1 1 X axis associated with feedback X1 and output O1 AXIS3 P1 Z axis associated with feedback X2 and output O2 AXIS5 P2 10 Spindle S associated with feedback X3 and output O3 AXIS6 P5 AXIS7 P6 AXIS8 P7 The CNC activates a machine parameter table for each axis X Z and another one for the spindle S a m p AXISTYPE PO must be set as follows X axis AXISTYPE P0 0 Regular linear axis Z axis AXISTYPE P0 2 0 Regular linear axis s m p SPDLTYPE PO must be set as follows Spindle SPDLTYPE PO 20 10V spindle analog output Likewise a m p DFORMAT P1 and s m p DOFORMAT P1 must be properly set to indicate their display formats oh CONCEPTS Axes and coordinate systems FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 12
318. ing from the PLC in ten thousandths of a degree between 0 and e 3600000 and from the CNC degrees between 0 and 360 E Position programmed in M19 via program for the main spindle u 2 s g Variables related to the following error lt 2 FLWES R R Spindle following error O PLC related variables Variable CNC PLC DNC gt PLCMSG R Number of the active PLC message with the highest priority PLCIn R W 32 PLC inputs starting from n R W 32 PLC outputs starting from n R W 32 PLC marks starting from n PLCRn R W n Register PLCTn R W Indicated n Timer s count PLCCn R W Indicated n Counter s count PLCMMn R W Modifies the n mark of the PLC Variables associated with local and global parameters Variable CNC PLC DNC section 11 10 GUP n R W Global parameter P100 P299 LUP a b R W Indicated local PO P25 parameter b of the nesting level a CALLP R Indicates which local parameters have been defined by means of a PCALL or MCALL instruction calling a subroutine Operating mode related variables Variable CNC PLC DNC section 11 11 OPMODE R R R Operating mode Other variables Variable CNC PLC DNC section 11 12 NBTOOL R R Number of the tool being managed PRGN R R Number of the program in execution BLKN R R R Label number of the last executed block GSn R Status of the indicated G function n GGSA R Status of f
319. ing instructions M1000 CNCEX G90 GP100 UP101 FP102 M111 When mark M1000 is active it sends the indicated block to the CNC NOT M111 RES M1000 If the CNC accepts this block it resets mark M1000 PLC execution channel AXES CONTROLLED FROM THE PLC FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 331 12 2 Action CNCEX1 The CNCEX action is executed via main channel of the CNC and as long as the JOG keyboard is enabled Its execution can be interrupted by pressing CYCLE STOP or even canceled by pressing RESET If a CNCEX1 action is received when the JOG keyboard is disabled the CNC ignores this command The block to be executed must be written in the programming format of the CNC itself Any type of block can be sent which is edited in ISO or high level language It admits preparatory functions auxiliary functions calls to subroutines etc Action 1 AXES CONTROLLED FROM THE PLC N FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 332 PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE It is a three axes machine X Y Z having a spindle with two speed ranges The PLC besides controlling the 3 axes and the spindle is in charge of lubricating the axes as well as turning the coolant on and off CNC configuration The PLC has 512 inputs and 512 outputs Some of them depending on the CNC configuration communicate with external devices ELI e H i
320. inning of the cycle taking the values of the physical inputs The image values of the inputs outputs and marks are updated after executing the program cycle yhv 1 r1 1l 3 ima rx 1 4 74 01 X I3 phy I3 physical I3 rea 13 real 13 ima 13 image 5 Examples DFU 123 DFU B3R120 DFU AUXEND Comparison PLC PROGRAMMING Consulting instructions CPS Used to compare two operands checking whether the first one is greater than GT greater than or equal to GE equal to EQ not equal to NE smaller than or equal to LE or less than LT the second one The following may be used as operands Timers internal count Counters internal count Registers CNC PLC communication registers and numbers within 2147483647 or between 0 and FFFFFFFF The programming format of the different combinations is CPS T 1 256 GT T 1 256 LT If the required condition is met the consulting instruction returns a logic value 1 0 if otherwise Programming examples CPS C12 GT R14 2 M100 If the internal count of counter C12 is GREATER than the value of register R14 the PLC will assign the value of 1 to mark M100 and a 0 if otherwise CPS T2 EQ 100 TG1 5 2000 When the time elapsed on the counter T2 is EQUAL to the value of 100 timer T5 will be activated working as a monostable and with a time constant of 2 seconds FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr V11 1x T
321. input the PLC will always assign the result of analyzing the last one of those instructions This example shows how to group in a single instruction all the conditions that activate or deactivate one logic CNC input NOT T1 AND NOT M 41 AND NOT M 42 AUXEND Input AUXEND will remain low while The Treatment of the MSTROBE TSTROBE STROBE signals is in progress timer T1 active A spindle gear change is being performed M 41 M 42 Keyboard simulation With this example it is possible to simulate the theoretical path of part program P12 whenever the operator requests it To do this follow these steps Indicate to the CNC that from now on the keys will come from the PLC Simulate all the necessary steps sending the code of each one of the keys Indicate to the CNC that from now on the keys will be coming from the CNC keyboard not from the PLC In order to make sending the keys easier a subroutine is used which utilizes the following parameters ENVIATEC Send Key Calling parameter that must be activated whenever a key is to be sent CODTECLA Code of the key Calling parameter that must contain the code corresponding to the key being simulated ENVIOK Sent OK Outgoing parameter indicating that the key code has been sent successfully En Main module PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x T V12 1x 343 PLC PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE GO Main modul
322. input is 7 5 2 Delayed connection mode TG2 input seseeneeenennen 214 7 5 8 Delayed disconnection mode 216 7 5 4 Signal limiting mode 218 7 6 220 7 6 1 Operating mode of a nnne 223 PLC PROGRAMMING 8 1 Module SIIHCTUEG La co ocean Ernie 226 8 2 Directing Instructions 227 8 3 Consulting instructions 230 8 4 Operators and Symbols inim ice iecit tec tp rt re te Pe eeu i P d 232 8 5 Action 11 18 121 10 233 8 51 Binary assignment instructions 8 5 2 Conditional binary action instructions esee 235 8 5 3 Sequence breaking action instructions eeneee 236 8 5 4 Arithmetic action instructions 8 5 5 Logic action instructions 2 8 5 6 Specific action instructions 9 10 11 CHAPTER 12 CHAPTER 13 APPENDIX CNC PLC COMMUNICATION 9 1 Auxiliary 5 ieaie ea reana 9 2 Auxiliary function transfer 9 2 1 Transferring M S T using the AUXEND
323. ion for shipping and handling 1 2 3 4 5 INDEX e Declaration of conformity Version history M 2 Version history T m Safety Conditi ris ndm crc ce RE ee e eau e uet a EHE eB Warranty terms Material returning terms Additional remarks 0 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 GOMMOCIONG 2 241222 2212 222212222 1242252 122148 12 44 REVUE E IURI ada eT VIS CH 4 HEAT DISSIPATION 2 1 Heat dissipation by natural convection 24 2 2 Heat dissipation by forced convection with inside fan 2 3 Heat dissipation by air flow to the outside using 26 MACHINE AND POWER CONNECTION 3 1 Digital inputs and OUtPUIS 3 2 Analog inputs and outputs 3 3 rl 3 4 Connection of the emergency input and 36 MAC
324. ioning at the desired point Positioning only axis AXISTYPE 3 ROLLOVER YES It counts between 0 and 360 G90 does not admit negative values Always via LIMIT 8000 the shortest path LIMIT 8000 G91 The sign indicates the turning direction ROLLOVER NO It counts between 7999 9999 and 7999 9999 G90 and G91 linear axis ROLLOVER YES It counts between 0 and 360 G90 does not admit negative values Always via LIMIT 0 the shortest path LIMIT 0 G91 The sign indicates the turning direction ROLLOVER NO There are 2 loops one between 0 and 360 and the other between 0 and 360 It is possible to switch from one to the other G90 and G91 as linear axis LIMIT 350 ROLLOVER YES NO_ It can only move between 10 and 350 LIMIT 10 With G90 and G91 like when LIMIT 8000 An error message is issued if the target position is beyond the limits Rotary Hirth axis It is a positioning only axis which cannot take decimal coordinates All positioning movements must be in whole degrees g CONCEPTS Axes and coordinate systems FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 127 5 Axes and coordinate systems FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 128 More than one Hirth axis may be used but they can only move one at a time Rotary Hirth axis whole degrees AXISTYPE 3 ROLLOVER YES LIMIT 8000 LIMIT 8000
325. is Read and write variables This variable allows the value of the selected axis to be read or modified in the table corresponding to the indicated zero offset n CNCRD ORGX 55 R100 M102 Loads register R100 with the X value of G55 in the zero offset table Assigns the value indicated R101 to the Y value of G54 in the zero offset table This variable allows the value of the selected axis to be read or modified in the table of additive offsets indicated by the PLC Accessing any of the PLCOF X C variables interrupts block preparation and the CNC waits for that command to be executed before resuming block preparation h Variables associated with zero offsets ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 301 11 ACCESS THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES Variables associated with machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 Sort M V11 1x T V12 1x 302 11 3 Variables associated with machine parameters MPGn MP X C n MPSn MPLCn These variables associated with machine parameters are read only variables Refer to the installation and start up manual to know the format of the values returned The values of 1 0 correspond to the parameters that are set as YES NO or ON OFF Values regarding position and feedrate values will be given in the units set by g m p INCHES If INCHES 0 in ten thousa
326. is 3 DIR M5601 M5651 M5701 Indicate axis moving direction REFPOIN M5602 M5652 M5702 Home search done DRSTAF M5603 M5653 M5703 With Sercos They indicate servo drive status ANT M5606 M5656 M5706 If distance lt MINMOVE P54 ANT 1 INPOS M5607 M5657 M5707 Axis in position SPINDLE LOGIC OUTPUTS FAGOR 2 5 5950 Enables spindle movement CNC 8035 DIRS M5951 Spindle turning direction REFPOINS M5952 The spindle has been already referenced homed DRSTAFS M5953 With Sercos They indicate servo drive status DRSTASS M5954 With Sercos They indicate servo drive status Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x REVOK M5956 Spindle rpm correspond to programmed speed INPOSS M5957 Spindle in position 368 AUXILIARY FUNCTION TRANSFER MBCD1 R550 Auxiliary M function to be executed in the main channel MBCD2 R551 Auxiliary M function to be executed in the main channel MBCD3 R552 Auxiliary M function to be executed in the main channel MBCD4 R553 Auxiliary M function to be executed in the main channel MBCD5 R554 Auxiliary M function to be executed in the main channel MBCD6 R555 Auxiliary M function to be executed in the main channel MBCD7 R556 Auxiliary M function to be executed in the main channel MBCDP1 R565 Auxiliary M function to be executed in the PLC channel MBCDP2 R566 Auxiliary M function to be executed in the PLC channel APPENDIX Summary of PLC inputs and outputs
327. is always made at the beginning of the block When working in round corner G5 the change does not take place until G07 is programmed Example 1 Example 2 G2 X10 10110 JO Set 1 G05 G2 X10 Y10 110 JO Set 1 G1 X20 Set 2 G1 X20 Set 1 G3 X30 Y20 10 J10 Set 1 G3 X30 Y20 10 J10 Set 1 G1 Set 2 G7 G1 Y30 Set 2 The gains and accelerations may also be changed from the PLC To do that there is a general logic CNC input ACTGAIN2 M5013 Every time this input is activated the CNC selects the second set of gains and accelerations regardless of the active operating mode or function Not being used DIPLCOF P110 HANDWIN P111 1 112 HANDWHE2 P113 HANDWHE3 P114 HANDWHE4 P115 STOPTAP P116 INSFEED P117 DISTYPE P118 PROBERR P119 This parameter indicates whether the CNC takes into consideration or not the additive zero offset when displaying the coordinates of the axes on the screen and when accessing the POS X C and TPOS X C variables Value Meaning 0 When displaying the position of the axes referred to home it only takes into account the additive offset when displaying the coordinates referred to machine reference zero The coordinate returned by the POS X C and TPOS X C variables takes into account the additive zero offset 1 When displaying the position of the axes it ignores the additive offset The coordinate returned by the POS X C and TPOS X C
328. is parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 93 Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 94 AXISDEF P90 It allows customizing the movement of the axis This parameter has 16 bits counted from right to left bit 1514131211109 8 7 654 32 1 0 E H H H NH H NH Each bit has a function or work mode associated with it By default all the bits will be assigned the value of 0 Assigning the value of 1 activates the corresponding function Bit Meaning 0 14 Not being used 15 Rollover axis Movement in G53 via the shortest way Default value in all the bits 0 Bit 15 Rollover axis Movement in G53 via the shortest way This bit indicates how the movements in G53 are carried out for a positioning only rotary axis without travel limits 30r4 ROLLOVER YES LIMIT 20 LIMIT 0 When set to 41 G53 movements are carried out along the shortest path When several presets have been made the axis may rotate several complete turns 4 4 Spindle parameters SPDLTYPE DFORMAT P1 P2 MAXGEAR2 P3 P4 MAXGEARA P5 AUTOGEAR P6 POLARMS P7 POLARMA P8 Indicates the type of spindle output being used
329. is possible to define different compensation values for each moving direction This type of compensation is activated by setting a m p LSCRWCOM P15 ON for the desired axis The CNC enables one leadscrew error compensation table for each axis The number of elements of the table is determined by the a m p NPOINTS P16 being possible to define up to 255 points per axis Si X AXIS COMPENSATION POINT MBER POSITION RROR CONCEPTS Axis adjustment 018 2019 020 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 oe o o DK DK DS DK DK t DD DDD 6066 0000 Each parameter of the table represents a point of the profile to compensate The following information is defined at each point The position occupied by the point in the profile position to compensate It is defined by its coordinate referred to machine zero Possible values 99999 9999 mm or 3937 00787 inches The amount of error of the axis in this point in the positive direction Possible values 99999 9999 mm or 3937 00787 inches The amount of error of the axis in this point in the negative direction Possible values 99999 9999 mm or 3937 00787 inches For each axis position define the amount of error to be compensated in both directions If the amount of error in the negative direction is zero in all points it assumes that the amount of error defined for the positive direction is valid for both directions Leads
330. ister R704 contains the VelocityFeedback supplied by the drive located in bus node 1 To identify the units of the variables see the drive manual Read only registers R700 through R739 are updated at the beginning of the PLC scan unless the MRD instruction is used The type of information available and its associated identifiers are Type of information Identifier Class2Diagnostics Warnings 00012 Class3Diagnostics OperationStatus 00013 VelocityFeedback 00040 PositionFeedbackValue1 00051 TorqueFeedback 00084 The bits of identifier 33172 FagorDiagnostics contain the following information bits Meaning Id at the drive 0 1 2 3 GV25 ActualGearRatio 000255 4 5 6 7 GV21 ActualParameterSet 000254 000330 000332 8 SV4 10 SV3 2 1 TV60 PGreaterEqualPx 000337 Cyclic channel Write variables for the CNC PLC plc m p SWR800 P68 through SWR819 P87 indicate which type of information has been put in registers R800 through R819 and which drive will be assigned that value P68 gt R800 P69 gt R801 P70 gt R802 P71 gt R803 etc These parameters are set in 1 5 format The units digit identifies the drive node supplying the data and the decimals indicate the identifier number see table below Si For example P70 2 34178 indicates that the value of PLC register R802 will be assigned to the DigitalOutputsValues of the drive located in bus node 2 To identify the units of the variables see
331. ivative gain not applied FFGAIN P25 The CNC takes this parameter into account when operating in closed loop M19 Indicates the of the analog voltage due to the programmed speed The rest will depend upon the following error both the proportional and derivative gains will be FAGOR 2 applied onto this following error CNC 8035 GAIN 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x Analog voltage PROGAIN 5 DERGAIN 2 FFGAIN x Fprog x MAXVOLT 10 1 100 GOOFEED 98 The feed forward improves the position loop minimizing the following error but it should only be used when working with acceleration deceleration Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 100 Default value 0 feed forward gain not applied Usually a value between 40 and 80 is assigned depending mainly on the type of machine and its characteristics LOOPCHG P26 Indicates the sign of the analog output If correct leave it as is but to change it select YES if it was set to NO and viceversa Possible values NO YES Default value NO MINANOUT P27 Indicates the minimum value for the spindle analog output Possible values It is given in D A converter units and it admits integer values between 0 and 32767 which corresponds to an analog voltage of 10V Default value 0 MINANOUT Minimum analog output SERVOFF P28 Indicates the analog offset value for the spindle drive Possible
332. l Dwell Round corner Circle center in absolute coordinates Square corner Arc defined by three points Main plane selection by two addresses and longitudinal axis Feedrate F as an inverted function of time Controlled corner rounding Movement until making contact Programming with respect to machine zero Programming in inches Metric programming Home search Probing move until touching Probing move while touching Absolute programming Incremental programming Coordinate preset Polar origin preset Feedrate in millimeters inches per minute Feedrate in millimeters inches per revolution All these functions must be programmed as described in the programming manual Move the axes Only those axes set by means of a m p AXISTYPE for each axis as to be controlled by the PLC can be mentioned The position values of these axes which can be either linear or rotary can be programmed in either Cartesian or polar coordinates These coordinates can also be defined via parametric programming using any global arithmetic parameters P100 thru P299 When using parametric programming itis recommended to previously assign a value to the corresponding global parameter by means of the instruction CNCWR MOV 150 R1 Assigns the value of 150 to register R1 CNCWR R1 GUP200 M100 Assigns the value of R1 to parameter P200 200 150 690 61 U P200 M100 Requests the CNC to execute the command
333. le 5 9 1 Spindle types The setting of s m p SPDLTYPE PO allows the following possibilities SPDLTYPE 0 Analog spindle output SPDLTYPE 1 2 digit BCD coded spindle output S SPDLTYPE 2 8 digit BCD coded spindle output S When using BCD coded output the spindle will operate in open loop and it will be controlled by means of functions M3 M4 and M5 When using analog output the spindle can operate In open loop controlled by means of functions M3 M4 and M5 In closed loop by means of function M19 This requires an encoder mounted the spindle and s m p NPULSES P13 must be set to a value other than O Controlled via PLC With this feature the PLC may take control of the spindle for a certain period of time A typical application of this feature is the control of the spindle oscillation during the spindle gear change Regardless of the type of spindle output being used the CNC admits up to 4 spindle gears The spindle gear change may be made either manually or automatically by the CNC To change spindle gears functions M41 M42 M43 and M44 are used to let the PLC know which one is to be selected 5 9 2 Spindle speed control BCD output When using BCD coded output the spindle will operate in open loop and it will be controlled by means of functions M3 M4 and M5 To do that set s m p SPDLTYPE with the right value SPDLTYPE 1 2 digit BCD coded spindle output S SPDLTYPE 2
334. low in order to tell the PLC that an alarm or emergency condition has been detected This signal will be set high once again once the message from the CNC has been eliminated and the cause of the alarm has disappeared Likewise while this signal is low the CNC keeps the emergency output pin 2 of connector X2 active low Example ALARM AND other conditions 1 The emergency output O1 of the PLC must be normally high If an alarm or an emergency is detected at the CNC the emergency output O1 must be set low OV The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the JOG Manual operating mode is selected The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the automatic operating mode is selected The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the MDI mode manual data input is selected in one of the operating modes JOG automatic etc The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the single block execution mode is selected General logic outputs LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 281 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS General logic outputs FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 282 INCYCLE M5515 RAPID M5516 TAPPING M5517 THREAD 5518 PROBE M5519 ZERO M5520 RIGID M5521 The CNC sets this signal high while executing a block or moving an axis Once the execution of th
335. ltiplying factor to squarewave signals we would require an encoder which provides the following number of pulses lines per turn Nr of pulses ballscrew pitch multiplying factor x Resolution Nr pulses 5000 um 4 x 2 um 625 pulses turn Therefore INCHES 0 PITCH 5 0000 NPULSES 625 SINMAGNI 0 Although the CNC accepts a maximum squarewave frequency of 400 KHz when using Fagor squarewave rotary encoders their output frequency is limited to 200KHz thus the maximum possible feedrate F will be Max feedrate 200 000 pulses sec 625 pulses turn x 0 2 inch turn Max feedrate 1600 mm s 96 m min Example 2 Resolution in mm with sinusoidal signal encoder We would like to obtain a 2um resolution by using a 250 line sinewave encoder mounted on 5 mm pitch ballscrew We must calculate the multiplying factor SINMAGNI to be applied by the CNC to the pulses provided by the encoder in order to obtain the desired resolution SINMAGNI ballscrew pitch Nr pulses x Resolution SINMAGNI 5000 um 250 x 2 um 10 Therefore INCHES 0 PITCH 5 0000 NPULSES 250 SINMAGNI 10 Although the CNC accepts a maximum squarewave frequency of 250 KHz when using Fagor sine wave rotary encoders their output frequency is limited to 200KHz thus the maximum possible feedrate F will be Max feedrate 200 000 pulses sec 250 pulses turn x 0 2 inch turn Max feedrate 4 000 mm s 240 m min Example 3 Resolution
336. lue Meaning 0 No parity 1 Odd parity 2 Even parity Default value 0 Indicates the number of stop bits at the end of each transmitted word Value Meaning 0 1 STOP bit 1 2 STOP bits Default value 0 Indicates the type of communications protocol to be used Value Meaning 0 Communications protocol for general device 1 DNC communications protocol 2 Communications protocol for Fagor floppy disk unit Default value 1 DNC Indicates whether the DNC feature will be active on power up or not Value Meaning NO Not active on power up YES Active on power up Default value NO DNCDEBUG P6 Indicates whether the debugging feature for DNC communications is active or not It is advisable to use this safety feature in all DNC communications It could be deactivated in the debugging process Value Meaning NO Debug NOT active Communication aborted YES Debug active Communication not aborted Default value NO ABORTCHR P7 Indicatesthe character used to abort communications with general peripheral device Value Meaning 0 CAN 1 EOT Default value 0 EOLCHR P8 Indicates the character used to indicate end of line when communicating with general peripheral device Value Meaning 0 LF 1 CR 2 LF CR 3 CR LF Default value 0 EOFCHR P9 Indicates the character used to indicate end of text end of file when communicating with a general peripheral device Value Meaning 0 EOT 1 ESC 2
337. me when the ENABLE must be output Ifthe SERVOON signalis high the CNC allows the movement of this axis by activating the ENABLE signal and outputting the required analog voltage On the other hand if the SERVOON signal is low or if it changes during the movement of the axes the CNC stops the axes feed and the spindle rotation displaying the corresponding error message DWELL lt gt 0 When a m p DWELL P17 for the axis to be moved is set to other than 0 the CNC will check the status of the SERVOON signal at the time when the ENABLE must be output When this signal SERVOON is high the CNC allows the movement of the axis by activating the ENABLE signal and providing the required analog output voltage On the other hand if the SERVOON signal is low the CNC activates the ENABLE signal and after waiting for a time period indicated in DWELL it checks again the status of the SERVOON signal If it is high the required spindle analog voltage will be output If low the CNC will stop the axes feed and the spindle rotation displaying the corresponding error message DWELI DWELI ra Also if the SERVOON signal changes states during the movement of the axis the CNC stops the axes feed and the spindle rotation displaying the corresponding error message AXIS 1 M5108 AXIS 1 M5109 AXIS 2 M5158 AXIS 2 M5159 AXIS 3 M5208 AXIS 3 M5209 The CNC uses these signals when working in the ma
338. med to be executed before the move It sets logic outputs MBCD1 51 MBCD2 52 MBCD3 53 MBCD4 54 and it activates the general logic output MSTROBE to tell the PLC to go ahead with their execution CONCEPTS Auxiliary M S T function transfer Ol FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 165 5 Auxiliary 5 T function transfer FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 166 Should any of them need the AUXEND activated the will wait for this signal to be activated before going on to executing the rest of the block If none of them need the AUXEND signal activated the CNC will maintain the MSTROBE signal activated for a period of time set by the general machine parameter MINAENDW P30 This output stays active for the time indicated by g m p MINAENDW P30 2 It sends out to the PLC the 3 M functions programmed to be executed after the move It sets logic outputs MBCD1 61 2 62 MBCD3 63 and it activates the general logic output MSTROBE to tell the PLC to go ahead with their execution Should any ofthem need the AUXEND activated the CNC will wait forthis signal to be activated before going on to executing the rest of the block If none of them need the AUXEND signal activated the CNC will maintain the MSTROBE signal activated for a period of time set the general machine parameter MINAEN
339. ments with handwheels or with the keyboard will be carried out MACHMOVE 0 Movements on the Cartesian axes MACHMOVE 1 Movements on the incline axes of the machines Home search While searching home the movements are carried out on the incline axes of the machine The incline axis is deactivated when searching home on any axis making up the configuration of the incline axis g CONCEPTS Axes and coordinate systems FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 131 O installation manual Jog CONCEPTS FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 32 5 2 Jog 5 21 Relationship between the axes and the JOG keys The CNC has 3 pairs of keys to manually control the machine axes Mill model Lathe model 5 2 2 Path jog mode This mode may be used to act upon the jog keys of an axis to move both axes of the plane at the same time for chamfering straight sections and rounding curved sections The path jog mode acts when the switch is the continuous or incremental jog positions The CNC assumes as Path jog the keys associated with the X axis Feature setting This feature must be managed from the PLC Jog Oi To activate cancle the Path jog work mode act upon the logic CNC input MASTRHND M5054 M5054 0 Path JOG function off 5054 1 Path JOG function CONCEPTS To indicate the type of mo
340. mit switch DEF 1 2 173 X axis negative overtravel limit switch DEF 144 1 74 Y axis positive overtravel limit switch DEF 1 2 175 Y axis negative overtravel limit switch DEF 144 21 176 Z axis positive overtravel limit switch DEF 1 22 177 Z axis negative overtravel limit switch Used in Treatment of the machine reference home switches DEF 1 178 home switch DEF 1 179 Y axis home switch DEF 1 2 180 Zaxis home switch Used in Treatment of M S T functions DEF 03 M1003 Auxiliary mark Indicates that must be executed DEF 04 M1004 Auxiliary mark Indicates that M04 must be executed DEF M 08 M1008 Auxiliary mark Indicates that M08 must be executed DEF M 41 M1041 Auxiliary mark Indicates that M41 must be executed FAGOR DEF M 42 M1042 Auxiliary mark Indicates that M42 must be executed CNC 8035 Used in Machine way lubrication DEF I LUBING 181 Operator request to lubricate the ways of the machine DEF O LUBING O2 Ways lubrication output Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 334 Used Coolant treatment DEF DEF DEF I COOLMA I COOLAU O COOL 182 183 O3 The operator control the coolant Manual mode The CNC controls the coolant Automatic mode Coolant output Used in Spindle turning control DEF 0 5 04 Used Treatment of the spindle gear change DEF DEF DEF DEF Used in Keyboard simulation DE
341. mmunicate with the remote hard disk This protocol must be available at the PC that is used as server meth CNC CONFIGURATION CNC structure FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 19 CNC CONFIGURATION CNC structure FAGOR 2 8035 M V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 20 DIGITAL DRIVES Digital CAN servo Digital servo is being used to communicate with Fagor drives CAN field bus and standard CanOpen communication protocol Module identification at the bus Each one of the elements integrated into the CAN bus is identified by the 16 position rotary switch 0 15 Address also referred to as Node Select This rotary switch selects the address node occupied by each element integrated in the bus Although the switch has 16 positions only positions 1 through 8 are valid The CNC does not have a switch The drives occupy consecutive positions recommended starting from 1 The corresponding drive must be turned off and back on or press the Reset button for the address change to be assumed The Line Term switch The Line Term switch identifies which are the elements that occupy the ends of the CAN bus i e the first and last physical element in the connection The central unit must always be at one end of the line The other end will be the last one of the remote module groups The switch position of the terminating elements must be 1 and that of the rest of the eleme
342. moves the axis it is associated with When using a Fagor 100P handwheel no other handwheels may be used and it must be connected as first handwheel See 5 3 Movement with an electronic handwheel page 135 It defines the measuring units assumed by the CNC for machine parameters tool tables and programming on power up and after executing M02 M30 EMERGENCY or RESET The code is Value Meaning 0 Millimeters G71 1 Inches G70 By default 0 Indicates which function GOO rapid traverse or G01 linear interpolation is assumed on power up after executing M02 M30 EMERGENCY or RESET The code is Value Meaning 0 GOO rapid traverse 1 G01 linear interpolation Default value 0 Indicates which function G05 round corner or GO7 Square corner is assumed on power up after executing M02 M30 EMERGENCY RESET The code is Value Meaning 0 G07 square corner 1 905 round corner Default value 0 Indicates which function G17 XY plane or G18 ZX plane is assumed on power up after executing M02 M30 EMERGENCY or RESET The code is Value Meaning 0 G17 XY plane 1 G18 ZX plane Default value 0 for the M model Default value 1 for the T model It is only used in the Mill model CNC and indicates which function G43 tool length compensation ON or G44 tool length compensation OFF is assumed on power up after executing M0O2 M30 EMERGENCY or RESET the code is Value Meaning 0
343. n 11 9 SREAL R R Real spindle speed R Theoretical spindle speed Variables associated with spindle speed Active spindle speed at the CNC Spindle speed selected via DNC Spindle speed selected via PLC Spindle speed selected by program Constant surface speed active at the CNC DNCCSS Constant surface speed selected via DNC PLCCSS Constant surface speed selected via PLC PRGCSS Constant surface speed selected by program SSO Spindle Speed Override active at the CNC PRGSSO Override selected by program DNCSSO Override selected via DNC PLCSSO Override selected via PLC CNCSSO Spindle Speed Override selected from front panel Spindle speed limit active at the CNC Spindle speed limit selected via DNC Spindle speed limit selected via PLC FAGOR 2 Spindle speed limit selected by program Maximum machining spindle speed CNC 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 357 Position related variables Real Spindle position Reading from the PLC in ten thousandaths of a degree within 999999999 and from the CNC in degrees within 99999 9999 Real Spindle position Reading from the PLC in ten thousandths of a degree between 0 and 3600000 and from the CNC in degrees between 0 and 360 Theoretical spindle position Reading from the PLC in ten thousanaths of a degree within x999999999 and from the CNC in degrees within 99999 9999 RTPOSS Theoretical spindle position Read
344. n in ten thousandths of a degree 0 359999 The cutter width is given in the units set by g m p INCHES CNC 8035 If INCHES 0 in ten thousandths of a millimeter 999999999 If INCHES 1 in hundred thousandths of an inch 2393700787 If rotary axis in ten thousandths of a degree 999999999 The cutting angle is given in ten thousandths of a degree 0 359999 Sort M V11 1x T V12 1x 297 11 Variables associated with tools ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 298 TOOL TOD NXTOOL NXTOD TMZPn TLFDn TLFFn TLFNn TLFRn TMZTn HTOR Tool magazine table Each magazine position is represented as follows 1 255 Tool number 0 The magazine position is empty 1 The magazine position has been canceled The tool position in the magazine is represented as follows 1 255 Position number 0 The tool is in the spindle 1 Tool not found 2 The tool is in the change position Read only variables Variables TOOL NXTOOL TOD and NXTOD can only be written from the PLC while no block or part program is being executed or simulated Returns the number of the active tool CNCRD TOOL R100 M100 Assigns the number of the active tool to register R100 Returns the number of the active tool offset Returns the next tool number which is selected but is awaiting the execution of M06 to be active Returns the n
345. n indexer with a sinewave Fagor encoder of 3600 lines per turn Therefore for a feedback resolution of 1 um the maximum axis feedrate will be 360 degrees turn 3600 pulses turn x 250 000 pulses s 25 000 degrees s 1 500 000 degrees min Since Fagor sine wave encoders admit a frequency of up to 200 KHz the maximum feedrate will be 360 degrees turn 3600 pulses turn x 200 000 pulses s 20 000 degrees sec 1 200 000 degrees min Squarewave signals The maximum frequency speed for squarewave differential feedback is 425 KHz with a separation of 450 ns between A and flanks Which is equivalent to 90 202 The maximum feedrate for each axis will depend upon the selected resolution and the signal pitch distance per pulse in use When using Fagor linear encoder the maximum feedrate is limited by their own characteristics to 60 m min When using FAGOR rotary encoders their intrinsic output frequency limit is 200Kz CONCEPTS feedback system Ol FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 143 5 feedback system FAGOR 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 144 54 2 Resolution PITCH P7 NPULSES P8 SINMAGNI P10 Square signal encoder Sinusoidal signal encoder Square signal linear encoder Sinusoidal signal linear encoder The CNC provides a number of machine parameters for the axes and for the spindle in order to establis
346. n or inches min Read only variables associated with the override It returns the feedrate override currently selected at the CNC It is given in integer values between 0 and MAXFOVR maximum 255 This feedrate percentage may be indicated by program by PLC by DNC or by the front panel the CNC selects one of them and the priority from the highest to the lowest is by program by DNC by PLC and from the front panel switch It returns the feedrate override 96 currently selected by the DNC If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected It returns the feedrate override currently selected by the switch This variable may be used to read or modify the feedrate override percentage currently selected by program It is given in integer values between 0 and MAXFOVR maximum 255 If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Read write variables associated with the override It returns the feedrate override currently selected by the PLC If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected It returns the feedrate percentage currently selected by the PLC s execution channel It is only set from the PLC using an integer between 0 and 255 Variables associated with feedrates ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 305 11 Variables associated with coordinates ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 8035
347. n order to carry out the tool change Value Meaning YES Yes it is a machining center NO It is not a machining center Default value NO It is recommended to associate he subroutine corresponding to the tool changer with the MO6 NMISCFUN P29 Indicates the number of M functions available in the M function table Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 255 Default value 32 MINAENDW P30 NPCROSS P31 MOVAXIS P32 COMPAXIS P33 Indicates the minimum time period that the AUXEND signal must remain activated so the CNC will interpret it as a valid signal AUXEND is a PLC signal which indicates to the CNC that functions M S or T have been executed If the corresponding M function has been setin the M table not to wait for the AUXEND signal the time period indicated in this parameter will be the duration of the MSTROBE signal Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 100 See 5 8 Auxiliary M S T function transfer on page 165 Indicates the number of points available in the first cross compensation table This compensation is used when the movement of one axis causes a position change on another axis The CNC offers a table where one could enter the position variations of one axis for the particular positions of the other axis Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 255 Default value 0 not available Used in the first cross compensation table it indi
348. nd where the CNC considers the axis to be in position Possible values Between 0 and 99999 9999 degrees or millimeters Between 0 and 3937 00787 inches Default value 0 01 mm Indicates the time period that the axis must remain in the IN POSITION zone in order to consider it to be in position On axes that are only controlled during the interpolation or the positioning dead axes this prevents the CNC from considering the block completed before the axis has stopped and could get out of the in position zone Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 Indicates the maximum following error allowed when this axis moves Possible values Between 0 and 99999 9999 degrees or millimeters Between 0 and 3937 00787 inches Default value 30 mm MAXFLWE2 P22 Indicates the maximum following error allowed when this axis is stopped Possible values Between 0 and 99999 9999 degrees or millimeters Between 0 and 3937 00787 inches Default value 0 1 mm PROGAIN P23 Indicates the value of the proportional gain It sets the command in millivolts desired for a following error of 1 mm gt Velocity command mV Following error mm x PROGAIN Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 mV mm Axis parameters Default value 1000 mV mm Example A feedrate of 20000 mm min is selected by a m p GOOFEED P38 to obtain 1 mm of following error axis lag for a fe
349. nd consist of Logic expressions Boolean 0 1 128 AND 130 Action instructions 025 Logic expressions consist of Consulting instructions 128 025 Operators AND All comments must begin with Lines beginning with a are considered comments and are not executed Programming example PRG Directing instruction Example Comment 1100 M102 Executable proposition 128 AND 130 Logic expression 025 Action instruction 132 Consulting instruction 1st part of the expression AND 136 Consulting instruction 1st part of the expression M300 Action instruction END Directing instruction See Summary of PLC commands on page 361 Empty lines are not allowed they must contain at least one comment 82 Directing instructions PRG PEt CY1 END DEF These provide the PLC with information on the type of module and the way it must be executed The directing instructions available at the PLC are Define the module type PRG Main module 1 First cycle module PE Periodic module It is executed every t milliseconds For example PE 100 is executed every 100 ms Indicates the end of the module If this is not defined the PLC understands that this module ends in the last block of the program Example of programming using the directing instruction END CY1 Beginning of module CY1 END End of module CY1 PRG Beginning of module PRG END End of module PRG PE 100 Begi
350. nd corner mode when changing the tool offset 15 Stop block preparation when executing a new T Default value in all the bits 0 Bit 13 The stop signal is taken into account after the T function is completed This function is applied when the tool change subroutine has been defined so it is executed as a single block and the stop signal has been disabled If the stop signal CYCLE STOP key or PLC signal is received while executing a subroutine the CNC memorizes it until enabling the stop signal In this situation it does not finish the subroutine and it does not consider the T as done which could cause irregularities at the tool magazine To avoid this situation it is possible to consider the stop signal after executing the T function This bit determines whether the stop signal is considered after completing the T function bit 1 or bit 0 If the bit is set to 0 the stop signal is considered in the following cases e f the stop signal has been disabled when it is re enabled Ifthe stop signal has not been disabled when pressing the CYCLE STOP key It should be borne in mind that the DSTOP instruction disables both the CYCLE STOP key and the signal coming from the PLC Both may be re enabled with the ESTOP instruction PROBEDEF 168 of corner when changing tool offsets When changing a tool offset the change takes place at the end of the path The corner where the tool offset is
351. ndle does not have an encoder NPULSES 0 the CNC shows its theoretical rpm affected by the Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 65535 Default value 1000 acc c R H c Ki UU M When using a CAN servo system if parameter NPULSES and parameters INPREV and OUTPREV of all the gears are set with a 0 value the CNC will assume the equivalent ones of the drive Indicates whetherthe spindle encoder uses differential signals double ended or not Value Meaning NO It does NOT use differential signals YES It uses differential signals Default value YES Indicates whether the feedback alarm for this axis will be ON or OFF Value Meaning OFF No feedback alarm desired it is canceled ON Feedback alarm is being used Default value ON AXISCHG P16 DWELL P17 ACCTIME P18 INPOSW P19 INPOTIME P20 MAXFLWE1 P21 MAXFLWE2 P22 Indicates the counting direction If correct leave it as is but to change it select YES ifitwas setto NO viceversa If this parameter is changed s m p LOOPCHG P26 must also be changed so the spindle does not run away Possible values NO YES Default value NO Indicates the dwell from the moment the ENABLE signal is activated until the analog voltage is sent out Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 there is no dwell This parameter is
352. ndle is interpolated with the Z axis Value Meaning 0 Low passing filter 1 Anti resonance notch filter Default value 0 When defining anti resonance filters parameters NORBWIDTH and SHARE must also be set Low passing filter The low passing filter is used to limit the jerk by making the movements smoother although it has the drawback that it rounds the corners slightly 0 707 3dB i f FREQUEN Anti resonance filter notch filter The anti resonance notch filter must be used when the machine has a resonance e frequency to be eliminated 0 707 3dB fi fo FREQUEN FREQUEN P69 The meaning of this parameter depends on the type of filter being applied For the low passing filter it indicates the cutoff frequency or frequency at which its amplitude drops 3 dB or reaches 70 of the nominal amplitude 3dB 20 log A Ao gt 0 707 Ao For the anti resonance notch filter it indicates the mid frequency or frequency at which the resonance reaches its maximum value Possible values Between 0 and 500 0 Hz Default value 30 NORBWID P70 Standardized bandwidth This parameter is only taken into account for the anti resonance notch filter type Possible values between 0 and 100 0 Default value 1 It is calculated with the following formula A Ao Points f1 and f2 correspond to the cutoff 9707 Ao 848 frequenc
353. ndths of a millimeter 2999999999 If INCHES 1 in hundred thousandths of an inch 2393700787 If rotary axis in ten thousandths of a degree 999999999 OEM programs or subroutines These variables may be read and written when executed inside an OEM program or subroutine In order to be able to modify these parameters via PLC an OEM subroutine containing the relevant variables must be executed using the CNCEX command For the CNC to assume the new values operate according to the indicators associated with the machine parameters It is necessary to press the keystroke sequence SHIFT RESET or turn the CNC off and back on RESET must be pressed The rest of the parameters those unmarked will be updated automatically only by changing them Read only variables Returns the value assigned to general machine parameter n CNCRD MPG 8 R100 M102 Loads register R100 with the value of general machine parameter INCHES P8 If mm R100 0 and if inch R100 1 Returns the value assigned to the machine parameter n of the indicated axis X C CNCRD MPY 1 R100 M102 Assigns the value of Y axis machine parameter DFORMAT P1 to register R100 Returns the value assigned to the indicated machine parameter n of the main spindle Returns the value assigned to the indicated machine parameter n of the PLC 11 4 Variables associated with work zones FZONE FZLO X C FZUP X C SZONE SZLO X C S
354. ne Reference Point with respect to Machine Reference Zero will be REFVALUE P36 12 123 5 135 5 After allocating this new value press SHIFT RESET or turn the CNC off and back on in order for the CNC to assume this new value The spindle must be homed again in order for it to assume its right reference values Considerations at the time when the home search is requested the spindle is sitting on the home switch the spindle will back up in the direction opposite to the one indicated by REFDIREC P33 until it is off the switch and then it will go on to searching home Care must be taken when placing the home switch and when setting feedrates REFEED1 P34 and REFEED2 P35 The home switch 1 will be installed so the marker pulse 2 will be found in the zone corresponding to feedrate REFEED2 P35 If there is no room for it reduce the value of REFEED1 P34 For example for encoders whose consecutive marker pulses are very close to each other 1 2 When the spindle does not have a machine reference home switch s m p DECINPUT P31 NO the CNC will move the spindle at the feedrate set by s m p REFEED2 P35 until the first marker pulse from the current position is found thus ending the home search Fagor rotary encoders provide one positive reference pulse per revolution Do not mistake the type of pulse provided by the feedback system with the value to be assigned
355. ne by means of digits 1 through 3 LIMIT 2 DECEL1 etc or using the axis name LIMIT X DECELZ etc The marks of the axes that do not exist in the machine parameters assume the value of the M2045 mark that s always set to 0 When monitoring the PLC program it shows the edited marks either with a letter or with a number However the resource windows created from monitoring will replace the marks with axis names by the marks with axis numbers For example SERVOXON by SERVO1ON SERVOZON by SERVO2ON if there is no Y axis but there are X and Z axes Dum MM HR m The use of mnemonics with the axis name is available from versions V9 0x and V10 0x on If PLC programs older than this version have defined these marks as symbols when compiling the program will issue an error on this line Example DEF ENABLEX M333 Mnemonics using numbers 1 through 3 These signals are numbered as the logic order of the axes it is not related to the values assigned to g m p AXIS1 PO through AXIS8 P7 For example if the CNC controls the X Y and Z axis the order will be X Y Z and therefore LIMIT 1 LIMIT 1 DECEL1 etc for the X axis 2 LIMIT 2 DECEL2 etc for the Y axis 3 LIMIT 3 DECEL3 etc for the Z axis Mnemonics using the axis name The mnemonics of the signals refer to the axis name Mnemonics with axis names offer the advantage that if an axis is eliminated the PLC program will still be consistent with t
356. ng blocks ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES When the variable is set to 1 the programmed coordinates are assumed in diameter when is set to 0 the programmed coordinates are assumed in radius This variable affects the display of the real value of the X axis in the coordinate system of the part and the reading of variables PPOSX TPOSX and POSX On power up after executing an 2 or M30 and after an emergency or a reset the variable is initialized according to the value of the DFORMAT parameter of the X axis If this parameter has a value equal to or greater than 4 the variable takes a value of 1 otherwise it takes the value of 0 PRBMOD It indicates whether a probing error is to issued or not in the following cases even if general machine parameter PROBERR P119 YES When a G75 probing move finishes before the probe has touched part When a G76 probing move finishes but the probe is still touching the part The PRBMOD variable takes the following values p An error message is issued No error message is issued FAGOR Default value 0 The PRBMOD variable can be read and written from the CNC and the PLC an read CNC 8035 from the DNC Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 321 O installation manual 11 Other variables ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x AXES CONTROLLED FROM THE PLC The PLC offers actions CNCEX and
357. ng in the negative direction Possible values Within 99999 9999 mm or 3937 00787 inches For each axis position define the amount of error to be compensated in both FAGOR directions If the amount of error in the negative direction is zero in all points it assumes that the amount of error defined for the positive direction is valid for both directions CNC 8035 Leadscrew error compensation on rotary axes On rotary axes although the display is limited between 0 and 360 the internal count is accumulative When using leadscrew error compensation set positions 0 and 360 first and last point of the table with the same amount of error This way the will apply the same compensation in all the revolutions COR T V12 1x Otherwise the compensation will be limited to the indicated field 119 O Li Installation manual Considerations and limitations When defining the profile points in the table the following requirements must be met The axis points must be in sequential order starting from the most negative least positive point to be compensated For those points outside the compensation zone the CNC will apply the compensation value corresponding to the table point closest to them The amount of error of the machine reference point may have any value Theerror difference between two consecutive points must not be greater than the 4 distance between them maximum slope 100 n
358. ng modes with handwheels Standard handwheel With the general handwheel select the axis to be moved and turn the handwheel With individual handwheels turn the handwheel associated with the axis to be moved Path handwheel For chamfering and rounding corners 2axes are moved along a selected path chamfer or rounding by moving a single handwheel This feature must be managed from the PLC The general handwheel is assumed as the path handwheel or the individual handwheel associated with the X axis Mill or Z lathe Feed handwheel mode To control the feedrate of the machine This feature must be managed from the PLC 5 Depending on the turning speed of the handwheel and the position of the selector switch when requesting a movement at a faster feedrate than the maximum allowed e With individual handwheels the movement stops when stopping the handwheel It does not move the indicated distance With general handwheels g m p HDIFFBAC P129 indicates whether the movement is stopped or it moves the indicated distance CONCEPTS Movement with an electronic handwheel Ol FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 135 5 Movement with an electronic handwheel FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 136 5 3 1 Standard handwheel
359. ng movements have a special treatment When searching home the value of PLCCFR is ignored In GO it considers the value of g m p RAPIDOVR P17 If P17 NO always 100 except if PLCCFR 0 In that case the movement stops If P17 YES considers PLCCFR but it limits its value to 100 In G1 G2 G3 it is always applied except when operating at maximum feedrate FO In that case it is limited to 100 In G75 G76 it is only applied when g m p FOVRG75 P126 YES Blocks programmed in high level language The high level instructions that can be used in the PLC execution channel are IF condition action1 ELSE lt action2 gt CALL expression CNCEX CALL 100 M1000 Sends the CALL 100 command to the CNC so it executes calls subroutine 100 CNCEX P100 P100 2 M1000 Sends the P100 P100 2 command to the CNC to increment the value of parameter P100 in 2 units Programming high level blocks has the following restrictions The programmed blocks can only work with global parameters Upto5 nesting levels of standard subroutines are allowed neither parametric nor global Example in mm Move the W axis to the coordinate indicated by register R101 When the PLC works with integers 32 bits the value of register R2 is given in tenths of microns 0 0001 mm CNCWR 101 155 M101 Assigns the value indicated in R101 to global parameter P155 CNCEX P155 P155 10000 M101 Conv
360. ng the slave axis program as follows Parameter GANTRY P2 for the X axis 0 Parameter GANTRY P2 for axis 1 associated with X axis This way When programming an X axis move the U axis will also move the same distance Not being used Indicates whether it is a normal axis or it only works as a Digital Read Out Value Meaning NO It is a normal axis YES It only works as a Digital Read Out Default value NO They set the travel limits for the axis positive and negative Each one of them indicates the distance from machine reference zero to the relevant travel limit Possible values Within 99999 9999 degrees or millimeters Within x3937 00787 inches Default value For LIMIT P5 8000 mm For LIMIT P6 8000 mm On linear axes if both parameters are set to 0 the travel limits will be ignored On the rotary axes act as follows When both parameters are set to 0 the axis may be moved indefinitely in any direction rotary tables indexers etc When working with positioning axes and Hirth axes try to program in incremental coordinates to avoid mistakes For example C axis with 5 0 720 and the positioning axis in 700 340 on the screen when programming G90 C10 the CNC tries to move the axis via the shortest path 701 702 etc but it will issue an error message for overrunning the travel limits e f the travel of positioning axes and hirth axes is limited to less than
361. ngles to 3009 it calculates the intersection between the compensated paths e For angles over 300 it resolves it like when COMPMODE 0 iM ADIMPG P176 This parameter enables manual intervention with an additive handwheel gt 5 General machine parameters CNC 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 71 General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 72 This function allows jogging the axes while a program is being executed This movement will be applied as if it were another zero offset This parameter has 16 bits counted from right to left bit 15 14 131211109 8 76 54 3 2 1 0 mm m m m m m m Each bit has a function or work mode associated with it By default all the bits will be assigned the value of 0 Assigning the value of 1 activates the corresponding function Bit Meaning 0 10 Not being used 11 Selecting the additive handwheel as handwheel associated with the axis 12 The resolution of the handwheel is set by g m p ADIMPRES 13 Manual intervention enabled with look ahead 14 Cancel the additive offset after M02 M30 emergency or Reset 15 Manual intervention with additive handwheel is available Default value in all the bits 0 When enabling the additive handwheel the following must be borne in mind Ifthe DWELL p
362. nning of module PE END End of module PE Example of programming without using the directing instruction END CY1 Beginning of module CY1 PRG Beginning of module PRG PE 100 Beginning of module PE End of modules CY1 PRG and Label Used to identify a program line and is only used when references or program jumps are made It will be represented with the letter L followed by three figures 1 256 it not being necessary to follow any order and numbers out of sequence are permitted If there are 2 or more labels with the same number in a single program the PLC will show the corresponding error when compiling it Symbol definition Allows a symbol to be associated with any PLC variable it being possible to reference this variable throughout the program by means of the variable name or by means of the associated symbol Example DEF EMERG 11 Assigns the EMERG symbol to input 11 so any reference throughout the program to EMERG will be interpreted by the PLC as a reference to 11 15 also possible to associate a symbol to any number which can be given in decimal with or without a sign or hexadecimal format preceded with the sign Directing instructions PLC PROGRAMMING FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 227 Directing instructions PLC PROGRAMMING CNC 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 228 REA IMA This option among other applications makes
363. nt Check the connection of the cables and connectors DO NOT connect or disconnect these cables to from the CNC when the CNC is on Without powering the electrical cabinet on check all the pins of the connectors for short circuits Precautions It is recommended to reduce the axis travel installing the limit switches closer to each other or detaching the motor from the axis until they are under control Verify that there is no power going from the servo drives to the motors Verify that the connectors for the digital inputs and outputs are disconnected Verify that the E STOP button is pressed Connection Verify that the A C power is correct With the CNC completely disconnected from the electrical cabinet power the electrical cabinet and verify that it responds properly Verify that there is proper voltage between the pins corresponding to external OV and 24V of the connectors for the digital inputs and outputs Apply 24V to each one of the terminals of the electrical cabinet being used that correspond to the digital outputs of the CNC and verify their correct performance Check that the electrical cabinet responds properly With the motors being decoupled from the axes verify that the system consisting of drive motor and tacho is operating properly Connect the A C power to the CNC If there is any problem the CNC will display the corresponding error Select the PLC monitoring mode at the CNC and activate the digital
364. nts 0 The does not have a switch and always has the terminating resistor activated Characteristics of the CAN cable Use a specific CAN cable The ends of all the wires and the shield must be protected by the corresponding pin Also use the pins to secure the cable to the connector Type Shield Twisted pairs 1 x 2 x 0 22 mm Flexibility Superflexible Minimum static bending radius of 50 mm and a dynamic radius of 95 mm Cover PUR Impedance Cat 5 100 Q 120 Q CAN connector pinout 5 pin male Phoenix minicombicon connector 3 5 mm pitch ISO GND CANL SHIELD SHIELD Signal Description ISO GND Ground O V CANL Bus signal LOW SHIELD CAN shield CAN H Bus signal HIGH SHIELD CAN shield The connector has two shield pins Both pins are equivalent the CAN shield may be connected to either one Interconnection of modules O O installation manual It is connected in series The figure shows the CAN connection between the central unit and 2 drives DRIVE MODULE 1 DRIVE MODULE 2 ISO GND CANL SHIELD CAN H SHIELD ADDRESS 1 Line Term 0 ISO GND CANL CAN H SHIELD Line Term 1 ADDRESS 2 ISO GND 0 y CANL SHIELD CAN H SHIELD meth CNC CONFIGURATION CNC structure FAGOR
365. nual JOG operating mode If the PLC sets one of these signals high the CNC will move the corresponding axis in the direction indicated positive or negative This movement will be performed at the feedrate override currently selected The treatment which these signals receive is similar to that given to the JOG keys of the operator panel SPENA1 M5110 1 M5111 SPENA2 M5160 DRENA2 M5161 M5210 M5211 ELIMINA1 M5113 The CNC uses these signals when communicating with the drive via CAN Every time the PLC sets one of these signals high the CNC lets the corresponding drive know about it These signals correspond to the speed enable and drive enable signals of the drive The drive manual describes how the two signals work however remember the following Both signals must be initialized low when powering up the PLC For normal drive operation both signals must be set high Adownflank trailing edge ofthe DRENA signal drive enable turns offthe power circuit of the drive and the motor loses its torque In this situation the motor is no longer governed and it will stop when its kinetic energy runs out Stop by friction Atrailing edge ofthe SPENA signal speed enable switches the internal velocity reference to 0 rpm and brakes the motor while maintaining its torque Once the motor has stopped the drive s power circuit is turned off and the motor has no
366. o each S speed corresponds a spindle gear before selecting a new S one must 1 Analyze whether the new S involves a gear change 2 If it does execute the M function corresponding to the new gear M41 thru M44 in order for the PLC to select it 3 Wait for the PLC to select the new gear Check spindle logic inputs GEAR1 M5458 GEAR2 M5459 GEARS M5460 and GEAR4 M5461 4 Select the new speed S To have the CNC perform all these operations automatically set s m p AUTOGEAR P6 YES to indicate that the gear change is to be generated by the CNC Automatic gear change controlled by the PLC MINAENDW When the CNC detects a gear change it sends out to the PLC the corresponding M code M41 thru M44 via one of the logic outputs MBCD1 7 R550 thru R556 It also activates general logic output MSTROBE M5532 to tell the PLC to go FAGOR ahead with the execution The PLC deactivates CNC general logic input AUXEND M5016 to indicate to the CNC 8035 CNC that it began processing the M function Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 173 CONCEPTS Spindle FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 174 When requiring spindle oscillation control during a gear change follow these steps 1 Indicate from the PLC at CNC logic input SANALOG R504 the value of the residual S voltage to be applied to the spindle drive Also set CNC logic input
367. ode assumes as axis feedrate the one selected in jog mode and it will also be affected by the feedrate override switch If FO is selected itassumes the one indicated by machine parameter JOGFEED 43 This mode ignores the rapid jog key PATH JOG movements respect the travel limits and the work zones Path jog movements may be aborted in the following ways By pressing the STOP key e By turning the JOG switch to one of the handwheel positions By setting general logic input MASTRHND M5054 0 By setting general logic input STOP 5001 0 5 3 Movement with an electronic handwheel Depending on their configuration the available handwheels are General handwheel It can be used to jog any axis one by one Select the axis and turn the handwheel to move it Individual handwheel It replaces the mechanical handwheels Up to 2 handwheels can be used one per axis It only moves the axis it is associated with To move any of them turn the switch to any of the handwheel positions Positions 1 10 and 100 indicate the multiplying factor being applied besides the internal x4 to the feedback pulses supplied by the electronic handwheel For example if the manufacturer has set a distance of 0 100 mm or 0 0100 inches per handwheel turn for switch position 1 Switch position Distance per turn 0 100 mm or 0 0100 inches 1 10 1 000 mm or 0 1000 inches 100 10 000 mm or 1 0000 inches There are 3 operati
368. of the required auxiliary function or functions has been completed The CNC is provided with a timer which can be enabled and disabled By means of this logic CNC input it will be enabled timing when the PLC sets the signal TIMERON at a high logic level This general purpose timer can be accessed by means of the internal variable TIMER General logic inputs LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 259 TREJECT M5018 The PLC sets this signal at a high logic level in order to tell the CNC to reject the tool in use even though it may not have come to the end of its service life An important application is to replace the tool when the PLC detects that it is broken PANELOFF M5019 The PLC sets this signal high to tell the CNC that the keyboard is deactivated Itis recommended to change the state of this mark by means of an accessible external input since the PLC will not stop and the CNC will receive the error message in each new PLC cycle scan thus preventing access to any of the PLC modes PLCABORT M5022 The PLC sets this signal high to indicate to the CNC that it must stop the PLC axes It also cancels the rest of the movement and the possible blocks that might have been sent from the PLC Once this process is ended the CNC automatically deactivates this signals On power up the CNC sets this mark to PLCREADY M5023 This mark indicates the PLC
369. of time t indicated the directing instruction defining the module This module may be used to process certain critical inputs and outputs which cannot be checked or updated properly in the body of the main program due to its extended execution time be evaluated at every PLC program cycle Those tasks would be programmed in the periodic module and they would be executed with the frequency established by the execution time assigned to this module for example if t2 30 000 every 30 seconds Another application for this module is for those cases where specific tasks need not 6 A value between 1 and 65535 milliseconds may be programmed The execution time of this module will be limited by the value of plc m p WDGPER P1 This module operates by default with the real values of resources O M Example PE 10 Defines the beginning of the periodic module PE which will be executed every 10 milliseconds INTRODUCTION TO THE PLC Modular structure of the program If this module is being executed with real values and acts on a physical output this is updated at the end of the execution of the periodic module FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 202 6 4 4 Priority of execution of the PLC modules Every time the PLC program is started command RUN the first module to be executed is the first cycle module CY1 Once execution has been completed it will continue with the main module PRG
370. ogic input AUXENDP to tell the CNC that the execution of the function has started 3 The PLC will execute all the required auxiliary functions analyzing general logic output MSTROBEP and variables MBCDP1 through MBCDP7 R565 through R571 Once this has been executed the PLC must activate the general logic input AUXENDP to indicate to the CNC that the processing of the required functions was completed 4 Once the general AUXENDP input is activated the CNC will require that this signal be kept active for a time period greater than the value given to the g m p MINAENDW P30 This way erroneous interpretations of this signal by the CNC due to an improper PLC program logic are avoided 5 Once the period of time MINAENDW has elapsed with the general input AUXENDP at a high logic level the CNC will deactivate the general logic output MSTROBEP to tell the PLC that the execution of the required auxiliary function or functions has been completed BLOABORP M5061 It is similar to general logic input BLOABOR M5060 but for the PLC channel When the PLC sets this mark high the CNC ends the movement in progress and starts executing the next block If the interrupted block had M functions to be executed after the block they will be executed before going on to the next block This mark only affects the execution in automatic mode and the simulation with motion This mark does not stay active after the
371. ol seen 171 5 9 8 Spindle gear chatlge 5 c in eene e rrt e a decre dece 173 5 9 4 Spindle in closed oOp 2 175 5 10 Treatment of emergency 180 5 11 Digital CAN servo 5 11 1 Communications 183 5 12 Fagor handwheels HBE and 186 5 13 Machine safety related functions 190 5 13 1 Maximum machining spindle speed 190 5 13 2 Cycle start disabled when hardware errors occur 192 5 14 change via 193 INTRODUCTION THE PLC 6 1 6 2 program execution incre cte eiit tee E Rei cote coe eR CES 6 3 Cycle ncn 6 4 Modular structure of the program 6 4 1 First cycle module CY1 6 4 2 6 4 3 Periodic execution module PE t essen 202 6 4 4 Priority of execution of the PLC modules eee 203 PLC RESOURCES 7 1 7 2 7 3 E 7 4 le LD Jul 7 5 1 Monostable mode TG1
372. on When not working with tool length compensation G44 the CNC displays the tool base position On the Lathe model it always works with tool length compensation Therefore by default the CNC always displays the tool tip position ANTIME P69 It is used on punch presses that have an eccentric cam as a punching system It indicates how far in advance the general logic output ADVINPOS M5537 is activated before the axes reach position This reduces idle time thus increasing the number of punches per minute Possible values Integers between 0 and 65535 ms Default value 0 Y If the total duration of the movement is lower than the value in parameter ANTIME the anticipation signal ADVINPOS will be activated immediately If ANTIME 0 the anticipation signal ADVINPOS will never be activated PERCAX P70 Not being used TAFTERS P71 g m p TOOLSUB P60 indicates the number of the subroutine associated with the tool The TAFTERS parameter determines whether the tool selection is carried out before or after executing that subroutine MACHINE PARAMETERS General machine parameters Value Meaning YES After executing the subroutine NO Before executing the subroutine Default value NO LOOPTIME P72 It sets the sample period used by the CNC and consequently affects the block processing time Value Meaning 0 4 ms period standard 4 Period of 4 milliseconds 5 Period of 5 milliseconds 6 Period of 6 m
373. on instructions depending on the result obtained in the logic expression may be used to alter the status of the PLC resources and CNC PLC communication marks Logic expression Action instruction There may be several action instructions associated with a single logic expression All the action instructions must be preceded by the sign All Action Instructions allow a previous NOT which reverses the result of the expression for that action Example 12 NOT M100 NOT 2 100 CPR 1 100 Output O3 will show the status of input 12 Mark M100 will show the negated state of input I2 A down flank at input I2 will activate the trigger input TG1 of timer T2 An up flank at I2 will preset counter C1 with a value of 100 Action instructions are divided into Assignment Binary Action Instructions Conditioned binary actions instructions Sequence breaking action instructions Arithmetic action instructions Logic action instructions Specific action instructions Action instructions can alter the status of all the PLC resources except that of the physical inputs being used When seeing the field I 1 1024 one must understand that only the status of the unused inputs may be changed For example if physical inputs 11 through 132 are used only inputs 133 through 11024 may be changed Action instruction PLC PROGRAMMING FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12
374. or can turn at 3000 rpm and it is attached to a 5 pitch screw 5 mm turn The maximum feedrate will be 3000 rpm x 5 mm turn 15000 mm minute This will be the value to be assigned to a m p GOOFEED P38 Once these values are assigned to the relevant parameters the drives must be adjusted To do so a CNC program can be executed which will move the axis back and forth continuously at GOO feedrate One such program could be N10 GOO G90 X200 X 200 GOTO N10 If the Tach in use provides 20V per 1000 rpm its voltage should be 20 V 1000 rpm x 3000 rpm 60 V 3 22 MACHINE AND POWER CONNECTION FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 35 34 Connection of the emergency input and output The emergency input of the CNC corresponds with the PLC input 11 pin 10 of connector X2 and must be supplied with 24V Since the CNC also processes this signal directly if the 24V disappear the CNC will display EXTERNAL EMERGENCY ERROR and will deactivate all axes enables and will cancel all analog outputs MACHINE AND POWER CONNECTION Connection of the emergency input and output During the initializing process carried out by the CNC on power up the EMERGENCY OUTPUT of the CNC pin 2 of connector X10 remains at low at 0 in order to avoid a premature activation of the electrical cabinet If this process is successful the CNC will set the real value of PLC output O1 to 1 Oth
375. plied regarding the chapter on initial warranty If the repair is carried out within the warranty period the warranty extension has no effect When the customer does not choose the standard repair and just the faulty material has been replaced the warranty will cover just the replaced parts or components within 12 months For sold parts the warranty is 12 moths length Maintenance contracts The SERVICE CONTRACT is available for the distributor or manufacturer who buys and installs our CNC systems MATERIAL RETURNING TERMS When returning the remote modules or the central unit pack it in its original package and with its original packaging material If not available pack it as follows 1 Get a cardboard box whose three inside dimensions are at least 15 cm 6 inches larger than those of the unit The cardboard being used to make the box must have a resistance of 170 kg 375 Ib 2 Attach the unit label indicating the owner of the unit his her address the name of the contact person the type of unit and the serial number In case of failure also indicate the symptom and a short description Wrap the unit in a polyethylene roll or similar material to protect it When sending the central unit above all protect the screen Pad the unit inside the cardboard box with polyurethane foam on all sides oc Seal the cardboard box with packing tape or industrial staples FAGOR 8035 s
376. r into account when operating in closed loop M19 Indicates the value of the proportional gain Its value represents the analog voltage corresponding to a following error of 1 degree Velocity command mV Following error degrees x PROGAIN Possible values 4 Integers between 0 and 65535 mV degree Default value 1000 mV degree This value is taken for the first spindle gear and the CNC calculates the values for the rest of the gears Example Spindle parameters s m p MAXGEAR1 P2 500 rev min The desired speed for a 1 degree of following error is S 1000 min 2 778 rev rpm MACHINE PARAMETERS Command from the drive 9 5V for 500 rpm Analog output corresponding to S 2 1000 min 2 778 rpm Command 9 5 500 x 2 778 52 778 mV Therefore PROGAIN 53 DERGAIN P24 The CNC takes this parameter into account when operating in closed loop M19 Indicates the value of the derivative gain Its value represents the analog voltage in millivolts corresponding to a change in following error of 1mm 0 03937 inches in 10 milliseconds This analog voltage will be added to the one calculated for the proportional gain Analog voltage amp PRoGAIN DERGAIN 10 1 It is a good idea to also use the acc dec ACCTIME2 P18 for this axis with a value other than 0 if this gain is to be applied Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 65535 Default value 0 der
377. r pulses of both encoders be half the leadscrew pitch a CONCEPTS Reference systems FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 159 5 Reference systems FAGOR 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 160 5 6 2 Setting on systems without distance coded feedback Machine reference point The reference point must be adjusted on one axis at a time The following procedure is recommended Indicate in the a m p REFPULSE P32 the type of marker pulse lo being used for Home Search Likewise set a m p REFDIREC P33 to indicate the direction of the axis when searching Home Ontheotherhand seta m p REFEED1 P34 that defines the approach feedrate of the axis until the home switch is pressed and a m p REFEED2 P35 that indicates the homing feedrate until the reference mark marker pulse is detected The machine reference point will be set to 0 a m p REFVALUE P36 Onceinthe JOG mode andafter positioning the axis in the right area start homing the axis When done the will assign a value to this point After moving the axis to the Machine Reference Zero or up to a known position with respect to Machine Reference Zero observe the position reading of the CNC for that point This will be distance from the Machine Reference Zero to that point Therefore the value to be assigned to a m p REFVALUE P36 which defines the coordinate
378. r that the auxiliary function MO9 is programmed in the block being executed The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that it is working with spindle orientation or that the auxiliary function M19 is programmed in the block being executed The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the auxiliary function M30 program end is programmed in the block being executed The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the first spindle gear is selected or that the auxiliary function M41 is programmed in the block being executed General logic outputs LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 285 17 17 17 LI LJ LJ LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS e General logic outputs FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 286 Installation manual DM42 M5551 DM43 M5550 DM44 M5549 The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the second spindle gear is selected or that the auxiliary function M42 is programmed in the block being executed The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the third spindle gear is selected or that the auxiliary function M43 is programmed in the block being executed The CNC sets this signal high to tell the PLC that the fourth spindle gear is selected or that the auxiliary function M44 is programmed in the block being executed 10 7 Logic outputs of the axes There are several groups of logic inp
379. rator to home the axes after powering the machine up MANUAL OR MDI OR AUTOMAT AND NOT REFPOIN1 AND REFPOIN2 AND REFPOINS3 MSG5 The message MSG5 appears in the JOG MDI or Automatic modes and only when the axes of the machine have not been referenced homed The CNC logic outputs REFPOIN indicate that the axes have been homed Error treatment Error message treatment The PLC permits displaying the corresponding error message on the CNC screen by activating marks ERR1 through ERR64 as well as interrupting the CNC program execution stopping the axes and the spindle The activation of any of these marks does not activate the external CNC Emergency output Because the PLC program is not interrupted by these marks it is advised to make it possible to change their status via accessible external inputs otherwise the CNC will keep receiving the same error at every PLC scan cycle thus preventing access to any PLC mode The text associated to the error message must be previously edited at the PLC error table The next example shows how to generate the X axis overtravel limit overrun error when one of the overtravel limit switches is pressed NOT I LIMTX1 OR NOT I LIMTX2 ERR10 Treatment of functions The CNC activates the general logic output MSTROBE to tell the PLC to execute the M functions indicated at the variables MBCD1 through MBCD7 It also activates the SSTROBE output w
380. returns the amount of time in hundredths of a second elapsed executing the part It ignores the time the execution has been interrupted Possible values 0 4294967295 The CNC will consider the execution of the program finished after executing its last block or after executing a block containing an MO2 or M30 miscellaneous function Indicates whether it is the first time that a program has been run or not It returns a value of 1 if it is the first time and 0 if not Other variables ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 319 11 Other variables ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 8035 Sort V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 320 ANAIn CNCERR DNCERR DNCSTA TIMEG RIP TIMER PARTC KEY A first time execution is considered as being one which is done After turning on the CNC e After pressing SHIFT RESET Every time a new program is selected It returns the status in tenths of a volt 5 V range of the indicated analog input n and it is possible to select one of the 8 analog inputs 1 through 8 Returns the Error code active at the If none it returns 0 Returns the Error code generated via DNC If none it returns 0 DNC transmission status even when not having this option There is on bit that will be set to 1 when a transmission is in progress It shows the timing sta
381. rogram and it will finish the execution of the subroutine at that point It is advisable to place the subroutines after the END of the main program since if these are placed at the beginning the PLC will start to execute them and will interpret the END of the subroutine as the END of the module and it will consider that this has finished because no call was made to the subroutine 8 5 4 Arithmetic action instructions MOV It is used to move data from one PLC resource to another The programming format is Origin Destination Source Destination Number of code code bits to transmit 11 512 11 512 Bin 0 Bin 1 512 1 512 1 BCD 1 BCD 1 5957 1 5957 T 1 256 R 1 559 C 1 256 1 559 The source and destination codes indicate the original and destination format binary or BCD of the data 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 or 32 bits may be transmitted If the codes and number of bits to be moved are not indicated 32 binary bits will be moved bit to bit 0032 MOV 112 M100 0032 from Binary to Binary in 32 bits MOV 021 R100 0012 from Binary to Binary in 12 bits MOV C22 023 0108 from Binary to BCD in 8 bits MOV T10 M112 1020 from BCD to Binary in 20 bits If the number to be converted from binary to BCD is larger than the maximum BCD its value will be truncated ignoring the most significant bits The maximum BCD value that can be converted is with 4 bits with 16 9999999 with 28 with 8 bits BE bits
382. rogrammed turning speed When the spindle is controlled by the PLC by means of the PLCCNTL mark this limit is ignored BLOABOR M5060 When the PLC sets this mark high the CNC ends the movement in progress and starts executing the next block If the interrupted block had M functions to be executed after the block they will be executed before going on to the next block This mark only affects the execution in automatic mode and the simulation with motion This mark does not stay active after the execution Once executed the CNC deactivates it Likewise if they are activated in a block that does not accept them they will also be deactivated they do not stay active for the next block These marks affect the following functions t affect motion blocks GO G1 G2 G3 They affect the dwell programmed with G4 e t affects the look ahead In this type of programs with very small blocks it is not possible to stop at the same block where the BLOABOR mark is detected In these cases it will be canceled at the block where the axis is fully decelerated These marks do not affect the following functions t does not affect motionless blocs which will be executed tdoes not affect the M functions that are executed after the block These functions are always executed even if the movement of the block is interrupted e Itdoes affect not affect threading blocks G33 Nor does it affect the regular tapping or rigid tapping cy
383. rom the moment manufacture begins until 8 years after the date on which it disappears from the catalogue FAGOR has exclusive competence in deciding whether the repair enters within the term defined as the warranty period Excluding clauses Repairs will be carried out on our premises Therefore all expenses incurred as a result of trips made by technical personnel to carry out equipment repairs despite these being within the above mentioned period of warranty are not covered by the warranty Said warranty will be applied whenever the equipment has been installed in accordance with instructions has not be mistreated has not been damaged by accident or by negligence and has not been tampered with by personnel not authorised by FAGOR If once servicing or repairs have been made the cause of the malfunction cannot be attributed to said elements the customer is obliged to cover the expenses incurred in accordance with the tariffs in force Other warranties implicit or explicit are not covered and FAGOR AUTOMATION cannot be held responsible for other damages which may occur FAGOR 2 8035 Warranty terms FAGOR 2 8035 XVIII Warranty on repairs In a similar way to the initial warranty FAGOR offers a warranty on standard repairs according to the following conditions CONCEPT Covers parts and laborfor repairs or replacements atthe network s own facilities EXCLUDING CLAUSES The same as those ap
384. roportional that The maximum amount of following error allowed by the CNC for the spindle is the value indicated by s m p MAXFLWE1 P21 When exceeded the CNC issues the corresponding following error message The amount of following error decreases as the gain increases but it tends to make the system unstable Feed forward gain setting With the feed forward gain it is possible to reduce the following error without increasing the gain thus keeping the system stable It set the percentage of analog output due to the programmed feedrate the rest depends on the proportional and derivative AC forward gains This gain is only to be used when operating with acceleration deceleration Programmed gt ROGAIN gt Analog outpi For example if s m p FFGAIN P25 has been setto 80 the spindle analog voltage will be 8096 of it will depend on the programmed feedrate feed forward gain 20 of it will depend on the spindle following error proportional gain Setting the Feed Forward gain involves a critical adjustment of s m p MAXVOLT P37 1 Set the spindle at maximum speed and at 1096 2 Measure the actual analog voltage at the drive 3 Set parameter MAXVOLT P37 to a value 10 times the measured value For example If the measured voltage was 0 945 V then set this parameter to 9 45 V in other words 7 9450 Next set s m p FFGAIN P25 to the desired value Derivative AC forward gain settin
385. rr M V11 1x T V12 1x 366 AXIS LOGIC INPUTS Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 5100 5150 5200 Travel limit overrun Stops the axes and the spindle Displays the error LIMIT M5101 M5151 M5201 Travel limit overrun Stops the axes and the spindle Displays the error DECEL M5102 M5152 M5202 Home switch pressed INHIBIT M5103 M5153 M5203 Inhibits axis movement MIRROR M5104 M5154 M5204 Applies mirror image SWITCH M510 M5155 M5205 Swaps commands axes with 1 drive DRO M5106 M5156 M5206 DRO axis DRO 1 and SERVOON 0 SERVO ON M5107 M5157 M5207 Servo signal 1 closes the position loop AXIS M5108 M5158 M5208 Moves the axis in JOG mode Similar to JOG keys AXIS M5109 M5159 M5209 Moves the axis in JOG mode Similar to JOG keys DRENA 5111 5161 5211 With Sercos Drive enable signal of the drive ELIMINA M5113 M5163 M5213 Itdoes not display the axis and cancels the feedback alarms SMOTOF M5114 M5164 M5214 Cancels the SMOTIME filter a m p SMOTIME P58 LIM OFF M5115 M5165 M5215 It ignores the software limits MANINT M5116 M5166 M5216 Activate the additive handwheel in each axis SPINDLE LOGIC INPUTS LIMIT S M5450 Travel limit overrun Stops the axes and the spindle Displays the error LIMIT S M5451 Travel limit overrun Stops the axes and the spindle Displays the error DECELS M5452 Home switch pressed SPDLEINH M5453 Outputs a zero command for the spindle SPDLEREV M5454 R
386. s Linear encoder Encoder resolution Rotary encoder Leadscrew pitch per encoder turn Number of pulses lines per encoder turn Number of pulses lines per encoder turn Rotary axis Rotary encoder Degrees that the shaft rotates per encoder turn When using gear reduction on the shaft only the whole assembly must be taken into account when setting one of parameters PITCH or NPULSES Linear axis with a 5 mm pitch leadscrew PITCH 5 mm Axis with a 20um pitch Fagor linear encoder PITCH 0 020 mm Rotary axis with 1 10 gear ratio PITCH 36 CAN servo system The meaning of parameter PITCH depends on the type of axis regardless of the type of encoder used e On linear axis it sets the resolution of the encoder On rotary axis it sets the number of degrees the shaft rotates per encoder turn In this type of servo system the leadscrew pitch is set through parameter PITCHB P86 PITCH P7 PITCHB P86 NPULSES P8 Encoder resolution Encoder resolution Number of pulses lines per encoder turn Leadscrew pitch per encoder turn Number of pulses lines per encoder turn Degrees that the shaft 0 rotates per encoder turn When using gear reduction on the shaft only the whole assembly must be taken into account when setting one of parameters PITCH or NPULSES Indicates the number or pulses rev provided by the rotary encoder When using a linear encoder it must be set to 0 It must be
387. s no preparation is done On the other hand only the programmed axes are involved in the next movement The rest of the axes are ignored even if there is a real difference in position because the previous block has been aborted Path 1 Path 2 The solid lines represent the programmed paths and the dashed lines the FAGOR real paths after activating the BLOABORP mark If a block is aborted and then the RETRACE function is activated the retraced path CNC 8035 backwards will not be the same as the one traveled forward The two paths will not coincide either when aborting a block while the RETRACE function is active Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 279 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS General logic outputs FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 280 10 6 General logic outputs CNCREADY M5500 The CNC activates and maintains this signal high if the autotest which the CNC makes when it is powered up has not detected any problem Should any hardware error be detected RAM over temperature etc this signal is set low Example CNCREADY AND rest of conditions O1 The emergency output O1 of the PLC must be normally high Should any problem come up on CNC power up CNCREADY emergency output O1 must be set low OV START M5501 The CNC sets this signal high in order to tell the PLC that the START key on the front panel has been pressed If the PLC program considers that there is no
388. s with their corresponding mnemonic for displaying messages in the CNC c 9 4000 MSG001 M4100 MSG101 M4125 MSG126 5 5 4001 500002 4101 MSG102 M4126 MSG127 5 4002 MSG003 M4102 MSG103 M4127 MSG128 ES a If one of these marks is activated high logic level the CNC will display the selected message number and its associated text on the PLC message display window upper amp right hand part T 2 The CNC allows a text to be associated to each PLC message PLC message editing mode If the PLC activates 2 or more messages the CNC will always display the message with the highest priority this being understood as being the message with the lowest number In this way MSG1 will have the highest priority and MSG128 the lowest priority In this same message display window the CNC can show the character plus sign which indicates that there are more messages activated by the PLC and these can be displayed if the active message page option is accessed in the PLC operating mode A message can be erased by deactivating it from the PLC program low logic level or from the CNC keyboard after selecting it on the active messages page Nevertheless and depending on the program the PLC may reactivate this message in the following cycle Example DFU 110 MSG1 110 MSG2 1 Input 110 changes from 0 to 1 Messages 501 and MSG2 are activated 2 The user d
389. s allow the previous operand NOT which reverses the result of the preceding consultation Example NOT 11 This Consultation will return a 0 if input is at 1 and a 1 when input I1 is at O Simple They test the status of the resources and they return their logic state 1 512 Inputs 1 512 Outputs 1 5957 Marks T 1 256 Timers C 1 256 Counters B 0 31 R 1 499 Register Bits Example 112 It will return a 1 if input 12 is active and a 0 if otherwise Flank detection They check whether the state of a resource has changed since the last time this consultation was made This consultation may be made on real or image values There are two types of instructions It detects an up flank 0 to 1 change at the indicated resource It returns a 1 if it happened It detects an down flank 0 to 1 change at the indicated resource It returns a 1 if it happened The programming format of the different combinations is DFU Up flank detection 1 512 DFD Down flank detection O 1 512 M 1 5957 The consulting instructions to detect the flanks of marks M4000 thru M4127 M4500 thru 4563 4700 thru M4955 and M5000 thru M5957 will be executed with their real values even when working with image values since these marks have no image values Considering that these instructions can evaluate real and image values the following points must be taken into account The PLC updates the real values of the inputs at the beg
390. s and updating the marks corresponding to the CNC logic outputs and just before starting the program execution Use this instruction to carry out another data capture while executing the PLC cycle Example of how to use the TRACE instruction PRG ae Data capture mE Data capture m Data capture END PE5 Data capture END The data capture in the execution of the trace in this program takes place At the beginning of each PRG cycle Every time the periodic cycle is executed every 5 milliseconds e times while executing the PRG module Once while executing the PE module This way by means of the TRACE instruction the data capture can be done any time especially at those program points considered more critical This instruction must only be used when debugging the PLC program and it should be avoided once the PLC program is fully debugged Ds Directing instructions PLC PROGRAMMING FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 229 PLC PROGRAMMING Consulting instructions FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 230 8 3 DFU DFD Consulting instructions They may be used to check the status of PLC resources as well as the marks and registers for CNC PLC communication They are divided into Simple consulting Instructions Flank detection consulting Instructions Comparison consulting Instructions All the consulting instruction
391. s entered in parameters NUILO1 and NUOLO1 PLC Parameters I m MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 115 properly number the inputs outputs of the expansion module follow the indications of the example Example Let s assume an 8035 CNC with 161 80 and a local expansion module with 241 160 How should all the inputs outputs of the expansion module be numbered gt The inputs outputs that do not belong to the expansion module 161 80 cannot be set by parameters therefore the first input is always numbered as 11 and the first 4 output as O1 n gt The inputs outputs of the expansion module with the PLC parameters set to zero of the expansion module H7 140 O9 O24 o L Cg Parameters of the expansion module NUILO1 0 5 S NUOLO1 0 E E will be 5 T o lt The inputs of the expansion module are numbered sequentially after the last input that does not belong to the expansion module 116 1 117 Follow the same procedure for the outputs gt The inputs outputs of the expansion module with the PLC parameters set to a value other than zero and multiple of 1 8n where n is a natural number Parameters of the expansion module NUILO1 65 NUOLO1 33 will be of the expansion module 165 186 033 048 The inputs of the expansion module are numbered sequentially after the value assigned to parameter
392. s input must be at level 1 By default and every time a timer is activated the PLC will assign this input a logic level of 1 If once the timer is activated TEN 0 is selected the PLC stops timing and it is necessary to assign TEN 1 for this timing to continue Example 12 10 Input I2 controls the Enable input of timer T10 Timers PLC RESOURCES FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 209 o Bo E 5 o tr o 4 a FAGOR 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 210 Reset input TRS This input allows the timer to be initialized by assigning the value 0 to its T status and by canceling its count it initializes this to O It is referred to by the letters TRS followed by the timer number it is wished to reference for example TRS 1 TRS 25 TRS 102 etc This initialization of the timer will be made when a transition of logic level from 0 to leading edge is produced By default and every time a timer is activated the PLC will assign this input a logic level of 0 If once the timer is activated a leading edge is produced at the TRS input the PLC initializes the timer assigning value 0 to its T status and cancelling the count it initializes this to 0 Additionally the timer is deactivated it being necessary to activate its trigger input to activate it again Example 13 TRS 10 Input I3 controls the Res
393. s it CEN 1 Example 110 CEN 12 Input 110 controls the enable input of counter C12 Preset input CPR This input allows the counter to be preset with the desired value It is referred to by the letters CPR followed by the number of the counter which is required to reference and the value to be assigned to the counter count For example CPR 1 100 CPR 25 224 CPR 102 0 CPR 200 500 etc The value of the count can be indicated by means of a numerical value or by assigning to it the internal value of an R register CPR 20 100 Presets the C20 counter to a value of 100 CPR 22 R200 Presets the C22 counter with the value of the Register R200 when the instruction is executed The counter is preset with the value when a leading edge is produced at the CPR input Status output C This output indicates the logic status of the counter It is referred to by the letter C followed by the counter number which is required to reference for example C1 C25 C102 etc The logic status of the counter will be C 1 when the value of the count is zero and C 0 in the remainder of cases Count value C This output indicates the value of the internal counter count It is referred to by the letter C followed by the counter number which is required to reference for example C1 C25 C102 etc Although when written C123 it coincides with the status output both are different and are used in d
394. s sec 666 666 rpm Example 8 Resolution in degrees with sinewave encoder We would like to obtain a 0 001 resolution by using a 3600 pulse rev sinusoidal encoder We must calculate the multiplying factor SINMAGNI to be applied by the CNC to the pulses provided by the encoder in order to obtain the desired resolution SINMAGNI degrees per turn Nr of pulses x Resolution SINMAGNI 360 3600 x 0 001 100 CONCEPTS feedback system Ol Therefore INCHES 0 360 0000 NPULSES 3600 SINMAGNI 100 Although the CNC accepts a maximum squarewave frequency of 250 KHz when using Fagor sine wave rotary encoders their output frequency is limited to 200KHz thus the maximum possible feedrate F will be Max feedrate 200 000 pulses sec 3 600 pulses turn Max feedrate 55 5556 turns sec 3333 33 rpm FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 147 5 Axis adjustment FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 148 5 5 Axis adjustment In order to be able to set the axes their corresponding feedback devices must be previously connected to the CNC Before making this adjustment position the axes near the middle of their travel and place the hard stops monitored by the electrical cabinet near these mid travel points in order to prevent any possible damage to the machine The axis adjustment is carried out in two steps First the
395. sed to make it possible to change their status via accessible external inputs otherwise the CNC will keep receiving the same error at every PLC scan cycle thus preventing access to any PLC mode By activating one of the marks M4700 M4955 user pages 0 255 can be activated in the CNC They can be named by means of mark M4700 M4955 or by means of their associated mnemonic PICO PIC255 M4700 M4701 M4702 M4954 M4955 PICO PIC1 PIC2 PIC254 PIC255 The PLC has marks M5000 through M5957 to exchange information with the CNC all of which have associated mnemonics See chapter 10 Logic CNC inputs and outputs N Marks PLC RESOURCES FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 207 Registers PLC RESOURCES FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 208 7 4 Registers These are elements which store a numerical value in 32 bits their value remaining unalterable even when the power supply to the system is cut off They do not have image values and are represented by the letter R followed by the register number it is desired to reference for example R1 R25 R102 etc The PLC has the following registers User registers R1 R499 Registers for communication with the CNC R500 R559 The PLC will consider each value stored in each register as an integer with a sign and can be within 2147483647 It is also possible to make reference to a BIT of the REGISTER by putting
396. servo drive loop is adjusted and then the CNC loop Drive loop setting c1 N Verify that the power output of the drives is OFF Set all FBALTIME P12 to a value other than 0 for example FBALTIME 1000 Turn the CNC OFF Turn the drive power output ON Turn the CNC ON Ifthe axis runs away the CNC will issue the following error message for this axis Turn the CNC off and swap the tacho wires at the drive Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the CNC stops issuing errors Loop setting of the CNC The axes are set one at a time 1 2 Select the JOG operating mode at the CNC Jog the axis to be adjusted If the axis runs away the CNC issues the corresponding following error message In this case the a m p LOOPCHG P26 must be changed If the axis does not run away but it does not move in the desired direction Change both a m p AXISCHG P13 and LOOPCHG P26 5 5 1 Drive setting Offset drift adjustment This adjustment is made on one axis at a time Select the JOG mode at the CNC and press the softkey sequence Display Following error The CNC shows the current following Error axis lag of the axes Adjust the offset by turning the offset potentiometer at the drive NOT AT THE CNC until a 0 following error is obtained Maximum feedrate adjustment The drives should be adjusted so they provide maximum axis feedrate when receiving an analog voltage velocity comm
397. signal to let the PLC know that it must execute it The CNC will keep the output MSTROBE active during the time indicated by means of g m p MINAENDW P30 After this time the CNC will check whether the new spindle gear has been physically selected by verifying that the corresponding GEAR input GEAR is set high f it is not selected the will stop the axes feed and the spindle rotation displaying the corresponding error message SPENAS M5462 DRENAS M5463 spindle The CNC uses these signals when communicating with the drive via CAN Every time the PLC sets one of these signals high the CNC lets the corresponding drive know about it These signals correspond to the speed enable and drive enable signals of the drive The drive manual describes how the two signals work however remember the following Both signals must be initialized low when powering up the PLC For normal drive operation both signals must be set high e Adownflank trailing edge ofthe DRENA signal drive enable turns off the power circuit of the drive and the motor loses its torque In this situation the motor is no longer governed and it will stop when its kinetic energy runs out Stop by friction Atrailing edge ofthe SPENA signal speed enable switches the internal velocity reference to 0 rpm and brakes the motor while maintaining its torque Once the motor has stopped the drive s power circuit
398. signals to indicate to the CNC which spindle gear is currently selected high logic level The CNC only considers the signals for the currently selected spindle When any of the miscellaneous functions M41 M42 M43 or M44 is programmed the CNC will tell the PLC so it selects the desired gear even if it is already selected When working with automatic gear changer the CNC will check the currently selected gear GEAR1 GEAR4 and if it does not match the selected speed the CNC will let the PLC know using the relevant auxiliary function M41 M42 M43 or M44 to select it gt Once the PLC selects the proper gear it indicates it to the CNC by means of the logic input corresponding to the spindle GEAR GEAR4 The spindle gear change depends on the setting of functions M41 through M44 in the M function table Spindle logic inputs The M41 M42 M43 or M44 function uses the AUXEND signal The CNC indicates to the PLC the selected gear M41 M42 M43 or M44 in one of the registers MBCD1 through MBCD7 and it activates the MSTROBE signal to let the PLC know that it must execute it When the PLC detects the activation of the MSTROBE signal it must deactivate the general logic input AUXEND to tell the CNC that the execution of the gear change has started LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Once executed this function the PLC will inform the CNC that the new gear has been selected by means o
399. sociated with it By default all the bits will be assigned the value of 0 Assigning the value of 1 activates the corresponding function Bit Meaning 0 Smooth stop of the probe 1 15 Not being used Default value in all the bits 0 Bit 0 Smooth stop of the probe G75 G76 This bit permits defining a smooth stop for probing moves bit 1 When the probe pulse is detected the following error is not reset thus making the probe stop more smoothly When setting the smooth stop a m p DERGAIN P25 and s m p FFGAIN P25 should be set to zero This may be done by setting the set of gains through g m p ACTGAIN2 P108 with the bit corresponding to G75 G76 Y MACHINE PARAMETERS General machine parameters FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 69 4 General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 70 CANSPEED P169 CAN bus transmission speed for the digital drives FEEDTYPE P170 ANGAXNA P171 The transmission speed depends on the length of the cable or total CAN connection distance Value Meaning 0 1 Mbit s Maximum distance 20 meters 1 800 kbit s Maximum distance 45 meters 2 500 kbit s Maximum distance 95 meters Default value 0 1 Mbit s Behavior of the feedrate when programming FO Value Meaning 0 Movement at maximum feedrate possible 1 cannot be programmed
400. sociated with the incline plane Value Meaning Value Meaning 0 None 5 V axis 1 X axis 6 W axis 2 Y axis 7 A axis 3 Z axis 8 B axis 4 U axis 9 C axis Default value 0 none ANGANTR P173 Angle between the Cartesian angle and the angular axis it is associated with If its value is 0 there is no need to do an angular transformation Positive angle when the angular axis has been rotated clockwise and negative if counterclockwise Possible values Within x90 degrees Default value 0 OFFANGAX P174 Distance between machine zero and the origin of the coordinate system of the incline axis Possible values Within 99999 9999 millimeters Within x3937 00787 inches Default value 0 COMPMODE It defines how to apply tool radios compensation P175 Value Meaning 0 With an angle between paths of up to 300 both paths are joined with straight sections In the rest of the cases both paths are joined with arcs Both paths are joined with arcs 2 With an angle between paths of up 300 it calculates the intersection In the rest of the cases such as COMPMODE 0 Default value 0 COMPMODE 0 The compensation method depends on the angle between paths For angles up to 3009 it compensates joining both paths with straight sections For angles over 300 it compensates joining both paths with arcs COMPMODE 2 The compensation method depends on the angle between paths For a
401. st be met The velocity command for the spindle must be analog 10V s m p SPDLTYPE PO 0 An encoder must be mounted onto the spindle s m p NPULSES P13 must indicate the number of square pulses supplied by the spindle encoder Also when switching from open to closed loop either an M19 or an M19 S 5 5 must be executed The S 5 5 code indicates the spindle position in degrees from the spindle reference point marker pulse Spindle CONCEPTS When switching form open to closed loop the CNC behaves as follows e fthe spindle has a home switch it performs a home switch search at the turning speed set by s m p REFEED1 P34 It then searches for actual marker pulse lo of the spindle encoder at the turning speed set by s m p REFEED2 P35 And finally it positions the spindle at the programmed S 5 5 point e Ifthe spindle does not have a home switch it searches the encoder marker pulse at the turning speed set by s m p REFEED2 P35 And then it positions the spindle at the programmed S 5 5 point Calculating spindle resolution The CNC assumes that one encoder revolution represents 360 Therefore the feedback counting resolution depends on the number of lines of the spindle encoder Resolution 360 4 x number of pulses per revolution Hence to obtain a resolution of 0 0019 90 000 line encoder is required and a 180 000 line encoder to obtain a resolution of 0 00052 s m
402. stallation manual 11 8 Variables associated with feedback ASIN X C A signal of the CNC s sinusoidal feedback for the X C axis BSIN X C signal of the CNC s sinusoidal feedback for the X C axis ASINS A signal of the CNC s sinusoidal feedback for the spindle BSINS signal of the CNC s sinusoidal feedback for the spindle 11 9 Variables associated with the main spindle Variables associated with the real speed SREAL It returns the actual real turning speed of the main spindle Its value is given in 0 0001 rpm units FTEOS It returns the theoretical turning speed of the main spindle Variables associated with spindle speed PLCS is a read write variable the rest are read only SPEED It returns the turning speed of the main spindle currently selected at the CNC Its value is given in 0 0001 rpm units This turning speed may be indicated by program by PLC or by the CNC selects one of them the one indicated by DNC has the highest priority and the one indicated by program has the lowest priority DNCS It returns the spindle speed limit selected via DNC If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected PLCS It returns the spindle speed limit selected via PLC If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected PRGS It returns the spindle speed limit selected by programa If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected Variables associated with constant cutting speed lathe model P
403. stance coded I0 Linear encoders IOCODI1 IlOCODI2 EXTMULT P68 P69 P57 SOP GOP MOT COT FOP 1000 1001 SVOP MOC COC MOP COP SMOTIME P58 ACCTIME2 P59 PROGAIN2 P60 DERGAIN2 P61 FFGAIN2 P62 Linear encoders 0 10CODI2 EXTMULT P68 P69 P57 SOX GOX MOX COX FOT 1000 1001 5 SVOX MOY COY 1000 1001 10 Rotary encoder 5 2000 2001 1 2000 2001 10 1000 1001 IOCODM l0CODI2 EXTMULT P68 P69 P57 90000 pulses 1000 1001 5 180000 pulses 1000 1001 10 18000 pulses 1000 1001 1 Sometimes the axis does not respond as desired on particular movements handwheel movements etc In these cases the axis response may be smoothed by applying a filter to speed variations This filter is set by parameter SMOTIME that indicates the duration of the filter in milliseconds value given by g m p LOOPTIME P72 Possible values Integers between 0 and 64 times the value assigned to g m p LOOPTIME P72 If LOOPTIME 0 4 ms the maximum value that could be assigned to SMOTIME will be 64 x 4 256 ms Default value 0 To obtain a better response parameter SMOTIME of the axes interpolating with each other should be set with the same value These parameters define the second set of gains and accelerations They must be set like the parameters that define the first set First set Second set ACCTIME P18 ACCTIME2 P59 PROGAIN P23 PROGAIN2 P60 P18 P23
404. status PLCREADY 0 PLC stopped PLCREADY 1 PLC running LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS General logic inputs If this mark is set to 0 The PLC program will stop This mark MUST be set to 1 so the CNC allows the spindle and or the axes to be moved Otherwise it will issue the corresponding error message INT1 M5024 INT2 M5025 INT3 M5026 INT4 M5027 The PLC sets one of these signals to logic state 1 to tell the CNC to interrupt the execution of the currently running program and jump to execute the interruption subroutine whose number is indicated in the general machine parameter INT1SUB P35 INT2SUB P36 INT3SUB P37 or INT4SUB P38 respectively All these inputs have the same priority and are active by level not by flank or edge Only the first one being detected high 1 will be attended to The status of these signals INT1 INT2 INT3 INT4 are not stored therefore itis recommended to activate these marks at the PLC by means of an instruction of the SET type These marks will be deactivated automatically when starting the execution of the corresponding subroutine An interruption subroutine cannot in turn be interrupted FAGOR BLKSKIP1 5028 The PLC sets this signal at high logic level tell the that the block skip CNC 8035 condition or 1 is met therefore the blocks which have this block skip condition will not be executed Sorr V11 1x Sor
405. sult of evaluating the logic expression is a 1 it assigns 0 to the indicated resource If the result is 0 it does not change the resource Example 112 OR NOT 122 RES M55 NOT RES M65 When the result of the logic expression is a 1 the PLC sets M55 0 but does not change M65 When the result of the logic expression is a 0 the PLC sets M65 0 and does not change M55 If expression 1 it complements the resource If the result of evaluating the logic expression is a 1 it complements the status of the indicated resource If the result is 0 it does not change the resource Example DFU 18 OR DFD M22 CPL B12R35 Every time an Up Flank leading edge is detected at input I8 or a down flank trailing edge in mark M22 the PLC will complement the status of bit 12 of register R35 Action instruction PLC PROGRAMMING FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 235 Action instruction PLC PROGRAMMING FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 236 8 5 3 Sequence breaking action instructions JMP CAL RET These actions interrupt the sequence of a program resuming it somewhere else in the program That area must be identified with a label L 1 256 A subroutine is any part of the program that starts with a label L1 256 and end with the directing instruction END Unconditional Jump If the result of evaluating
406. sume the new correct reference values Considerations If the axis is positioned beyond the software limits LIMIT P5 and LIMIT P6 it must be brought back into the work area within those limits and on the proper side for referencing home searching When using distance coded linear encoders home switches are no longer necessary However home switches may be used as travel limits during home search while homing the home switch is pressed the axis will reverse its movement and it will keep searching home in the opposite direction Distance coded Fagor linear encoders have negative coded marker pulses 10 Do not mistake the type of pulse provided by the feedback system with the value to be assigned to a m p REFPULSE P32 This parameter must indicate the type of active flank leading or trailing edge positive or negative of the reference mark lo used by the CNC If while homing an axis its corresponding DECEL signal is set high the axis will reverse movement and the home search will be carried out in the opposite direction 5 6 4 Axis travel limits software limits Once all the axes have been referenced their software limits must be measured and set This operation must be carried out one axis at a time and it could be done as follows Move the axis in the positive direction towards the end of the axis travel stopping at a safe distance from the mechanical end of travel stop Assign the coordinate shown
407. sumes the 2nd set of gains Initial machining conditions selected by machine parameter Indicates that the execution of the M S and T functions has completed Enables the timer Rejection of tool in use Deactivation of keyboard Possibility to abort the PLC channel PLC without errors Executes the interruption subroutine indicated in g m p P35 Executes the interruption subroutine indicated in g m p P36 Executes the interruption subroutine indicated in g m p P37 Executes the interruption subroutine indicated in g m p P38 The 1 block skip condition is met The 2 block skip condition is met The 3 block skip condition is met Stops execution of the part program when the auxiliary MO1 function is executed It activates the Retrace function Activates the second travel limits Type of path with Path Handwheel or Path jog It activates the Path Handwheel Path jog mode Selects rapid travel for all the movements that are executed in execution mode Limitthe feedrate of each axis to the value set in its machine parameter FLIMIT P75 Limit the spindle speed to the value set in its machine parameter SLIMIT P66 Finish the movement in progress and start executing the next block m APPENDIX Summary of PLC inputs and outputs FAGOR 2 8035 0 V11 1x T V12 1x 365 APPENDIX Summary of PLC inputs and outputs FAGOR 2 8035 So
408. t O The value indicated at the front panel or keyboard switch 1 0 x10 factor 0 O x100 factor If several axes are selected the following order of priority is applied X Y Z V W A B C If there are more than one bit set to 1 for an axis the least significant bit will be considered Thus c bt 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 x10 factor The HBE handwheel has priority That is regardless of the mode selected atthe CNC switch continuous or incremental JOG handwheel HBEVAR is to other than the CNC goes into handwheel mode It shows the selected axis in reverse video and the multiplying factor selected by the PLC When the HBEVAR variable is set to 0 it shows the mode selected by the switch again See 5 12 Fagor handwheels HBA HBE and LGB on page 186 It must be used when the path handwheel or the path jog is selected pa They must be used when the path handwheel or the path jog is selected Indicates the angle of the linear path On circular paths arcs they indicate the center d coordinates G18 MASCFI h ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES Variables associated with electronic handwheels FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 309 E Variables associated with feedback ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 310 O O in
409. t T V12 1x 260 BLKSKIP2 M5029 The PLC sets this signal at a high logic level to tell the CNC that the block skip condition 2 is met therefore the blocks which have this block skip condition will not be executed BLKSKIP3 M5030 The PLC sets this signal at a high logic level to tell the CNC that the block skip condition 3 is met therefore the blocks which have this block skip condition will not be executed MO1STOP M5031 The PLC sets this signal at a high logic level to tell the CNC to stop the execution of the part program when the auxiliary miscellaneous M01 function is executed RETRACE M5051 The CNC takes into account this input when retracing is available g m p RETRACAC other than zero If while executing a part program the PLC sets this signal high retracing is activated The CNC interrupts program execution and starts executing backwards what has been done so far When the PLC sets this signal back low retracing is canceled The CNC starts executing forward what was done backwards and it will go on to execute the part of the program that was not machined Retracing executes backwards the current block plus up to 75 blocks that were already executed The retracing function ends in the following cases When the previous 75 blocks are retraced When retraced all the way to the beginning of the program When finding a block that contains an M function only if RETRAC
410. t does not have bidirectional compensation it keeps the error values in the positive direction but it loses the error values in the negative direction Also the amount of error for the machine reference point must be zero Setting example The X axis ballscrew must be compensated in the positive direction for between X 20 and X160 according to the leadscrew error graph below Set a m p LSCRWCOM P15 ON and NPOINTS P16 7 Considering that the Machine Reference Point physical location of the marker pulse is located 30 mm from HOME machine reference zero at X30 The leadscrew error compensation parameters must be set as follows Point Position Positive error Negative error P001 X 20 000 EX 0 001 EX 0 P002 X 0 000 EX 0 001 EX 0 P003 X 30 000 EX 0 000 EX 0 P004 X 60 000 EX 0 002 EX 0 P005 X 90 000 EX 0 001 EX 0 FAGOR Z3 LE 22 NN X 130 000 EX 0 002 0 7 160 000 0 003 0 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 156 5 6 Reference systems A CNC machine needs the following origin and reference points defined Machine zero Machine s origin point This is set by the manufacturer as the origin of the system of coordinates of the machine Part zero Part origin point This is the point of origin which is set for programming the measurements of the part It can be freely selected by the programmer and its zero machine reference can b
411. t for the AUXEND signal M done to consider it executed and go on to the next program block CNC 8035 Value Meaning 0 The AUXEND signal is expected 1 The AUXEND signal is NOT expected Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 117 Tables MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 118 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 Indicates whether the M function is executed before or after the movement block where it is programmed Value Meaning 0 It is executed before the move 1 It is executed after the move Indicates whether the M function interrupts the block preparation or not Value Meaning 0 It does NOT interrupt the block preparation 1 It interrupts the block preparation Indicates whether the M function is executed or not after the associated subroutine is executed Value Meaning 0 It is executed after the associated subroutine 1 ONLY the associated subroutine is executed When bit 2 has been set to 1 it indicates whether block preparation is to be interrupted until the execution of the M function begins or until it ends until the M done signal is received Value Meaning 0 It interrupts block preparation until the execution of the M function begins 1 It interrupts block preparation until the M done signal AUXEND is received Not being used at this time Not being used at this time Not being used at this time
412. t of zone 5 along the selected axis X C Variables associated with work zones ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 303 11 Variables associated with feedrates ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 304 11 5 Variables associated with feedrates FREAL FREAL X C FTEO X C FEED DNCF PRGF PLCF FPREV DNCFPR PRGFPR PLCFPR Read only variables associated with the real actual feedrate It returns the CNC s real feedrate It takes into account the feedrate override and the acc dec of the machine In 0 0001 mm min or 0 00001 inch min units On Laser cutting machines it is recommended to use this variable to make the power of the Laser proportional to the actual feedrate at all times It returns the actual real CNC feedrate of the selected axis In 0 0001 mm min or 0 00001 inch min units It returns the theoretical CNC feedrate of the selected axis In 0 0001 mm min or 0 00001 inch min units Read only variables associated with function G94 It returns the feedrate selected at the CNC by function G94 In mm minute or inches minute This feedrate may be indicated by program by PLC or by DNC the CNC selects one of them the one indicated by DNC has the highest priority and the one indicated by program has the lowest priority It returns the f
413. t table This variable allows the value assigned to the wear in length K of the indicated tool offset n to be read or modified in the tool offset table Read and write variables of the lathe model This variable allows reading modifying the length value along the X axis assigned to the indicated tool offset n GOR racor 9 CNCRD TOX3 R100 M102 Loads R100 with the length value along X of the tool offset 3 9 3 CNC 8035 CNCWR R101 TOX3 M101 Assigns the value indicated in R101 to the length along X of tool offset 3 This variable allows reading or modifying the length value along the Z axis assigned to the indicated tool offset n Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x This variable allows reading or modifying the location code F of the indicated tool offset n This variable allows reading or modifying the radius R value of the indicated tool offset n 299 O installation manual 11 Variables associated with tools ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 300 TOIn TOKn NOSEAn NOSEWn CUTAn This variable allows reading or modifying the length wear value 1 along the X axis of the indicated tool offset n This variable allows reading or modifying the length wear value K along the Z axis of the indicated tool offset n This variable allows reading or modifying the cutter angle assigned
414. t that the timer is initialized it will be necessary to activate its trigger input to activate it again ss HL 7 Yn 2 n y d jt O o o n Operation of the TEN input in this mode If once the timer is activated TEN 0 is selected the PLC stops timing and it is necessary to assign TEN 1 for this timing to continue FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 213 Timers PLC RESOURCES FAGOR 2 8035 M V11 1x T V12 1x 214 7 5 2 Delayed connection mode TG2 input This operating mode allows a delay to be made between the activation of the trigger input TG2 and the activation of the T status of the timer The duration of the delay is determined by the time constant If the timer is initialized with values TEN 1 and TRS 0 the timer will be activated when a leading edge is produced at TG2 input At that moment timing t will start from a value of 0 Once the time specified by the time constant has elapsed the timing operation will be considered as having completed and the timer status output T 1 will be activated and will remain in this status until the trailing edge is produced in the trigger input TG2 The elapsed time will remain as a timer time value T once timing has been completed If once t
415. t the axis perpendicular to the active plane if this is XY ZX or YZ Example If the CNC controls the X and 2 axes and the Z axis is selected CNCRD LONGAX R22 M34 assigns the value of 3 to register R22 Returns in the least significant bits of the 32 bit group the status of the mirror image of each axis 1 in the case of being active and O if not 11221 1 The axis name corresponds to the number according to the programming order for them Example If the CNC controls the X Y and Z axes axis1 X axis2 Y axis 3 Z It returns the general scaling factor being applied It will be multiplied by 10000 Returns the specific scaling factor of the indicated axis X C It will be multiplied by 10000 This variable can only be used at the mill model It returns the rotation angle of the coordinate system currently selected with G73 Its value in 0 0001 degree units Returns probe status 0 the probe is not touching the part 1 the probe is touching the part Returns the time in seconds indicated by the system clock Possible values 0 4294967295 Returns the time in hours minutes seconds format CNCRD TIME R100 M102 assigns the time to register R100 For example if the time is 18h 22m 34s R100 will show 182234 Returns the date in year month day format CNCRD DATE R101 M102 assigns the date to register R101 For example if the date is April 25th 1992 R101 920425 It
416. tary encoders whose consecutive marker pulses are very close to each other When the selected axis does not have a machine reference home switch a m p DECINPUT P31 NO the CNC will move the spindle at the feedrate set by a m p REFEED2 P35 until the first marker pulse from the current position is found thus ending the home search FAGOR linear encoders scales provide a negative marker reference pulse lo every 50mm about 2 inches and the FAGOR rotary encoders provide one positive reference pulse per revolution Do not mistake the type of pulse provided by the feedback system with the value to be assigned to a m p REFPULSE P32 This parameter must indicate the type of active flank leading or trailing edge positive or negative of the reference mark lo used by the CNC CONCEPTS Reference systems FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 161 5 Reference systems FAGOR 2 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 162 5 6 3 Setting on systems with distance coded feedback Offset adjustment The offset of the linear encoder must be adjusted on one axis at a time preferably following this procedure 1 Set the following a m p REFDIREC P33 Homing direction REFEED2 P35 Homing feedrate 2 Verify that the value allocated to a m p REFPULSE P32 type of marker pulse of the feedback system is correct To do this set a m p DECIN
417. ted to those CNC parameters GUP To read or modify a global parameter of the CNC LUP To read or modify a local parameter of the CNC Example The axis is controlled by the PLC and we want to command it from any part program of the CNC in such way that we could select the type of move GOO or G01 the positioning coordinate and the feedrate for that move In order to command it from any part program it is convenient to have in a subroutine the section of the CNC program allowing the data transfer with the PLC This example uses subroutine SUB1 and for data exchange it uses global CNC parameters P100 Type of move If P100 0 then GOO If P100 1 then GO1 P101 U axis positioning coordinate P102 Feedrate It only makes sense when moving in GO1 To indicate to the PLC that it must execute this move it activates the following PLC resource M1000 Command to begin movement Any part program of the CNC may contain a block of the type PCALL 1 G1 U100 F1000 This block calls subroutine SUB1 and it transfers the local parameters G U and with the following information G Type of move U U axis positioning coordinate F Feedrate for the movement Subroutine SUB1 can be programmed as follows SUB 1 P100 G P101 U P102 F Data transfer to global parameters PLCM1000 PLCM1000 OR 1 Execution command for the PLC RET The PLC program in turn will have to contain the follow
418. ter is used with function G52 move to hardstop and it indicates the residual analog voltage supplied by the CNC to exert pressure once contact has been detected Possible values It is given in D A converter units and it admits integer values between 0 and 32767 which corresponds to an analog voltage of 10V Default value 0 STOPAOUT Minimum analog output This parameter is especially designed for hydraulic devices When using servo motors first reduce the maximum torque of the drive by means of an function in order to prevent the motor from overheating This parameter is used when function G50 controlled round corner is active 1 P52 53 MINMOVE P54 It defines the area before the programmed coordinate where the CNC considers the axis to be in position and goes on to execute the next block Possible values Between 0 and 99999 9999 degrees or millimeters Between 0 and 3937 00787 inches Default value 0 01 mm It should be assigned a value 10 times the value of INPOSW Axis machine parameter IOTYPE has two digits Units It indicates the type of lo signal marker pulse provided by the feedback device Value Meaning x0 normal l0 1 A type distance coded 10 x2 Type B distance coded reference mark only linear encoder COVS x3 Normal 10 search with retraction When using linear encoders with distance coded reference marks 10 set a m p IOCOD
419. tes the gap between 2 variable distance coded 1055 It is set in number of waves Possible values Between 0 and 65535 waves Default value For IOCODD1 P68 1000 Default value For IOCODD2 P69 1001 Example with Fagor linear encoder Gap between two fixed distance coded 20000 los Gap between two variable distance coded 20 020um los Signal period 20 um Number of waves between fixed Io s 20000 20 x EXTMULT 1000 Number of waves between variable 165 20020 20 x EXTMULT 1001 Values to be assigned for Fagor encoders with distance coded I0 Linear encoders 10 2 EXTMULT P68 P69 P57 SOP GOP MOT COT FOP 1000 1001 SVOP MOC COC MOP COP SOX GOX MOX COX FOT 1000 1001 SVOX MOY 1000 1001 10 2000 2001 LOP 1 LOX 2000 2001 10 FOX 1000 1001 25 Rotary encoder IlOCODI2 EXTMULT P68 P69 P57 90000 pulses 1000 1001 5 180000 pulses 1000 1001 10 HOP 5 18000 pulses 1000 1001 1 Filter order The down ramp is dampened down the larger the number the greater the drop Possible values From 0 to 4 Default value O the filter is not applied When applying a filter it must be set with an order of 3 Before setting it to another value consult with Fagor Automation s technical service ES If the filter has been designed wrong it will not be applied The filters are not applied while moving with an electronic handwheel or a mechanical han
420. the register will be rotated Examples RR1 R100 1 R200 1 type 1 rotation to the right of the contents of R100 leaving the result in R200 RL2 R102 4 R101 4 type 2 rotations to the left of the contents of R102 leaving the result in R101 RL2 R17 4 R20 R17z 0011 0000 1100 1100 0100 0110 1101 0100 20 0000 1100 1100 0100 0110 1101 0100 0011 8 5 6 Specific action instructions ERA CNCRD CNCWR Used to delete a group of resources Indicate the first and last resource to be erased Its programming format is ERA 1 512 1 512 O 1 512 1 512 M 1 5957 1 5957 T 1 256 1 256 C 1 256 1 256 1 559 1 559 2 1 2047 4000 4127 4500 4563 4700 4955 5000 5957 and registers R1 559 When deleting a group of 1 M or R the PLC sets them to 0 If a group of timers is erased this is the equivalent of Resetting them and if a group of counters is erased this is similar to making a preset with a value 0 for them This action is especially handy when executed in the first cycle module CY 1 in order to set the desired resources to their initial work conditions states Examples 112 ERA O5 12 If input 112 has a value of 1 the PLC will set to 0 outputs O5 thru O12 123 ERA C15 18 If input 123 21 the PLC presets counters C15 through C18 both included to 0 Access to the internal CNC variables Used to read CNCRD and write CNCWR the internal CNC vari
421. the active T 2 A new tool is selected for example T5 If carried out by means of action CNCEX1 the change is made by the CNC and it assumes T5 as the new active tool FAGOR If not carried out by means of action CNCEX1 the change is made by the PLC and T1 remains as the active tool P CNC 8035 3 Then an operation programmed with T1 is carried out If the change was made with action CNCEX1 the CNC detects the tool change from T5 to T1 and carries out the change If the change was not made with action CNCEX1 the CNC does not detect the tool change T1 it does not make the change and carries out the operation with Sort V11 1x the selected tool T5 with the problems this may cause pond T V12 1x 323 AXES CONTROLLED FROM THE PLC PLC execution channel FAGOR 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 324 12 1 PLC execution channel The CNC offers a parallel execution channel to execute commands received from the PLC This channel will have its own history and it permits the execution of blocks programmed from the PLC regardless of the operating mode being selected at the CNC at the time When the CNC receives a command from the PLC and it is executing another command received earlier it will store the new one in an internal buffer This new command will be executed after finishing the one being executed The internal buffer can store up to 3 commands received from the PLC besides th
422. the logic expression is a 1 it causes jump to the indicated label If the result is a it goes on to the next program line Example 18 JMP L12 If l8 1 it goes on to L12 M14 AND B7R120 O8 If 18 1 it is not executed CPS T2 EQ 2000 O12 If 1821 it is not executed L12 12 AND 123 OR M54 O6 Call to a subroutine If the result obtained in the evaluation of the logic expression is a 1 this action will execute the indicated subroutine Once the subroutine execution is over the PLC will continue at the action instruction or executable instruction programmed after CAL If the result obtained in the evaluation of the logic expression is a O this action will be ignored by the PLC without executing the subroutine Example 2 CAL L5 O2 With 12 1 subroutine L5 will be executed and once executed the PLC will set O2 to the value of input I2 21 If 12 0 the subroutine is not executed and the PLC sets output O2 to the status of input 12 20 Return or end of subroutine If the result obtained in the evaluation of the logic expression is a 1 this action will be treated by the PLC as if it involved the directing instruction END If the result is 0 the PLC will ignore it If while executing a subroutine the PLC detects a validated RET it will conclude the subroutine If END is not programmed as end of subroutine the PLC will continue executing until the end of the module END or the end of the p
423. the multiplying factor SINMAGNI to be applied by the CNC to the pulses provided by the encoder in order to obtain the desired resolution SINMAGNI ballscrew pitch Nr pulses x Resolution SINMAGNI 0 2 inch turn 250 x 0 0001 8 Therefore INCHES 1 0 20000 NPULSES 250 SINMAGNI 8 Although the CNC accepts a maximum squarewave frequency of 250 KHz when using Fagor sine wave rotary encoders their output frequency is limited to 200KHz thus the maximum possible feedrate F will be Max feedrate 200 000 pulses sec 250 pulses turn x 0 2 inch turn Max feedrate 160 inch sec 9 600 inch min Example 7 Resolution in degrees with squarewave encoder We would like to obtain a 0 0005 resolution by using a squarewave encoder mounted on a x10 reduction gear Since the CNC applies a x4 multiplying factor to squarewave signals we would require an encoder which provides the following number of pulses lines per turn Nr of pulses turn multiplying factor x gear ratio x Resolution Nr of pulses 360 4 x 10 x 0 0005 18 000 pulses turn Therefore INCHES 0 36 0000 NPULSES 18000 SINMAGNI 0 Although the CNC accepts maximum squarewave frequency of 400 KHz when using Fagor squarewave rotary encoders their output frequency is limited to 200KHz thus the maximum possible feedrate F will be Max feedrate 200 000 pulses sec 18 000 pulses turn Max feedrate 11 111 turn
424. thing to prevent the part program from starting it must set the general logic input CYSTART at a high logic level thereby starting the execution of the program When the CNC detects an up flank logic level change from low to high at the CYSTART signal it reset the START signal to low Example START AND rest of conditions CYSTART When the cycle START key is pressed the CNC activates the general logic output START The PLC must check that the rest of the conditions hydraulic safety devices etc are met before setting the general input CYSTART high in order to start executing the program FHOUT M5502 The CNC sets this signal high in order to tell the PLC that the execution of the program is stopped due to one of the following causes Because the CONTROL PANEL STOP key has been pressed Because the general logic input STOP has been set low even though later it has returned high Because the general logic input FEEDHOL is low RESETOUT M5503 The CNC sets this signal high for 100 milliseconds in order to tell the PLC that it is under initial conditions because the Reset key on the front panel has been pressed or because the general logic input RESETIN has been activated LOPEN M5506 The CNC sets this signal high in order to tell the PLC that the positioning loop of the axes is open since an error has occurred ALARM M5507 MANUAL M5508 AUTOMAT M5509 MDI M5510 SBOUT M5511 The CNC sets this signal
425. to the indicated tool n in the tool table This variable allows reading or modifying the cutter width assigned to the indicated tool n in the tool table This variable allows reading or modifying the cutting angle assigned to the indicated tool n in the tool table 11 2 Variables associated with zero offsets ORG X C ADIOF X C ORG X C n PLCOF X C These variables are associated with the zero offsettable due to which the values that will be assigned to or read from these fields will comply with the formats established for this table The possible zero offsets in addition to the additive offset indicated by the PLC are G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 and G59 The values are given in the units set by g m p INCHES If INCHES 0 in ten thousandths of a millimeter 999999999 If INCHES 1 in hundred thousandths of inch 393700787 If rotary axis ten thousandths of a degree 999999999 Although there are variables which refer to each axis the CNC only allows those referring to the axes selected at the CNC Thus if the CNC controls the X and Z axes it only allows the variables ORGX and ORGZ in the case of ORG X C Read only variables Returns the value of the active zero offset in the selected axis The value of the additive offset indicated by the PLC or by the additive handwheel is not included in this value It returns the value of the zero offset generated by the additive handwheel in the selected ax
426. tor X2 The emergency outputs of the CNC are ALARM M5507 Physical output to the PLC EMERGENCY OUTPUT Physical output to the outside Pin 2 of connector X2 There are to ways to cause an emergency at the CNC by activating the physical input EMERGENCY STOP or the general logic input EMERGEN from the PLC Whenever any of these signals is activated the CNC stops the axes feed and the spindle rotation and it displays the corresponding error message By the same token when the CNC detects an internal malfunction or at an external device it stops the axes feed and the spindle rotation displaying at the same time the corresponding error message In both cases the CNC will activate the EMERGENCY OUTPUT and ALARM signals to indicate to the PLC and to the outside world that an emergency has occurred at the CNC Once the cause of the emergency has disappeared the CNC will deactivate these signals to indicate to the PLC and to the outside world that everything is back to normal CONCEPTS Treatment of emergency signals Ol FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 181 5 Treatment of emergency signals FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 182 PLC Treatment of emergency signals The emergency inputs of the PLC are EMERGENCY STOP Physical input coming from the outside ALARM M5507 Physical input coming from the CNC The emergency outputs of
427. tput One or two enable buttons An axis selector switch 5 resolution selector switch n The encoder signals must be taken to the specific connectors of the CNC CONCEPTS Fagor handwheels HBA HBE and LGB Shield 0V 5V CNC In the example the handwheel signals are taken to the feedback input connector Set the corresponding g m p AXIS for example AXIS4 P3 11 The emergency button must be used in the safety chain of the electrical cabinet EMERGENCY SWITCH HBE HBA LGB ES 5 S HE im The HBE handwheel has one contact and the HBA and LGB models have a dual FAGOR safety contact The enable push button or buttons the axis selector and resolution selector switches are always handled by the PLC CNC 8035 Connection example and PLC program for the HBA 072914 handwheel Sort M V11 1x Sorr T V12 1x 186 ENABLING PUSH BUTTONS wi 41 e m 4 CONCEPTS Fagor handwheels HBA HBE and LGB Ol There are 2 ways to use the Enable Push Button 178 Just press one of the buttons 179 buttons must be pressed The examples uses input 179 making it necessary to push bot
428. tus of the timer programmed with G4 K in the CNC channel This variable returns the time remaining to end the timing block in hundredths of a second Linear theoretical feedrate resulting from the next loop in mm min The calculation of the resulting feedrate ignores the rotary axes slave axes gantry coupled and synchronized as well as DRO axes Read and write variables This variable allows reading or modifying the time in seconds indicated by the clock enabled by the PLC Possible values 0 4294967295 The CNC will set this value to 0 when changing the software version or when a checksum error occurs The has part counter whose count increases in all modes except simulation every time M30 or 2 is executed and this variable allows its value to be read modified This value will be between 0 and 4294967295 The CNC will set this value to 0 when changing the software version or when a checksum error occurs It allows reading the last accepted keystroke or simulating the CNC keyboard assigning the desired key code to it CNCRD KEY R110 M10 Loads register R110 with the value of the last key accepted To simulate the CNC keyboard from the PLC follow these steps R111 1 R110 0 CNCWR R111 KEYSCR M10 Indicates to the CNC that only keystrokes coming from the PLC must be processed CNC keyboard inhibited CNCWR R101 KEY M10 It indicates to the CNC that a key has been pressed whose code is in
429. tware V12 18 List of features June 2007 Manual OPT Copy and execute programs on Hard Disk KeyCF Version history T FAGOR 8035 XI Version history T FAGOR 8035 SAFETY CONDITIONS Read the following safety measures in order to prevent damage to personnel to this product and to those products connected to it This unit must only be repaired by personnel authorized by Fagor Automation Fagor Automation shall not be held responsible for any physical or material damage derived from the violation of these basic safety regulations Precautions against personal damage Interconnection of modules Use the connection cables provided with the unit Use proper Mains AC power cables To avoid risks use only the Mains AC cables recommended for this unit Avoid electrical overloads In order to avoid electrical discharges and fire hazards do not apply electrical voltage outside the range selected on the rear panel of the central unit O Ground connection In order to avoid electrical discharges connect the ground terminals of all the modules to the main ground terminal Before connecting the inputs and outputs of this unit make sure that all the grounding connections are properly made Before powering the unit up make sure that it is connected to ground In order to avoid electrical discharges make sure that all the grounding connections are properly made Do not work
430. tween 0 and 500 0 Hz Default value 30 Y Axis parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 91 NORBWID P73 Standardized bandwidth This parameter is only taken into account for the anti resonance notch filter type Possible values between 0 and 100 0 Default value 1 4 It is calculated with the following formula A 1 F Ao Points f1 and f2 correspond to the cutoff 0 707 Ao 3dB frequency or frequency at which its in 2 amplitude drops 3 dB or reaches 70 of the lu E nominal amplitude 5 5 2 4 5 HL NORBWID FREQUEN ul T FREQUEN f2 f1 X SHARE P74 Signal percentage that passes through the filter This value must be equivalent to the percentage overshooting of the resonance because it has to make up for it This parameter is only taken into account for the anti resonance notch filter type Possible values between 0 and 100 Default value 100 Calculation example for a particular response of the machine 4 07 FLIMIT P75 Maximum safety limit for the axis feedrate This limit is activated from the PLC and is applied to all the work modes including the PLC channel Possible values FAGOR Between 0 99999 9999 degrees min mm min Between 0 inches min and 3937 00787 inches min Default value 0 CNC 8035 This limit is activated for all the axes using the mark FL
431. ulse lo being used for Home Search Set a m p REFDIREC P33 to indicate the direction of the axis when searching Home Set g m p REFEED1 P34 and REFEED2 P35 to indicate the feedrates for Home search a m p REFVALUE 6 will be set to 0 the JOG mode and after positioning the axis in the right area start homing the axis When done the will assign a value to this point If the machine reference zero is in a different physical location from the machine reference point location of the marker pulse proceed as follows After moving the axis to a known position with respect to Machine Reference Zero observe the position reading of the CNC for that point This will be the distance away from the machine reference point thus the value to be assigned to a m p REFVALUE P36 will be Machine coordinate of the measured point CNC reading at that point Example If the point whose known position is located 230 mm from Machine Reference Zero and the CNC reads 123 5 mm as the coordinate value for this point the coordinate of the Machine Reference Point with respect to Machine Reference Zero will be REFVALUE 230 123 5 353 5 mm Assign this new value and press RESET so it is assumed by the CNC It is also necessary to search Home once again in order for this axis to assume the correct reference values Axis travel limits software limits Once all the axes have been referenc
432. ult value 0 none Indicates the number of the user program associated with the JOG mode This program will be executed via the user channel when pressing the softkey USER in the JOG mode Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 65535 Default value 0 none Indicates the number of the user program associated with the Diagnosis mode This program will be executed via the user channel when pressing the softkey USER in the DIAGNOSIS mode Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 65535 Default value 0 none They indicate the upper limit ROPARMAX and lower limit ROPARMIN of the global arithmetic parameter group P100 P299 user arithmetic parameters P1000 P1255 or OEM arithmetic parameters P2000 P2255 to be write protected There are no restrictions to read these parameters Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 9999 Internally between 100 and 299 Default value 0 it is not protected The parameters write protected from the CNC may be modified from the PLC Not being used Not being used Not being used Not being used Y MACHINE PARAMETERS General machine parameters FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 51 General machine parameters FAGOR 8035 0 M V11 1x T V12 1x 52 NPCROSSS P57 MOVAXIS3 P58 COMAXIS3 P59 TOOLSUB P60 CYCATC P61 TRMULT P62 T
433. umber of the tool offset corresponding to the next tool which is selected but is awaiting the execution of MO6 to be active Returns the position occupied in the tool magazine by the indicated tool n Read and write variables This variable allows the tool offset number of the indicated tool n to be read or modified in the tool table This variable allows the family code of the indicated tool n to be read or modified in the tool table This variable allows the value assigned as the nominal life of the indicated tool n to be read or modified in the tool table This variable allows the value corresponding to the real life of the indicated tool n to be read or modified in the tool table This variable allows the contents of the indicated position n to be read or modified in the tool magazine table The HTOR variable indicates the tool radius being used by the CNC to do the calculations Being a variable that can be read and written by the CNC and read only from the PLC and DNC its value may be different from the one assigned in the table TOR On power up after a T function after a RESET or after an M30 function it assumes the value of the table TOR TOLn TOZn TOFn TORn Application example To machine a profile with a residual stock of 0 5 mm running 0 1 with a tool whose radius is 10 mm Assign to the tool radius the value of 10 5 mm in
434. unctions GOO thru G24 GGSB R R Status of functions G25 thru G49 FA R GGSC R R Status of functions G50 thru G74 GO GGSD R Status of functions G75 thru G99 GGSE R R Status of functions G100 thru G124 GGSF R R Status of functions G125 thru G149 CNC 8035 GGSG R R Status of functions G150 thru G174 GGSH R Status of functions G175 thru G199 GGSI R R Status of functions G200 thru G224 GGSJ R R Status of functions G225 thru G249 GGSK R R Status of functions G250 thru G274 Sorr V11 1x GGSL R R Status of functions G275 thru G299 Sort T V12 1x GGSM R R Status of functions G300 thru G320 MSn GMS PLANE LONGAX Status of the indicated M function n Status of M functions M 0 6 8 9 19 30 41 44 Abscissa and ordinate axes of the active plane Axis affected by the tool length compensation G15 DUD 358 Variable CNC PLC DNC section 11 12 MIRROR R R R Active mirror images SCALE R R General scaling factor applied Reading from the PLC in ten thousandths SCALE X C R R R Scaling Factor applied only to the indicated axis Reading from the PLC in ten thousandths Rotation angle G73 of the coordinate system Abscissa of rotation center Ordinate of rotation center Returns probe status System clock in seconds TIME Time in Hours minutes and seconds DATE Date in Year Month Day format TIMER Clock activated by PLC in seconds CYTIME Time to execute a part in hundredths of a second PAR
435. unctions will be given in the 25 least significant bits and it will be indicated by a 1 when active and a 0 when not active or when not available in the current software version 159 oes ser es sme s It returns the status of functions G100 through G124 The status of each one of the functions will be given in the 25 least significant bits and it will be indicated by a 1 when active and a 0 when not active or when not available in the current software version G124 8123 68122 G121 6120 0104 6103 6102 8101 6100 Other variables ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 317 11 Other variables ACCESS TO THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 318 GGSF GGSG GGSH GGSI GGSJ GGSK GGSL GGSM PLANE It returns the status of functions G125 through G149 The status of each one of the functions will be given in the 25 least significant bits and it will be indicated by a 1 when active and a 0 when not active or when not available in the current software version G149 G148 G147 G146 6145 0129 1128 G127 3126 0125 returns the status of functions G150 through G174 The status of each one the functions will be given in the 25 least significant bits and it will be indicated by a 1 when active and a 0 when not active or when not av
436. urfaces The rest of the surfaces will not be considered in the total surface Power dissipated by the CNC The maximum power dissipated by the CNC is 55 W power supply not included FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 23 O installation manual HEAT DISSIPATION Heat dissipation by natural convection FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 24 2 1 Heat dissipation by natural convection Ta Surface without paint P A 5 Surface with smooth metallic enamel P 5 7 22 Heat dissipation by forced convection with inside fan Fan whose air flow is Q 13 6 m h facing down Surface without paint A 56 Surface with smooth metallic enamel _P 7 6 lt lt Fan whose air flow is Q 13 6 m h facing up Surface without paint A 58 Fan whose air flow is Q 30 m h facing down AAAAAAA Surface without paint A 6 15 AT Ta Surface with smooth metallic enamel P 9 1 AT mi mi Fan whose air flow is 102 m h facing down Surface without paint A Surface with smooth metallic enamel P 9 8 AT HEAT DISSIPATION Heat dissipation by forced convection with inside fan N F
437. uts ENABLE DIR etc which refer to the possible axes of the machine by means of digits 1 through ENABLE2 DIR1 etc or using the axis name ENABLEX DIRZ etc The marks of the axes that do not exist in the machine parameters assume the value of the M2045 mark that s always set to 0 When monitoring the PLC program it shows the edited marks either with a letter or with a number However the resource windows created from monitoring will replace the marks with axis names by the marks with axis numbers For example ENABLEX with ENABLE1 ENABLEZ by ENABLE2 if there is no Y axis but there are X and Z axes H H g The use of mnemonics with the axis name is available from versions V9 0x 0 and V10 0x on If PLC programs older than this version have defined these marks as symbols when compiling the program will issue an error on this line Example DEF ENABLEX M333 Logic outputs of the axes Mnemonics using numbers 1 through 3 These signals are numbered as the logic order of the axes it is not related to the values assigned to g m p AXIS1 PO through AXIS8 P7 LOGIC CNC INPUTS AND OUTPUTS For example if the CNC controls the X Z and Y axes the order will be X Y Z and therefore ENABLE1 DIR1 REFPOIN1 INPOS1 for the X axis ENABLE2 DIR2 REFPOIN2 INPOS2 for the Y axis ENABLES DIR3
438. uue Buiuunjei enaze FAGOR 8035 ADDITIONAL REMARKS Mount the CNC away from coolants chemical products blows etc which could damage it Before turning the unit on verify that the ground connections have been properly made In case of a malfunction or failure disconnect it and call the technical service Do not open this unit FAGOR 8035 Additional remarks FAGOR 8035 FAGOR DOCUMENTATION OEM Manual It is directed to the machine builder or person in charge of installing and starting up the CNC USER M manual Directed to the end user It describes how to operate and program in M mode USER T manual Directed to the end user It describes how to operate and program in T mode FAGOR 8035 XXIII uonejueuinoop 1 FAGOR 8035 CNC CONFIGURATION The CNC is prepared to be used in industrial environments especially on milling machines lathes etc The CNC can control machine movements and devices 1 1 CNC structure The central unit is located on the rear of the monitor Keyboard auto identification The keyboard has an auto identification system that updates g m p CUSTOMTY P92 automatically ae auto identifi
439. values It is given in D A converter units and it admits integer values between and 32767 which corresponds to an analog voltage of 10V Default value 0 not applied SERVOFF Analog voltage gt Spindle parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 99 Spindle parameters MACHINE PARAMETERS FAGOR 2 8035 Sort M V11 1x T V12 1x 100 LOSPDLIM P29 UPSPDLIM P30 DECINPUT P31 REFPULSE P32 REFDIREC P33 REFEED1 P34 REFEED2 P35 REFVALUE P36 MAXVOLT 1 P37 MAXVOLT 2 P38 MAXVOLT 3 P39 MAXVOLT 4 P40 Indicate the upper and lower limits of the actual spindle speed so the CNC can notify the PLC by means of the REVOK signal that the actual spindle rpms are the same as the programmed ones Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 255 Default value For LOSPDLIM P29 50 Default value For UPSPDLIM P30 150 Indicates whether or not the spindle has a home switch to synchronize the spindle when working in M19 Value Meaning NO It has no home switch YES It has a home switch Default value YES Indicates the type of marker pulse lo to synchronize the spindle when working in M19 Value Meaning sign Positive pulse 5 V sign Negative pulse 0 Default value sign Indicates the rotating direction when synchronizing the spindle during M19 Valu
440. variables ignores the additive zero offset 2 When displaying the position of the axes the CNC takes into account the additive offset except when showing the Command Actual To Go coordinates The coordinate returned by the POS X C and TPOS X C variables takes into account the additive zero offset Default value 0 The additive zero offset can be originated as follows With variable PLCOF X C it is possible to set an additive zero offset for each CNC axis from the PLC With the additive handwheel Not being used Indicates whether the general inputs STOP M5001 FEEDHOL M5002 and XFERINH M5003 are enabled P116 YES or not P116 NO while executing function G84 regular tapping or rigid tapping Sets the tool inspection feedrate When accessing tool inspection the CNC assumes this feedrate as the new one and it resumes the execution of the program at the previous feedrate the one used in the program or set via MDI while in tool inspection when tool inspection is over Possible values Between 0 0001 and 199999 9999 degrees min or mm min Between 0 00001 inches min and 7874 01574 inches min Default value NO If set to 0 by default tool inspection will be carried out at the feedrate currently used for machining Only to be used by Fagor Automation technical personnel Indicates whether the CNC issues an error message when the axes reach the programmed position without having received the
441. ve velocity command verify that it is stable left graph and that there are neither instabilities when starting up center graph nor when braking down right graph FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x SOFT T V12 1x 153 5 5 6 Leadscrew backlash compensation On this CNC the leadscrew backlash may be compensated for when reversing the direction of movement Leadscrew backlash is defined with a m p BACKLASH P14 Sometimes an additional analog pulse may also be needed to recover the possible backlash when reversing the axis movement The additional velocity command analog voltage pulse may be either rectangular or exponential for low speed it may be too high high speed or not enough for low speed when adjusted for high nU speed In these cases itis recommended to use the __ exponential type that applies a strong pulse initially and decreases in time 5 f 71 If the duration of the rectangular pulse is adjusted 1 Axis adjustment a m p BACKNOUT P29 sets the value of the additional analog voltage and a m p BACKTIME P30 indicates the duration of this additional analog pulse and general machine parameter ACTBAKAN P145 indicates the type of backlash peak applied FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 154 5 5 7 Leadscrew error compensation The CNC provides a table for each one of the axes requiring leadscrew compensation It
442. vement use CNC logic input HNLINARC M5053 M5053 0 Linear path M5053 1 Arc path For a linear path indicate the path angle in the MASLAN variable value in degrees between the linear path and the first axis of the plane For an arc indicate the arc center coordinates in the MASCFI MASCSE variables for the first and second axes of the main plane MASCSI p Variables MASLAN MASCFI and MASCSE may be read and written from the DNC and PLC Operation of the path jog feature The path jog mode is only available with the X axis keys When pressing one of the keys associated with the X axis the CNC behaves as follows Switch position Path jog Type of movement Continuous jog Only the axis and in the indicated direction Both axes in the indicated direction and along the indicated path Incremental jog OFF Only the axis the selected distance and in the indicated direction Both axes the selected distance and in the indicated direction but along the indicated path Handwheel L It ignores the keys The rest of the jog keys always work in the same way whether path jog is on or off The rest of the keys move only the axis and in the indicated direction CNC 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 133 Jog CONCEPTS FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x Sort T V12 1x 134 Considerations about the jog movements This m
443. very time the button is pressed mark M1000 is inverted M1000 MSG1 If the feature is active a message is displayed NOT M1000 AND KEYDIS4 SFF800000 KEYDIS4 JMP L101 If this feature is not active it enables all the positions of the feedrate override switch and resumes program execution DFU M2009 CNCRD HANPS R100 M1 SBS R101 R100 R102 MOV R100 R101 MLS R102 3 R103 OR KEYDIS4 7FFFFF KEYDIS4 If this feature is activated and an upflank occurs at the clock mark M2009 it reads in R100 the handwheel pulses HANPS calculates in R102 the number of pulses received from the last reading updates R101 for the next reading calculates in R103 the value of the right feedrate and inhibits all the positions of the feedrate override switch KEYDIS4 CPS R103 LT 0 5850 R103 R103 CPS R103 GT 120 MOV 120 R103 It adjusts the value of R103 feedrate It ignores the handwheel turning direction sign and limits the value to 120 DFU M2009 O installation manual R103 PLCFRO M1 With the up flank at the clock mark M2009 set the calculated feedrate override PLCFRO R103 1101 END CONCEPTS Movement with an electronic handwheel Ol FAGOR 8035 Sort M V11 1x SOFT T V12 1x 5 Movement with an electronic handwheel FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 140 5 3 4 Additive handwheel mode Wit
444. via DNC If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected It returns the speed limit of the main spindle in rpm currently selected by PLC If it has a value of 0 it means that it is not selected It returns the speed limit of the main spindle in rpm currently selected by program Maximum machining spindle speed This variable is also updated refreshed when programming function G92 via MDI Position related variables It returns the real position of the main spindle Its value is given in 0 0001 degree units within 999999999 It returns the real position of the main spindle in 360 module Its value is given in 0 0001 degree units within O and 360 It returns the theoretical position of the main spindle real position lag Its value is given in 0 0001 degree units within 999999999 It returns the theoretical position of the main spindle real position lag in 360 module Its value is given in 0 0001 degree units within O and 360 Position programmed in M19 via program for the main spindle This variable may be read from the CNC from the PLC and from DNC J O O Installation manual 7 t Read only variables associated with the following error axis lag FLWES Following error lag of the main spindle Its value is given in 0 0001 degree units within 999999999 ACCESS THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES Variables associated with the main spindle FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1
445. with a unitary gain gain of 1 as shown in the previous examples lm MM M a u Once the axes have been adjusted separately the ones being interpolated together should be further adjusted so their following errors are as identical as possible The more identical their following errors are the more round the programmed circles will turn out Si CONCEPTS Axis adjustment FAGOR 8035 Sorr M V11 1x T V12 1x 151 5 Axis adjustment FAGOR 8035 Sorr V11 1x T V12 1x 152 5 5 4 Feed forward gain setting With the feed forward gain it is possible to reduce the following error without increasing the gain thus keeping the system stable It set the percentage of analog output due to the programmed feedrate the rest depends on the proportional and derivative AC forward gains This gain is only to be used when operating with acceleration deceleration For example if a m p FFGAIN P25 has been set to 80 the axis analog voltage will be 8096 of it will depend on the programmed feedrate feed forward gain 2096 of it will depend on the axis following error proportional gain Setting the Feed Forward gain involves a critical adjustment of a m p MAXVOLT P37 1 Move the axis in GOO and at 1096 2 Measure the actual analog voltage at the drive 3 Set parameter MAXVOLT P37 to a value 10 times the measur
446. with respect to machine reference zero home If a lathe model CNC these values must be in radius gt RBZMAX 7 4 RBZ N 22 RBY N 1 gt RBXMIN PRBXMAX ai i PRBXMIN Probe s minimum X coordinate Probe s maximum X coordinate PRBYMIN Probe s minimum Y coordinate PRBYMAX Probe s maximum Y coordinate PRBZMIN Probe s minimum Z coordinate Probe s maximum Z coordinate Possible values 99999 9999 mm or 3937 00787 inches Default value 0 PRBMOVE P46 USERDPLY P47 USEREDIT P48 USERMAN P49 USERDIAG P50 ROPARMIN P51 ROPARMAX P52 PAGESMEM P53 NPCROSS2 P54 MOVAXIS2 P55 COMAXIS2 P56 Indicates the maximum distance the tool can travel when calibrating it with a probe in JOG mode Possible values Between 0 0001 and 99999 9999 millimeters Between 0 00001 and 3937 00787 inches Default value 50 mm Indicates the number of the user program associated with the execution mode This program will be executed via the user channel when pressing the softkey USER in the EXECUTE mode Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 65535 Default value 0 none Indicates the number of user program associated with the Edit mode This program will be executed via the user channel when pressing the softkey USER in the EDIT mode Possible values Integer numbers between 0 and 65535 Defa
447. x SOFT T V12 1x 313 11 ACCESS THE INTERNAL CNC VARIABLES Variables associated with local and global parameters FAGOR 8035 Sort V11 1x T V12 1x 314 11 10 Variables associated with local and global parameters GUP n LUP a b The CNC offers two types of general purpose variables local parameters PO through P25 and global parameters P100 through P299 Itis possible to assign local parameters to more than one subroutine Up to 6 nesting levels of the local parameters are possible within the 15 nesting levels for the subroutines Therefore each time a local parameter must be referred to it is necessary to indicate its current nesting level Local and global parameters may be assigned a value within 2147483647 Reading these parameters using functions GUP and LUP gives an integer number ignoring its decimals Likewise if the parameter value is greater than 2147483647 the obtained value will be the maximum allowed i e either 2147483647 or 2147483647 Read and write variables It allows reading or modifying the indicated global parameter n P100 P299 CNCRD GUP 155 R100 M102 Loads register R100 with the value of global parameter P155 CNCWR R101 GUP 155 M102 It assigns the value of global parameter P155 to register R100 It permits reading or modifying the indicated local parameter PO P25 b of the indicated nesting level a 15 02
448. xes The parameter ANGAXNA configures the incline axis The parameter ORTAXNA defines the axis perpendicular to the Cartesian axis associated with the incline axis The parameter OFFANGAX sets the distance between machine zero and the origin that defines the coordinate system of the incline axis The axes defined in parameters and ORTAXNA must exist and must be linear Those axes may have Gantry axes associated with them Angle of the incline axis The parameter ANGANTR defines the angle between the Cartesian axis and the angular axis itis associated with The angle is positive when the angular axis has been rotated clockwise and negative if otherwise If its value is 0 there is no need to do an angular transformation Programming and movements Coordinates display If the incline axis is active the coordinates displayed will be those of the Cartesian system otherwise it will display the coordinates of the real axes Movement programming The incline plane is activated from the part program function G46 Two kinds of movements may be executed The movements are programmed in the Cartesian system and are transformed into movements on the real axes Movementalong the incline axis but programming the coordinate in the Cartesian system While this mode is active in the motion block only the coordinate of the incline axis must be programmed Jog movements PLC mark MACHMOVE determines how the manual move
449. xternal fast fuse F 6 b 2 9 x9 Xt 2 x2 XA X5 X6 Inputs Outputs All the digital inputs and outputs have galvanic isolation via optocouplers between the CNC circuitry and the outside Precautions during repair N Do notopen this unit Only personnel authorized by Fagor Automation may open this unit Do not handle the connectors with the unit connected to mains Before manipulating the connectors inputs outputs feedback etc make sure that the unit is not connected to AC power Safety symbols Symbols which may appear on the manual N y y Symbol for danger or prohibition Itindicates actions or operations that may cause damage to people or to units Due Warning or caution symbol It indicates situations that may be caused by certain operations and the actions to be taken to prevent them Obligation symbol It indicates actions and operations that must be carried out Information symbol It indicates notes warnings and suggestions Safety conditions FAGOR 2 8035 Safety conditions FAGOR 8035 WARRANTY TERMS Initial warranty All products manufactured or marketed by FAGOR carry a 12 month warranty for the end user which could be controlled by the our service network by means of the warranty
450. y means of the general logic outputs MSTROBE SSTROBE TSTROBE and T2STROBE that the required auxiliary functions must be executed MINAENDW MINAENDW When the PLC detects that one ofthe STROBE signals is active it must deactivate the general logic input AUXEND to tell the CNC that the execution of the corresponding function or functions is starting The PLC will execute all the auxiliary functions required it being necessary to analyze the MSTROBE SSTROBE T2STROBE general logic outputs and the MBCD1 7 SBCD TBCD and T2BCD variables in order to do this Once this has been executed the PLC must activate the general logic input AUXEND to indicate to the CNC that the processing of the required functions was completed Once the general input is activated the CNC will require that this signal be kept active for a time period greater than the value given to the g m p MINAENDW P30 This way erroneous interpretations of this signal by the CNC due to an improper PLC program logic are avoided Once the period of time MINAENDW has elapsed with the general input at a high logic level the CNC will deactivate the general logic outputs MSTROBE SSTROBE TSTROBE T2STROBE to tell the PLC that the execution of the required auxiliary function or functions has been completed When the block being execute
451. y or frequency at which its amplitude drops 3 dB or reaches 7096 of the nominal amplitude 24 NORBWID EELS f 2 FREQUEN 2 5 71 Signal percentage that passes through the filter This value must be equivalent to the percentage overshooting of the resonance because it has to make up for it This parameter is only taken into account for the anti resonance notch filter type Possible values between 0 and 100 Default value 100 Calculation example for a particular response of the machine Ar Ao f SHARE 100 Ar Ao Ao INPREV1 P72 When using a CAN servo system only with DRIBUSLE 0 these parameters set OUTPREV1 P73 the gear ratios in each range INPREV2 P74 OUTPREV2 P75 Parameters INPREV1 trough INPUTRE4 indicate the input speed for each gear INPREV3 P76 OUTPREV3 P77 Parameters OUTPREV1 through OUTPREV4 indicate the output speed for each INPREV4 P78 gear OUTPREV4 P79 When using a CAN servo system if parameter NPULSES and parameters INPREV and OUTPREV of all the gears are set with a 0 value the CNC will assume the equivalent ones of the drive JERKLIM P80 Square sine bell shape ramp acceleration This type of ramp is used to gain in smoothness This spindle parameter becomes effective with RESET in machine parameters Value Meaning JERKLIM 0 Linear acceleration ramp Default value 0 A JERKLIM value other than zero activates the square sine ramp

CNC 8035 - Installation manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents